Owner's Manual

>> Owner's Manual

smart EQ fortwo and smart EQ fortwo cabrio

É45358448160ËÍ

4535844816

Order no. 6522 0312 02

Part no. 4535844816

Edition ÄJ2018-1b

www.smart.com smart - A Daimler brand

smart EQ fortwo and smart EQ fortwo cabrio Owner's Manual

Publication details

Internet

Further information about smart vehicles

and about Daimler AG can be found on the

following websites:

http://www.smart.com

http://www.daimler.com

Editorial office

You are welcome to forward any queries or

suggestions you may have regarding this

Owner's Manual to the technical documen-

tation team at the following address:

Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,

70546 Stuttgart, Germany

Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated

or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in

part, without written permission from

Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AG

Mercedesstraße 137

70327 Stuttgart

Germany

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

The following symbols are used in this

Owner's Manual:

WARNING

Warning notes draw your attention to

hazards that may endanger your health

or life, or the health or life of others.

Observe the warning notes.

Environmental note

Environmental notes provide you with

information on environmentally aware

actions or disposal.

Notes on material damage alert you to

dangers that could lead to damage to

your vehicle.

These symbols indicate useful instruc-

tions or further information that could be

helpful to you.

X Instructions that must be followed.

X Several consecutive symbols indicate an

instruction with several consecutive steps.

(Y page) Further information on a topic

YY A warning or an instruction that is

continued on the next page.

Display text: Display text in the instru-

ment cluster display, the smart Audio-Sys-

tem or the smart Media-System.

WARNING

If the front passenger airbag has been

activated, a child on the front passenger

seat may be hit by the front passenger

airbag in the event of an accident. There

is a risk of injury or fatal injury.

NEVER use a rearward-facing child

restraint system on a seat protected by

an ACTIVE FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERI-

OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Observe the "Children in the vehicle" sec-

tion .

As at 27.06.2018

About this Owner's Manual

Before you first drive off, read this Owner's

Manual carefully and familiarise yourself

with your vehicle. For your own safety and

a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions

and warning notices in this Owner's Man-

ual. Disregarding them may lead to damage

to the vehicle or personal injury.

This Owner's Manual provides information

on the most important functions of your

vehicle.

The equipment or model designation of

your vehicle may vary according to:

Model

Order

Country variant

Availability

The illustrations in this Owner's Manual

show a left-hand-drive vehicle. On right-

hand-drive vehicles, the layout of compo-

nents and controls differs accordingly.

smart is constantly updating its vehicles to

the state of the art.

smart therefore reserves the right to intro-

duce changes in the following areas:

Design

Equipment

Technical features

Therefore, the description may differ from

your vehicle in some cases.

Integral parts of the vehicle include:

Owner's Manual

Service Booklet

Equipment-dependent Supplements

These documents should be kept in the

vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle,

always pass all documents on to the new

owner.

Your Owner's Manuals:

Digital – on the Internet

The Owner's Manual on the Internet

provides you with convenient access

to all the information relevant to your

vehicle and multimedia system. It also

offers helpful animations, exciting

background information and a wide

variety of search options.

Digital – as an App

Using the smart guides App, you can

call up all of the information relevant

to your vehicle and multimedia system

online on your phone or as a download

regardless of the status of your net-

work connection. Available for smart-

phones or tablets.

QR codes for the smart guides App.

Apple

iOS

Android™

Please note that the smart guides App may

not currently be available in your country.

4535844816

É45358448160ËÍ

Index ......................................................... 5

Introduction ........................................... 22

Protecting the environment ................. 22

smart genuine parts .............................. 22

Warranty for the smart Audio-

System and smart Media-System ........ 23

Vehicle equipment ................................. 23

Declarations of conformity ................... 23

Operating safety .................................... 25

Information on the REACH Regula-

tion .......................................................... 28

QR codes for rescue card ....................... 29

Data stored in the vehicle .................... 29

At a glance .............................................. 31

Cockpit .................................................... 31

Multifunction steering wheel .............. 32

Centre console with drawer .................. 33

Overhead control panel ......................... 34

Door control panel ................................. 35

Displays shown in the instrument

cluster and the display ......................... 36

Safety ...................................................... 37

Occupant safety ..................................... 37

Travelling safely with children in

the vehicle .............................................. 43

Pets in the vehicle ................................. 57

Driving safely ........................................ 57

Entering and setting up ........................ 61

Understanding functions of the

key ........................................................... 61

Opening the door ................................... 61

Correct driver's seat position ............... 61

Adjusting the seats ............................... 62

Adjusting the steering wheel ............... 63

Adjusting the mirrors ............................ 64

Using the armrest .................................. 65

Driving ..................................................... 66

Starting the engine ............................... 66

Pulling away .......................................... 66

Automatic transmission ........................ 68

Using the turn signals .......................... 69

Acoustic presence indicator ................. 69

Radar-based recuperation ................... 69

Driving economically ............................ 70

Braking correctly ................................... 73

Driving on wet roads ............................. 74

Winter driving ........................................ 74

Lane Keeping Assist .............................. 75

Cruise control and limiter .................... 76

Charging the high-voltage bat-

tery .......................................................... 77

Ensuring good visibility ........................ 86

Switching on the lighting ..................... 86

Adjusting the lighting .......................... 87

Using the interior lighting ................... 88

Using the windscreen wipers ............... 88

Folding the sun visor to the side ......... 90

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle

interior .................................................... 91

Locking and unlocking the vehicle

from the inside ....................................... 91

Understanding the reversing

function .................................................. 92

Opening and closing the windows ....... 92

Using the soft top (smart EQ for-

two cabrio) .............................................. 93

Fitting and removing the draught

stop (smart EQ fortwo cabrio) .............. 96

Operating the climate control sys-

tem ........................................................... 96

Activating/deactivating the seat

heating and steering wheel heat-

ing ........................................................... 99

Using the accessories .......................... 100

Parking and getting out ...................... 102

Parking .................................................. 102

Using the parking aid ......................... 102

Using the reversing camera ............... 103

Locking the vehicle ............................. 105

Priming and deactivating the

anti-theft alarm system ..................... 105

Contents

Operating the on-board computer ..... 106

Overview of the on-board com-

puter ...................................................... 106

Calling up displays .............................. 107

Setting values ...................................... 109

Using the smart Audio-System ........... 112

Operating and setting the smart

Audio-System ....................................... 112

Listening to the radio .......................... 114

Using a mobile phone .......................... 115

Operating external data storage

media ..................................................... 118

Using the smart Media-System .......... 120

Operating and setting up the

smart Media-System ........................... 120

Listening to the radio .......................... 125

Displaying energy consumption ........ 126

Using a mobile phone .......................... 127

Connecting and operating external

data storage media .............................. 132

Viewing images .................................... 133

Video playback ..................................... 134

Using TomTom Services ...................... 135

Using the navigation system ............. 137

Using online offerings ......................... 147

Online access to the vehicle ............... 147

Using smart "ready to" services ........ 148

Loading and stowing ............................ 149

Stowing small objects ......................... 149

Stowing luggage and large objects ... 150

Using the boot separator .................... 152

Removing/fitting the charging

cable bag ............................................... 153

Maintenance and care .......................... 155

Useful information ............................... 155

Removing/fitting the subwoofer ........ 155

Opening and closing the service

cover ...................................................... 155

Checking service products and

topping up ............................................ 157

Checking wheels and tyres ................. 158

Changing a wheel ................................ 159

Using the tyre pressure monitor ....... 163

Checking the tyre pressures .............. 164

Using winter tyres ............................... 165

Using snow chains ............................... 165

Changing the window wiper

blades .................................................... 166

Cleaning the vehicle ............................ 167

Observing service due dates .............. 172

Parking up the vehicle ........................ 172

Dealing with accidents and break-

downs .................................................... 173

Securing the vehicle in the event

of an accident or a breakdown ........... 173

Removing the first-aid kit .................. 176

Removing the fire extinguisher ......... 176

Removing the vehicle tool tray .......... 177

Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT

kit ........................................................... 177

Towing the vehicle .............................. 180

Manually releasing the selector

lever lock .............................................. 181

Replacing the bulbs ............................ 182

Replacing fuses .................................... 185

Replacing the key battery .................. 186

Open a door with the emergency

release. .................................................. 186

Locking the doors in an emer-

gency ..................................................... 187

Practical advice .................................... 188

Notes on display messages ................ 188

Locking and unlocking ........................ 188

Vision, vehicle occupants, airbag ...... 190

Engine, brakes, transmission ............. 192

Charging process ................................. 194

Driving safety systems ....................... 197

Driver assistance systems .................. 202

Battery, lights, heating ....................... 205

smart Audio-System and smart

Media-System ...................................... 207

Contents

Technical data ...................................... 210

Obtaining technical data .................... 210

Reading vehicle data ........................... 210

Service products .................................. 212

Bulb types ............................................. 212

Fuse allocation ..................................... 213

Radio type approvals for the tyre

pressure monitors ................................ 215

Installing two-way radios and

mobile phones ...................................... 216

Contents

1, 2, 3 ...

12 V battery

Important safety notes ................... 27

12 V socket

see Socket (12 V)

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 197

Function/notes ................................. 57

Warning lamp (yellow) .................. 197

Acceleration

see Kickdown

Acoustic presence indicator

Deactivating/activating ................. 69

Function/notes ................................. 69

Activating voicemail ............................ 131

Active Brake Assist

Activating or deactivating ............. 59

Display message ............................ 202

Forward collision warning

function ............................................ 59

Function/notes ................................. 58

Important safety notes ................... 58

Switching off/on (on-board

computer with colour display) ..... 110

Switching on/off (on-board

computer with monochrome

display) ........................................... 109

Adding a contact to favourites ........... 131

Adjusting the headlamp range ............. 87

Air conditioning

General notes ................................... 96

Air distribution

Setting (automatic climate

control) ............................................. 97

Air pressure

see Tyre pressure

Air vents

Important safety notes ................... 99

Setting ............................................... 99

Air vents

see Air vents

Air-recirculation mode

Switching on/off (automatic

climate control) ................................ 97

Airbag

Enabling and disabling the

passenger airbag* ........................... 53

Headbag ............................................ 41

Installation locations ...................... 41

Limited protection ........................... 42

Overview ........................................... 41

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator

lamps ................................................. 43

Airbags

Front airbag (driver, front

passenger) ........................................ 41

Kneebag ............................................ 41

Protection provided ......................... 41

Sidebag ............................................. 41

Triggering ........................................ 38

Windowbag ....................................... 41

Alarm

Anti-theft alarm system ............... 105

Switching off .................................. 105

Alerts

Setting (Audio-System) ................ 115

Ambient lighting

Setting the brightness .................. 111

Switching on/off ............................ 111

Android Auto™

Using ............................................... 130

Animals

see Pets in the vehicle

Anti-entrapment feature

see Reversing feature

Anti-lock Braking System

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-skid chains

see Snow chains

Anti-theft alarm system

Priming/deactivating .................... 105

Switching off the alarm ................ 105

Aquaplaning ........................................... 74

Ashtray .................................................. 100

Audio-System

Connecting a mobile phone .......... 115

Connecting Bluetooth

audio

devices ............................................ 119

Connecting external audio

equipment (AUX) ............................ 118

Operating ........................................ 112

Operating the radio ....................... 114

Index

Overview ......................................... 112

Setting interruption for news ...... 115

Setting the time ............................. 113

System settings ............................. 113

Troubleshooting ............................. 207

Using external devices .................. 112

Volume/sound settings ................. 113

Warranty ........................................... 23

Authorised workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

Automatic climate control

Activating/deactivating air-

recirculation mode .......................... 97

Cooling with air dehumidifica-

tion .................................................... 97

Demisting the rear window ............ 98

Demisting the windscreen .............. 98

Increasing/decreasing the

blower speed .................................... 97

Setting air distribution .................. 97

Setting the temperature ................. 97

Switching on/off .............................. 97

Windows misted up ......................... 98

Automatic headlamp mode .................... 86

Automatic transmission

Display message ............................ 194

Engaging neutral ............................. 68

Engaging reverse gear .................... 68

Engaging the park position ............ 68

Important safety notes ................... 68

Kickdown .......................................... 69

Manually releasing the selec-

tor lever lock .................................. 181

Pulling away .................................... 66

Starting the engine ......................... 66

Transmission positions .................. 68

AUX jack

Audio-System ................................. 112

Media-System ................................ 120

Battery

Display message ............................ 205

Battery

see High-voltage battery

Battery (key)

Important safety notes ................. 186

Replacing ........................................ 186

Battery (vehicle)

see High-voltage battery

Belt

see Seat belt

Belt tensioner

Activation ......................................... 38

Belt warning ........................................... 41

Blower speed

Increasing or decreasing

(automatic climate control) ............ 97

Bluetooth

Activating mobile phone

(Audio-System) ...................... 115, 116

Activating the mobile phone

(Media-System) .............................. 127

Authorising function for

mobile phone (Audio-System) ...... 116

Connecting a device (Media-

System) ........................................... 132

Connecting a different mobile

phone ....................................... 116, 128

Operating (Audio-System) ............ 119

Switching on/off (Media-Sys-

tem) ................................................. 127

Bonnet (front)

see Service cover

Boot

see Tailgate

Boot separator

Fitting ............................................. 152

Removing ........................................ 153

Brake

EBD ..................................................... 60

Brake Assist

see Active Brake Assist

Brake fluid

Display message ............................ 193

Brake force distribution

see EBD (electronic brake force

distribution)

Brake lamp

Replacing bulbs ............................. 183

Brake lamps

Display message ............................ 206

Brakes

ABS ..................................................... 57

Driving tips ...................................... 73

Index

Important safety notes ................... 73

Parking brake ................................... 67

Warning lamp ................................. 193

Braking

Braking on steep downhill gra-

dients ................................................ 74

Braking on wet road surfaces ........ 74

Limited braking performance

on salt-treated roads ...................... 74

Breakdown

Towing away .................................. 180

see Flat tyre

Call

Ending ............................................. 129

Car

see Vehicle

Car key

see Key

Car park

Destination entry .......................... 138

Car wash

see Care

Car wash (care) ..................................... 168

Care

Automatic car wash ....................... 168

Carpets ............................................ 171

Cleaning the interior ..................... 170

Cleaning the roof lining (smart

fortwo coupé) .................................. 171

Display ............................................ 170

Exterior ........................................... 167

Exterior lighting ............................ 170

High-pressure cleaner .................. 168

High-voltage battery ...................... 80

Interior ............................................ 170

Matt paintwork .............................. 167

Notes ............................................... 167

Paint ................................................ 170

Plastic trim ..................................... 171

Reversing camera .......................... 168

Roof lining ...................................... 170

Seat belt .......................................... 170

Seat cover ....................................... 171

Selector lever ................................. 170

Sensors ............................................ 169

Soft-top system ............................. 170

Steering wheel ............................... 170

Trim pieces ..................................... 171

Vehicle ............................................ 167

Washing by hand ........................... 168

Wheels ............................................. 169

Windows .......................................... 169

Wiper blades ................................... 169

Central locking

Automatic locking ............................ 91

Locking/unlocking (key) ............... 105

Centre console

Overview ........................................... 33

Changing the route

Navigation ...................................... 140

Charge cable

Display message ............................ 194

Charge level display .............................. 71

Charging

see Charging the high-voltage

battery

Charging cable

Connection ........................................ 84

Control panel .................................... 83

Disconnecting .................................. 84

Heating up ........................................ 80

Storing .............................................. 85

Charging cable bag

Removing/fitting ........................... 153

Charging current

Display messages .......................... 194

Child seat

Approval categories ........................ 48

Basic instructions ........................... 43

Disabling or enabling the front

passenger front airbag ................... 53

Front passenger seat (notes) .......... 56

ISOFIX/i-Size (fitting) ..................... 51

Notes on risks and dangers ............ 44

Recommendations for child

restraint systems ............................ 46

Seats suitable for belt-secured

child restraint systems .................. 55

Seats suitable for ISOFIX child

restraint systems ............................ 49

Securing (notes) ............................... 48

Securing on the front

passenger seat ................................. 56

Index

Suitability of the seats for i-

Size child restraint systems .......... 51

Top Tether ........................................ 52

Children

Avoiding dangers in the vehi-

cle ...................................................... 44

Basic instructions ........................... 43

Cigarette lighter ................................... 100

Cleaning

see Care

Climate control

Automatic air conditioning ............ 97

Setting the air vents ....................... 99

Clock

Setting the time (Media-Sys-

tem) ................................................. 123

Cockpit

Overview ........................................... 31

Collision warning

Warning lamp ................................. 202

COMAND display

Cleaning .......................................... 170

Connecting a telephone

Deleting a mobile phone ............... 128

Connectivity manager .......................... 136

Constant headlamp mode

see Daytime driving lights

Consumption details

Calling up (Media-System) ........... 127

Continuous wipe ..................................... 89

Switching on/off .............................. 89

Controlling speed

see Cruise control

Coolant

Checking coolant level and

topping up ...................................... 157

Important safety notes ................. 157

Cooling

see Climate control

Cooling with air dehumidification

Automatic climate control .............. 97

Cornering light function ........................ 87

Cover (front)

see Service cover

Crosswind Assist ..................................... 59

Cruise control

Activating ......................................... 76

Buttons .............................................. 76

Calling up the speed last

stored ................................................ 77

Cancelling cruise control ................ 76

Deactivating ..................................... 77

Display message (colour dis-

play) ................................................ 204

Display message (monochrome

display) ........................................... 204

Function/notes ................................. 76

General notes ................................... 76

Important safety notes ................... 76

Increasing/decreasing the

speed ................................................. 76

Storing and maintaining cur-

rent speed ......................................... 76

Cup holder

Centre console ................................ 149

Important safety notes ................. 149

Cup holder

see Cup holder

DAB radio

see Digital radio

Dashboard

see Cockpit

Data

see Technical data

Data sharing

Managing ........................................ 136

Data storage media

see External data storage media

Daytime driving lights ........................... 86

Dealership

see Qualified specialist workshop

Declarations of conformity .................... 23

Diagnostics connection .......................... 26

Digital radio

Audio-System ................................. 114

Displaying services (Media-

System) ........................................... 126

EPG (Electronic Programme

Guide) (Media-System) ................. 126

Frequency range (Audio-Sys-

tem) ................................................. 114

Intellitext™ (Media-System) ........ 126

Index

Introducing (Audio-System) ........ 114

Media-System ................................ 125

Setting interruption for news

(Audio-System) .............................. 115

Slide show (Media-System) .......... 126

Digital speedometer

Displaying ...................................... 110

Dipped-beam headlamps

Driving abroad ................................. 88

Replacing bulbs ............................. 182

Switching on/off .............................. 86

Disconnecting ....................................... 128

Display

Colour .............................................. 106

Monochrome ................................... 106

Display message

Colour display ................................ 109

Display messages

General information ...................... 188

Display mode

Frequency display mode ....... 125, 126

List display mode .......................... 125

Preset display mode ...................... 125

Disposal of old devices .......................... 80

Distance recorder

Monochrome display ..................... 107

Distance recorder

see Trip meter

Door

Automatic locking (switch) ............ 91

Central locking/unlocking

(key) ................................................ 105

Control panel .................................... 35

Display message ............................ 189

Emergency locking ........................ 187

Emergency unlocking ................... 186

Opening (from the inside) ............... 91

Unlocking (key) ................................ 61

Double lock function .............................. 91

Draught stop

Inserting and removing .................. 96

Driver's door

see Door

Driver's seat

see Seat

Driving abroad

Symmetrical dipped beam .............. 88

Driving noise

see Acoustic presence indicator

Driving safety system

Active Brake Assist .......................... 58

Crosswind Assist .............................. 59

Driving safety system limita-

tions .................................................. 57

EBD (electronic brake force

distribution) ..................................... 60

Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking Sys-

tem) ................................................... 57

ESP

(Electronic Stability Pro-

gram) ................................................. 59

ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-

tem) ................................................... 59

Driving systems

Cruise control ................................... 76

Lane Keeping Assist ........................ 75

Speed limiter .................................... 76

Driving tips

Aquaplaning ..................................... 74

Brakes ................................................ 73

Downhill gradient ............................ 74

Driving in winter ............................. 74

Driving on flooded roads ................ 74

Driving on wet roads ....................... 74

Icy road surfaces ............................. 74

Limited braking efficiency on

salted roads ...................................... 74

Pulling away .................................... 66

Symmetrical dipped beam .............. 88

see Economical driving

Dynamic handling control system

see ESP

(Electronic Stability

Program)

EBD (electronic brake force distri-

bution)

Function/notes ................................. 60

Indicator lamp ................................ 197

ECO mode

Switching on/off .............................. 71

eco score

Calling up ......................................... 72

Comparing the trip .......................... 73

Index

Display (colour display) ................. 72

Display (monochrome display) ...... 72

Evaluating the current trip ............ 72

Function/notes ................................. 72

Preferred trips ................................. 73

Renaming a category ...................... 73

Resetting a category ....................... 73

Resetting data .................................. 73

Saving the trip ................................. 72

Economical driving

eco score display ............................. 72

General information ........................ 70

Electrical fuses

see Fuses

Electromagnetic compatibility

Declaration of conformity ............... 23

Electronic Brake-force Distribu-

tion

see EBD (electronic brake force

distribution)

Electronic Stability Program

see ESP

(Electronic Stability

Program)

Electronic Traction System

see ETS (Electronic Traction System)

Emergency assistance system

Automatic emergency call ............ 174

Button in the overhead control

panel ............................................... 173

Manual emergency call ................. 174

Overview ......................................... 173

Requirements ................................. 173

Transmitted data ........................... 173

Emergency release

Driver's door ................................... 186

Emergency unlocking

Vehicle ............................................ 186

Energy

Displaying the current con-

sumption (colour display) ............ 108

Energy consumption

High-voltage battery ...................... 79

Energy flow display

Calling up (Media-System) ........... 126

Colour display ................................ 108

Engine

Starting problems .......................... 192

Starting the engine with the

key ..................................................... 66

Engine compartment ............................ 155

Engine electronics

Notes ................................................. 25

Entering a destination

Entering a destination via

TomTom Places ............................... 140

Navigation ...................................... 137

Entering the destination

Selecting your home town as

the destination ............................... 138

Environmental protection

High-voltage battery ...................... 22

Returning an end-of-life vehi-

cle ...................................................... 22

EPG (Electronic Program Guide)

Displaying (Audio-System) .......... 115

EPG (Electronic Programme Guide)

Displaying (Media-System) .......... 126

ESP

(Electronic Stability Program)

Crosswind Assist .............................. 59

Display message ............................ 198

General notes ................................... 59

Important safety guidelines .......... 59

Warning and indicator lamps ...... 198

ETS (Electronic Traction System) ......... 59

Exterior lighting

Cleaning .......................................... 170

see Lights

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting .......................................... 65

Adjusting (electrically) ................... 65

Out of position (troubleshoot-

ing) .................................................. 190

External audio equipment (AUX)

Connecting (Audio-System) ......... 118

External data carriers

Connection (Media-System) ......... 132

Operation (Media-System) ........... 132

External data storage media

Connecting (Audio-System) ......... 112

Operating (Audio-System) ............ 118

Factory settings

Resetting (Media-System) ............ 123

Index

Favourites

Creating (Media-System) .............. 124

Managing (Media-System) ........... 124

Fire extinguisher .................................. 176

First-aid kit .......................................... 176

Fitting a wheel

Fitting a wheel ............................... 162

Preparing the vehicle .................... 160

Raising the vehicle ........................ 160

Removing a wheel .......................... 160

Securing the vehicle against

rolling away ................................... 175

Fitting/removing

front wheel arch cover .................. 183

Flat tyre

Preparing the vehicle .................... 173

TIREFIT kit ...................................... 177

Floormat ................................................ 101

Foglamps

Switching on/off .............................. 87

Fording

On flooded roads .............................. 74

Forward collision warning function

Function/notes ................................. 59

Frequencies

Mobile phone .................................. 216

Two-way radio ............................... 216

Front airbag ............................................ 41

Front cover

see Service cover

Front wheel arch

Fitting/removing the cover .......... 183

Front-passenger front airbag

deactivation system

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator

lamps ................................................. 43

Status indicator ............................... 43

Front-passenger seat

see Seat

Frontal area cover

see Service cover

Functions of the key

Understanding ................................. 61

Further settings ................................... 131

Fuses

Allocation chart ............................. 213

Before changing ............................. 185

Dashboard fuse box ....................... 185

Important safety notes ................. 185

Opening the fuse box ..................... 185

Glove compartment .............................. 150

Hand brake

see Parking brake

Hands-free system

see Mobile phone

Hazard warning lamps

Switching on/off ............................ 173

Headbag .................................................. 41

Headlamp flasher ................................... 87

Headlamps

see Automatic headlamp mode

Heating

see Climate control

High-voltage battery

Battery care ...................................... 80

Charge level ...................................... 71

Charge level display ........................ 71

Charging (charging station) ........... 81

Charging (mains socket) ................. 84

Charging (wallbox) .......................... 81

Charging cable heating up ............. 80

Discharged battery .......................... 79

Display message ............................ 205

Energy consumption ....................... 79

Important safety notes ................... 77

Indicator lamp (vehicle socket) ..... 81

Method of operation ........................ 78

Outside temperatures ...................... 79

Problems during charging ............ 194

Protective equipment ...................... 80

Range ................................................ 79

READY indicator ............................. 205

Vehicle socket .................................. 80

Warning and indicator lamps ...... 205

High-voltage electrical system

Automatic switch-off ...................... 28

Danger of electric shock ................. 27

Operating safety .............................. 27

Vehicle fire ....................................... 28

Index

Home address

Entering and saving ...................... 138

Home address (navigation)

see Home address

i-Announcements (DAB) ...................... 126

i-Size child seat securing system

Fitting ............................................... 51

Suitable seats for securing ............ 51

i-Traffic

Traffic announcements ................. 126

Ice warning

Warning lamp (colour display) .... 205

Warning lamp (monochrome

display) ........................................... 205

Ignition lock

see Key positions

Image

Playback (Media-System) ............. 133

Immobiliser ........................................... 105

Indicator and warning lamp

Restraint system ............................ 191

Indicator and warning lamps

Battery ............................................ 205

Indicator lamps

see Warning and indicator lamps

Instrument cluster

Overview ........................................... 36

Warning and indicator lamps ........ 36

Instrument cluster lighting

Setting ............................................. 110

Instrument lighting

see Instrument cluster lighting

Intellitext™

Setting (Media-System) ................ 126

Switching on (Audio-System) ...... 115

Interior lighting ..................................... 88

Adjusting the ambient lighting

(colour display) ................................ 88

Changing bulbs .............................. 184

Setting the ambient lighting ....... 111

Switching on/off .............................. 88

Intermittent wipe ................................... 89

ISOFIX child seat securing system

Fitting ............................................... 51

Suitable seats for securing ............ 49

Jack

Using ............................................... 160

Key

Changing the battery .................... 186

Loss .................................................. 188

Opening the soft top ........................ 94

Position in the ignition lock .......... 66

Problem (malfunction) .................. 188

Starting the engine ......................... 66

Key positions (ignition lock) ................. 66

Keyboard

Adjusting (Media-System) ............ 122

Kickdown ................................................. 69

Kneebag ................................................... 41

Lamps

see Warning and indicator lamps

Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating ................. 75

Function/information ...................... 75

Warning lamp (colour display) .... 204

Warning lamp (monochrome

display) ........................................... 204

Lane recognition system (auto-

matic)

see Lane Keeping Assist

Language

Selecting (Media-System) ............ 122

Language (on-board computer) .......... 111

Licence plate lighting

Changing bulbs .............................. 184

Light

see Replacing bulbs

Lighting

see Lights

Lights

Automatic headlamp mode ............. 86

Cornering light function ................. 87

Dipped-beam headlamps ................ 86

Display message ............................ 207

Driving abroad ................................. 88

Foglamps .......................................... 87

Index

Hazard warning lamps .................. 173

Headlamp flasher ............................ 87

Headlamp range ............................... 87

Light switch ..................................... 86

Main-beam headlamps ................... 86

Rear foglamp .................................... 87

Setting the ambient lighting ....... 111

Side lamps ........................................ 87

Turn signals ..................................... 69

see Interior lighting

Limiter

Calling up the stored limit

speed ................................................. 77

Cancelling ......................................... 76

Deactivating ..................................... 77

Display message (colour dis-

play) ................................................ 204

Exceeding the stored limit

speed ................................................. 76

General notes ................................... 76

Increasing or reducing the

stored limit speed ............................ 76

Limiting the speed

see Speed limiter

Loading guidelines ............................... 150

Locking

see Central locking

Locking (doors)

Automatic ......................................... 91

Emergency locking ........................ 187

From inside (central locking

button) .............................................. 91

Loudspeaker

see Subwoofer

M+S tyres (winter tyres) ...................... 165

Main-beam headlamps

Replacing bulbs ............................. 182

Switching on/off .............................. 86

Making a call

Media-System ................................ 128

Malfunction message

see Display message

Manually releasing the selector

lever lock (automatic transmis-

sion) ....................................................... 181

Matt finish (cleaning instructions) .... 167

Media-System

Adjusting the on-screen key-

board ............................................... 122

Buttons on the multifunction

steering wheel ............................... 120

Calling up Applications man-

ager ................................................. 136

Calling up menus ........................... 122

Connectivity manager ................... 136

Consumption details ...................... 127

Controls ........................................... 120

Creating favourites ........................ 124

Data connectivity .......................... 135

Display settings ............................. 122

Downloading updates and POIs ... 136

eco score ........................................... 72

Enabling data sharing .................. 136

Energy flow display ...................... 126

Home screen ................................... 121

Image playback .............................. 133

Navigation menu ........................... 137

Navigation system ......................... 137

Operating the radio ....................... 125

Overview ......................................... 120

Problem solving ............................. 207

Reversing camera .......................... 103

Selecting the home screen dis-

play ................................................. 122

Selecting the language ................. 122

Setting the time ............................. 123

Setting warning tones ................... 124

Status and information ................. 123

Switching on/off ............................ 121

System menu .................................. 122

System settings ............................. 122

Video playback ............................... 134

Volume/tone settings .................... 123

Warranty ........................................... 23

Message memory (colour display) ...... 109

MirrorLink™

Using ............................................... 129

Mirrors

Adjustment ....................................... 64

see Exterior mirrors

see Rear-view mirror

Mobile phone

Connecting (Audio-System) ......... 115

Index

Connecting (Media-System) ......... 127

De-authorising .............................. 116

Downloading data automati-

cally (Media-System) .................... 128

Frequencies .................................... 216

Installation ..................................... 216

Loading and updating the

telephone book (Audio-System) ... 116

Making a call (Media-System) ..... 128

Setting the sound (Audio-Sys-

tem) ................................................. 116

Transmission output (maxi-

mum) ................................................ 216

Using Android Auto™ .................... 130

Using MirrorLink™ ........................ 129

Using voice control (Audio-

System) ........................................... 117

Using voice control (Media-

System) ........................................... 131

Model series

see Vehicle identification plate

Multi-functional seat

see Seat

Multifunction steering wheel

Overview ........................................... 32

Multimedia menu settings

Radio settings ................................ 126

Navigation

Alternative route ........................... 141

Changing the route ........................ 140

Current location ............................. 143

Destination memory ...................... 138

Displaying the reachability

map .................................................. 144

Entering a charging station as

a destination .................................. 138

Entering a destination .................. 137

Entering a destination by

address ............................................ 137

Entering a destination using

geo-coordinates ............................. 138

Entering a destination using

the map ........................................... 138

Entering a POI ................................ 139

Entering/saving your home

address ............................................ 138

Reading map data .......................... 137

Route details .................................. 140

Selecting a destination from

the list of last destinations .......... 138

Setting route planning .................. 141

Setting the voice ............................ 145

Starting ........................................... 137

Starting route calculation ............ 140

Switching announcements

on/off ............................................... 142

System settings ............................. 145

TomTom Services .................... 135, 144

Traffic information ........................ 143

Troubleshooting ............................. 208

Using information during

route guidance ............................... 142

Way points ...................................... 141

Navigation menu settings

Changing the map .......................... 145

Changing the map colours ............ 145

Managing POIs ............................... 139

Managing saved locations ............ 138

Occupant safety

Airbags .............................................. 41

Belt warning ..................................... 41

Children in the vehicle ................... 43

PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator

lamp ................................................... 43

Pets in the vehicle ........................... 57

Restraint system ............................. 37

Restraint system warning

lamp ................................................... 37

Seat belts .......................................... 39

On-board computer

Calling up displays (colour

display) ........................................... 107

Calling up displays (mono-

chrome display) ............................. 107

Important safety notes ................. 106

Operation ........................................ 106

Overview ......................................... 106

Selecting the language ................. 111

Index

Setting and resetting values

(colour display) ...................... 109, 110

Setting and resetting values

(monochrome display) .................. 109

On-board diagnostics interface

see Diagnostics connection

On-screen keyboard

Adjusting (Media-System) ............ 122

Online access ........................................ 147

Operating instructions

Vehicle equipment ........................... 23

Operating safety

Declaration of conformity ............... 23

High-voltage electrical system ..... 27

Operating system

see On-board computer

Original parts ......................................... 22

Outside temperature display

Colour display ................................ 106

Monochrome display ..................... 106

Setting the units ............................ 110

Outside temperatures

High-voltage battery ...................... 79

Overhead control panel ......................... 34

Overvoltage protection

High-voltage battery ...................... 80

Paint code ............................................. 210

Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ...... 170

Panorama roof

Cleaning .......................................... 169

Park brake

see Parking brake

Parking .................................................. 102

Engaging park position .................. 68

Important safety notes ................. 102

Parking aid ..................................... 102

Parking brake ................................... 67

Reversing camera .......................... 103

Parking brake

Display message ............................ 193

General information ........................ 67

Warning lamp ................................. 193

PASSENGER AIR BAG

Disabling/activating ....................... 53

Indicator lamps ................................ 43

Passenger airbag

Enabling and disabling* ................. 53

Problem (malfunction)* ................. 191

Passenger seat

Folding down .................................. 152

Pets in the vehicle ................................. 57

Phone book

Calling a contact ............................ 128

Updating the phone book ............. 131

Phone menu settings

Voicemail configuration ............... 131

Power display ......................................... 71

Power windows

see Side windows

Pre-entry climate control and

charging

Colour display ................................ 109

Pre-entry climate control at

departure time

Smart-Charging ............................... 98

Pre-entry climate control at time

of departure

Setting departure time .................... 98

Programme type list (PTY) .................. 126

Protection against theft

Anti-theft alarm system ............... 105

Protection of the environment

General notes ................................... 22

Pulling away

General notes ................................... 66

Hill start assist ................................ 68

QR code

Rescue card ...................................... 29

Qualified specialist workshop ............... 26

Radar-based recuperation

Function/notes ................................. 69

Switching off/on (on-board

computer with colour display) ..... 110

Radio

Changing a station (on-board

computer) ........................................ 126

Display mode .................................. 125

Index

Displaying programme infor-

mation (EPG) (Audio-System) ....... 115

i-Traffic (Traffic announce-

ments) ............................................. 126

Operating (Audio-System) ............ 114

Operation (Media-System) ........... 125

Switching on ........................... 114, 125

Radio station

Storing ............................................ 126

Radio text

Displaying (Audio-System) .. 114, 115

Displaying (Media-System) .......... 126

Radio type approvals

Tyre pressure monitors ................. 215

Radio-based vehicle components

Declaration of conformity ............... 23

Rain sensor ............................................. 89

Rain/light sensor (display mes-

sage) ...................................................... 206

Range

High-voltage battery ...................... 79

RBS

see Radar-based recuperation

RDS (Radio Data System) ...................... 114

REACH Regulation ................................... 28

Reading lamp .......................................... 88

Rear foglamp

Replacing bulbs ............................. 183

Switching on/off .............................. 87

Rear lamp

Replacing bulbs ............................. 183

Rear parking aid

Activating/deactivating ............... 102

Function/notes ............................... 102

Rear soft top

Closing ............................................ 151

Opening ........................................... 151

Rear window heating

Demisting the rear window

(automatic climate control) ............ 98

Rear window wiper

Automatic rear window wiper

when in reverse gear ....................... 90

Replacing the wiper blade ............ 167

Switching on/off .............................. 89

Rear-view mirror

Adjusting .......................................... 64

Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ....... 64

Dipping (manual) ............................. 64

Recharging cable

Indicator lamp ................................. 83

Recuperation (radar based)

Function/notes ................................. 69

Recuperation (radar-based)

Switching on and off (colour

display) ........................................... 110

Recycling

see Protection of the environment

Reflective safety jacket ....................... 176

Remote configuration

smart control .................................. 147

Remote query functions

smart control .................................. 147

Replacing bulbs

Brake lamp ...................................... 183

Dipped-beam headlamps .............. 182

Fitting/removing the cover

(front wheel arch) .......................... 183

Important safety notes ................. 182

LED ................................................... 183

Licence plate lighting ................... 184

Main-beam headlamps ................. 182

Overview of bulb types ................. 212

Rear foglamp .................................. 183

Rear lamp ........................................ 183

Reversing lamp .............................. 183

Turn signal lamp (rear) ................. 183

see Changing bulbs

Replacing lamps

see Changing bulbs

Replacing the bulb

Turn signal lamp (front) ............... 183

Replacing the bulbs

Interior lighting ............................ 184

Rescue card ............................................. 29

Restraint system

Basic instructions ........................... 43

Display message ............................ 191

Function during an accident .......... 38

Limited protection ........................... 37

Malfunction ...................................... 37

Operational readiness ..................... 37

Protection provided ......................... 37

Self-check ......................................... 37

Warning lamp ................................. 191

Warning lamp (function) ................ 37

Index

Reverse gear

Engaging (automatic trans-

mission) ............................................ 68

Reversing camera

Cleaning instructions ................... 168

Function/notes ............................... 103

Guide lines in the display ............ 104

Settings ........................................... 104

Switching on/off ............................ 104

Reversing feature

Side windows .................................... 92

Reversing lamp

Replacing bulbs ............................. 183

Roof lining and carpets (cleaning

instructions) ......................................... 171

Route

Editing ............................................ 140

Route planning

Planning a route in advance ........ 141

Safety

Children in the vehicle ................... 43

see Occupant safety

see Operating safety

Safety system

see Driving safety system

SD card

Connecting (Media-System) ......... 132

Reading map data .......................... 137

SD card slot ..................................... 120

Seat

Correct driver's seat position ......... 61

Folding passenger seat down ....... 152

Seat belt

Limited protection ........................... 39

Protection provided ......................... 39

Seat belts

Cleaning .......................................... 170

Fastening .......................................... 40

Releasing .......................................... 40

Warning lamp ................................. 190

Warning lamp (function) ................ 41

Seat heating ............................................ 99

Seats

Adjusting (manually) ...................... 62

Cleaning the cover ......................... 171

Important safety notes ................... 62

Switching seat heating on/off ........ 99

Selecting units

Displaying GPS coordinates ......... 146

Selector lever

Cleaning .......................................... 170

Selector lever

see Automatic transmission

Sensors (cleaning instructions) .......... 169

Service Centre

see Qualified specialist workshop

Service cover ........................................ 155

Service display

Calling up (colour display) ........... 109

Calling up (monochrome dis-

play) ................................................ 107

Service due date

Display message ............................ 194

Service products

Brake fluid ...................................... 212

Checking ......................................... 157

Coolant (engine) ............................. 157

Important safety notes ................. 157

Topping up ..................................... 157

Washer fluid ................................... 212

Services menu settings

TomTom Services ........................... 135

Setting the waveband .......................... 114

Settings

Time format .................................... 123

Side bars

Closing the stowage space .............. 96

Stowing ............................................. 94

Side lamps

Switching on/off .............................. 87

Side spars

Fitting ............................................... 95

Removing .......................................... 94

Side windows

Important safety notes ................... 92

Opening/closing ............................... 93

Problem (malfunction) .................. 189

Resetting ......................................... 189

Reversing feature ............................ 92

Sidebag .................................................... 41

smart Centre

see Qualified specialist workshop

Index

smart control

Internet ........................................... 147

smart Services

Registering ..................................... 148

Using ............................................... 148

Smart-Charging

Function/notes ................................. 98

Smartphone Screen

Setting (Media -System) ............... 129

Snow chains .......................................... 165

Socket (12 V)

Centre console ................................ 101

Socket (high-voltage battery)

see Vehicle socket

Soft top

Cleaning .......................................... 170

Closing .............................................. 94

Closing the rear soft top ............... 151

Closing the stowage space

without the side bars ...................... 96

Important safety notes ................... 93

Opening ............................................. 94

Opening the rear soft top .............. 151

Removing the side bars .................. 94

Stowing the side bars ...................... 94

Sound

Setting (Audio-System) ................ 113

Setting (Media-System) ................ 123

Sound generator

see Acoustic presence indicator

Speakers

see Subwoofer

Special destination

Entry ............................................... 139

Specialist workshop ............................... 26

Speed limiter

Activating ......................................... 76

Functions and conditions for

activation ......................................... 76

Setting limit speed .......................... 76

Speedometer

Digital ............................................. 106

Displaying (digital speedome-

ter) ................................................... 110

General notes (digital speed-

ometer) ............................................ 109

see Instrument cluster

Starting (engine) .................................... 66

Starting the engine

see Starting (engine)

Station

Selecting a stored station

(Audio-System) .............................. 114

Setting (Media-System) ................ 125

Storing ............................................ 126

Station list

Setting a station from the sta-

tion list (Audio-System) ............... 114

Updating (Media-System) ............ 126

Station search ....................................... 126

Audio-System ................................. 114

Stations

Setting (Audio-System) ................ 114

Storing (Audio-System) ................ 114

Steering

Display message (colour dis-

play) ................................................ 202

Warning lamps ............................... 202

Steering wheel

Adjusting (manually) ...................... 63

Button overview ............................... 32

Cleaning .......................................... 170

Important safety notes ................... 63

Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off .............................. 99

Stowage areas ....................................... 149

Stowage compartment in the tail-

gate ........................................................ 150

Stowage compartments

Centre console ................................ 149

Cup holder ....................................... 149

Door ................................................. 149

Glove compartment ........................ 149

Important safety information ...... 149

Spectacles compartment ............... 149

Subwoofer

Fitting/removing ........................... 155

Sun visor ................................................. 90

SVHC (Substances of Very High

Concern) .................................................. 28

System menu

Safety warnings ............................. 145

System menu settings

Voice output settings .................... 145

Index

Tailgate

Opening dimensions ...................... 210

Opening/closing ............................. 151

Warning lamp ................................. 189

Tailgate (smart fortwo cabrio)

Opening/closing ............................. 151

Technical data

Information .................................... 210

Vehicle data .................................... 210

Telephone

Voice control .................................. 131

Telephone (on-board computer)

Accepting an incoming call .......... 128

Rejecting or ending a call ............. 128

Telephone book

Loading (Audio-System) ............... 116

Telephone operation

Audio-System ................................. 116

Temperature

Setting (automatic climate

control) ............................................. 97

Time

Setting (Audio-System) ................ 113

Setting (colour display) ................ 110

Setting (monochrome display) ..... 109

Setting the time format (colour

display) ........................................... 110

TIREFIT kit ............................................ 177

TomTom Services

Activating ....................................... 135

Introduction ................................... 135

My Services menu .......................... 136

Starting ........................................... 136

Subscription status ....................... 136

Traffic information menu ............. 144

Tool

see Vehicle tool kit

Top Tether .............................................. 52

Total distance recorder

Colour display ................................ 108

Monochrome display ..................... 106

Setting the display unit ................ 110

Touchscreen

Confirming settings with Done .... 122

Operating the touchscreen ........... 121

Towing

Important safety notes ................. 180

Towing away

Fitting the towing eye .................. 181

Removing the towing eye ............. 181

With both axles on the ground ..... 181

Traction system

see ETS (Electronic Traction System)

Traffic announcements

Calling up ....................................... 143

Traffic reports

Switching on/off ............................ 114

Transmission

see Automatic transmission

Transporting the vehicle ..................... 181

Trip computer

Displaying ...................................... 108

Trip meter

Colour display ................................ 108

Displaying (colour display) .......... 108

Displaying (monochrome dis-

play) ................................................ 107

Trip meter

see Trip meter

Turn signal lamp (front)

Replacing the bulb ........................ 183

Turn signal lamp (rear)

Replacing bulbs ............................. 183

Turn signals

Replacing the bulb ........................ 183

Switching on/off .............................. 69

Turn signals

see Turn signals

Two-way radio

Frequencies .................................... 216

Installation ..................................... 216

Transmission output (maxi-

mum) ................................................ 216

Type identification plate

see Vehicle identification plate

Tyre pressure

Adjusting ........................................ 179

Checking/correcting ...................... 165

Display message ............................ 199

Important safety notes ................. 164

Not reached (TIREFIT) ................... 179

Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 179

Recommended ................................ 164

Index

Tyre pressure monitor

Function/notes ............................... 163

Radio type approval for the

tyre pressure monitor ................... 215

Restarting ....................................... 163

Restarting (on-board computer

with colour display) ...................... 164

Restarting (on-board computer

with monochrome display) ........... 163

Starting ........................................... 111

Using ............................................... 163

Warning lamp ................................. 199

Tyre sealant

Using ............................................... 178

Tyres

Changing a wheel .......................... 159

Checking ......................................... 158

Direction of rotation ...................... 162

Important safety notes ................. 158

M+S tyres (winter tyres) ............... 165

Rules for new tyres ........................ 159

Service life ...................................... 159

Snow chains .................................... 165

Storing ............................................ 163

Tyre tread ....................................... 158

see Flat tyre

Unit of measurement for distance

Setting ..................................... 110, 146

Units

Setting (on-board computer) ....... 110

Unlocking

From inside the vehicle (cen-

tral unlocking button) .................... 91

With emergency key element ....... 186

Updating the call log ........................... 131

USB device

Connecting (Audio-System) ......... 118

Connection (Media-System) ......... 132

Operating (Audio-System) ............ 118

USB port

Audio-System ................................. 112

Media-System ................................ 120

Using a mobile phone ................... 115, 127

Values

Setting (colour display) ................ 109

Setting (monochrome display) ..... 109

Vehicle

Correct use ........................................ 28

Data acquisition .............................. 29

Electronics ........................................ 25

Equipment ........................................ 23

Implied warranty ............................. 28

Locking (in an emergency) ........... 187

Locking (key) .................................. 105

Operating safety .............................. 25

Parking ............................................ 102

Parking up ...................................... 172

Raising ............................................ 160

REACH Regulation ............................ 28

Registration ...................................... 27

Remote configuration .................... 147

Remote query functions ................ 147

Securing from rolling away .......... 175

Towing away .................................. 180

Transporting .................................. 181

Unlocking (in an emergency) ....... 186

Unlocking (key) ................................ 61

Vehicle data .................................... 210

Vehicle data .......................................... 210

Charging cable ............................... 212

Charging time ................................. 211

Dimensions and weights ............... 211

Vehicle dimensions .............................. 210

Vehicle emergency locking ................. 187

Vehicle identification number

see VIN

Vehicle identification plate ................. 210

Vehicle key

see Key

Vehicle menu settings

Activating/deactivating eco

score after a trip .............................. 73

Vehicle socket

High-voltage battery ...................... 80

Indicator lamp ................................. 81

Problems during the charging

process ............................................ 194

Vehicle tool kit ..................................... 177

Index

Ventilation

see Air conditioning

Video

Playback (Media-System) ............. 134

VIN ......................................................... 210

Voice control system

Entering a destination in the

navigation system ......................... 138

Problems with the voice con-

trol system ...................................... 208

Starting an application ................. 120

Voltage range

High-voltage battery ...................... 78

Volume

Adjusting ........................................ 131

Adjusting automatically ............... 113

Setting (Audio-System) ................ 113

Setting (Media-System) ................ 123

Warning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................... 197

Active Brake Assist ........................ 202

Brakes .............................................. 193

Collision warning (red) ................. 202

EBD ................................................... 197

ESP

(yellow) .................................. 198

High-voltage battery .................... 205

Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 203

Overview ........................................... 36

Parking brake ................................. 193

PASSENGER AIR BAG ........................ 43

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 191

Seat belt .......................................... 190

Steering ........................................... 202

Tyre pressure monitor .................. 199

Warning triangle .................................. 175

Wheel bolt tightening torque .............. 162

Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 159

Checking ......................................... 158

Cleaning .......................................... 169

Fitting a new wheel ....................... 162

Important safety notes ................. 158

Removing a wheel .......................... 160

Snow chains .................................... 165

Storing ............................................ 163

Tightening torque ......................... 162

Windowbag .............................................. 41

Windows

Cleaning .......................................... 169

see Side windows

Windscreen

Demisting (automatic climate

control) ............................................. 98

Windscreen washer fluid

see Windscreen washer system

Windscreen washer system

Important safety notes ................. 158

Topping up ..................................... 158

Windscreen wipers

Intermittent wipe ............................ 89

Problem (malfunction) .................. 190

Rain sensor ....................................... 89

Rear window wiper .......................... 89

Replacing the wiper blades .......... 166

Switching on/off .............................. 88

Wiping with washer fluid ............... 89

Wing

see Front wheel arch

Winter driving

General notes ................................... 74

Winter operation

Slippery road surfaces .................... 74

Snow chains .................................... 165

Winter tyres

M+S tyres ........................................ 165

Wiper blades

Cleaning .......................................... 169

Replacing (on the rear window) ... 167

Replacing (windscreen) ................ 166

Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

Index

Protecting the environment

General notes

Environmental note

Daimler's declared policy is one of com-

prehensive environmental protection.

Our objectives are to use the natural

resources which form the basis of our

existence on this planet sparingly and in

a manner which takes the requirements

of both nature and humanity into consid-

eration.

You too can help to protect the environ-

ment by operating your vehicle in an

environmentally-responsible manner.

Energy consumption and the rate of

engine, transmission, brake and tyre

wear depend on the following factors:

operating conditions of your vehicle

your personal driving style

You can influence both factors. Therefore,

please bear the following in mind:

Operating conditions:

observe the correct tyre pressure.

do not carry any unnecessary weight

in the vehicle

remove the roof rack once you no lon-

ger need it.

a regularly serviced vehicle will con-

tribute to environmental protection.

You should therefore adhere to the ser-

vice intervals.

all maintenance work should be carried

out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:

drive carefully and maintain a safe

distance from the vehicle in front.

avoid frequent, sudden acceleration

and braking.

monitor the vehicle's energy consump-

tion.

High-voltage battery

Environmental note

Have a defective high-voltage battery

disposed of in an environmentally-

responsible manner. Contact a specialist

workshop, which is qualified for smart EQ

fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio or smart

EQ forfour, and has the necessary special

skills and tools to carry out the work

required. smart recommends a smart

centre for this.

Returning an end-of-life vehicle

EU countries only:

smart will take back your end-of-life vehi-

cle for environment-friendly disposal in

accordance with the European Union (EU)

End-Of-Life Vehicles Directive.

A network of vehicle take-back points and

dismantlers has been established for you to

return your vehicle. This makes an impor-

tant contribution to closing the recycling

circle and conserving resources. You can

leave it any of these points free of charge.

For further information about the recycling

and disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and

the take-back conditions, please visit the

national smart website for your country.

smart genuine parts

Environmental note

Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned

assemblies and parts which are of the

same quality as new parts. For these, the

same warranty applies as for new parts.

Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as

well as control units and sensors for

these restraint systems, may be installed

in the following areas of your vehicle:

doors

door pillars

door sills

seats

>> Introduction.

dashboard

instrument cluster

centre console

Do not install accessories such as audio

systems in these areas. Do not carry out

repairs or welding. You could impair the

operating efficiency of the restraint sys-

tems.

Have accessories retrofitted at a quali-

fied specialist workshop.

Only smart genuine parts or parts of the

same quality may be used. Additionally,

only tyres, wheels and accessories

approved for the specific type of vehicle

may be used.

Always specify the vehicle identification

number (VIN) when ordering smart genuine

parts.

Using parts, tyres, wheels or safety-rele-

vant equipment not approved by smart

could endanger the operating safety of the

vehicle. Safety-relevant systems, e.g. the

brake system, could malfunction.

smart tests genuine parts and conversion

parts and accessories that have been spe-

cifically approved for your vehicle for their

reliability, safety and suitability. Despite

ongoing market research, smart is unable to

assess other parts. smart therefore accepts

no responsibility for the use of such parts

in smart vehicles, even if they have been

officially approved or independently

approved by a testing centre.

In Germany, certain parts are only offi-

cially approved for installation or modifi-

cation if they comply with legal require-

ments. This also applies to some other

countries. All genuine smart parts meet the

approval requirements. The use of non-

approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's

general operating permit.

The following situations will invalidate the

operating permit:

The vehicle type changes from that sta-

ted in the vehicle's operating permit, due

to modifications.

Other road users are likely to be endan-

gered.

Emissions or noise characteristics deteri-

orate.

Warranty for the smart Audio-System

and smart Media-System

The smart sales organisation provides a

warranty for a period of 24 months without

a kilometre limit for the smart Audio-Sys-

tem and the smart Media-System.

The warranty issuer is the respective sales

organisation in the country in which the

accessory or replacement part was pur-

chased (see list in the service booklet).

Vehicle equipment

This Owner's Manual describes all models

and all standard and optional equipment

available for the vehicle at the time of pub-

lication of this Owner's Manual. Country-

specific differences are possible. Please

note that the vehicle equipment may differ

from certain descriptions and illustrations

provided in this manual. This is also the

case for systems and functions relevant to

safety.

The vehicle's original purchase contract

documentation contains a list of all the

systems in your vehicle. Please contact any

smart Centre to help clarify any questions

related to the vehicle equipment and oper-

ation.

Declarations of conformity

Electromagnetic compatibility

The electromagnetic compatibility of the

vehicle components has been checked and

certified according to the currently valid

version of UNECE standard UN-R10.

Declaration of conformity for two-way

radio systems according to Directive

2014/53/EU

The components of the vehicle that receive

and/or transmit radio waves are compliant

with the basic requirements and all other

relevant regulations stipulated by Directive

2014/53/EU.

>> Introduction.

You can obtain further information from

any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

In the following, you will find the addresses

of radio component manufacturers which,

due to their size or nature, do not allow this

information to be indicated on the equip-

ment.

Tyre pressure monitor sensors: Schrader

Electronics Ltd., 11 Technology Park, Belfast

Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ireland

Transponder ring:

Visteon Electronics, 04 Rue Nelson Mandela,

Zone Industrielle Borj Cedria, 2055 Bir El

Bey, Tunisia

Remote Keyless Entry:

Visteon Electronics, 04 Rue Nelson Mandela,

Zone Industrielle Borj Cedria, 2055 Bir El

Bey, Tunisia

Alps Electric Europe GmbH, Ohmstraße 4,

D-85716 Unterschleißheim, Germany

Radio:

Visteon Electronics, 04 Rue Nelson Mandela,

Zone Industrielle Borj Cedria, 2055 Bir El

Bey, Tunisia

Continental Automotive, 1 Rue de Clairefon-

taine, 78120 Rambouillet, France

Mobile communication and telemetry:

Ficosa Internationnal, Gran Via de Carles III

98, 08028 Barcelona, Spain

Radar:

Robert Bosch GmbH, Daimlerstraße 6, 71229

Leonberg, Germany

Windscreen unit:

car2go Group GmbH, Fasanenweg 15-17,

70771 Leinfelden-Echterdingen, Germany

Wireless vehicle components (Mexico)

The following information applies to all

components of the vehicle and the informa-

tion systems and communication devices

integrated into the vehicle which receive

and/or transmit radio waves:

Operation of this device is dependent on

the following two conditions: (1) this device

or this equipment must not cause any

interference, and (2) this device must toler-

ate the reception of interference, including

interference that may cause undesired

operating behaviour.

TIREFIT kit

Copy of the original declaration of conform-

ity:

VERIFICATION OF EMC COMPLIANCE

Verification

No.:

GZEM161000740001V

Applicant: ITW Global Tire Repair Europe

GmbH

Address of

Manufac-

turer:

No. 11 Kuiqing Road, Qingxi

Town, Dongguan City, China.

Factory: The same as manufacturer

Address of

Factory:

The same as manufacturer

Product

Description:

Air compressor

Model No: AEROB-DP

Sufficient samples of the product have been

tested and found to be in conformity with

Test Standards: EN 50498:2010

As shown in the

Test Report

Number(s):

GZEM161000740001

This verification of EMC Compliance has

been granted to the applicant based on the

results of the tests, performed by labora-

tory of SGS-CSTC Standards Technical Serv-

ices Co., Ltd. on the sample of the above-

mentioned product in accordance with the

provisions of the relevant specific stand-

ards under Directive 2014/30/EU. The CE

mark as shown below can be used, under

the responsibility of the manufacturer,

after completion of an EU Declaration of

Conformity and compliance with all rele-

vant EU Directives.

Date: 2016-11-10

Signature: Kobe Jian

>> Introduction.

Type of radio device in the vehicle

Frequency

range

Technology Transmis-

sion output/

magnetic

field

strength

125 kHz

(119 kHz -

135 kHz)

Trans-

ponder ring

≤ 42 dBμA/m

at 10 m

13.553 MHz -

13.567 MHz

Windscreen

unit (vehi-

cle access

system for

Car2Go)

≤ 42 dBμA/m

at 10 m

433 MHz

(433.05 MHz

434.79 MHz)

Remote

Keyless

Entry

Tyre pres-

sure moni-

tor

≤ 10 mW

e.r.p.

2.4 GHz ISM

waveband

(2400 MHz -

2483.5 MHz)

Bluetooth

≤ 100 mW

e.i.r.p.

76 GHz -

77 GHz

76 GHzRadar ≤ 55 dBm

peak e.i.r.p.

Operating safety

Important safety notes

WARNING

If you do not have the prescribed service/

maintenance work or necessary repairs

carried out, this could result in malfunc-

tions or system failures. There is a risk of

an accident.

Always have the prescribed service/

maintenance work as well as necessary

repairs carried out at a qualified special-

ist workshop.

WARNING

If you operate information and communi-

cation equipment integrated in the vehi-

cle when driving, you could be distracted

from the traffic situation. This could also

cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

There is a risk of an accident.

Only operate this equipment when the

traffic situation permits. If you cannot be

sure of this, stop the vehicle paying

attention to road and traffic conditions

and operate the equipment with the vehi-

cle stationary.

WARNING

Modification to electronic components,

their software or wiring could impair

their function and/or the function of

other networked components. In particu-

lar, systems relevant to safety could also

be affected. As a result, these may no lon-

ger function properly and/or jeopardise

the operating safety of the vehicle. There

is an increased risk of accident and

injury.

You must not tamper with wiring, elec-

tronic components, or their software. You

should have all work on electrical and

electronic components carried out at a

qualified specialist workshop.

If you fail to adapt your driving style or if

you are inattentive, the driving safety sys-

tems can neither reduce the risk of accident

nor override the laws of physics. Driving

safety systems are merely aids designed to

assist driving. The driver is responsible for

keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in

front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good

time and for staying in lane. The driving

style should always be adjusted to the cur-

rent street and weather conditions. An ade-

quate safe distance must be maintained at

all times.

You must observe the legal requirements

for the country in which you are currently

driving when operating information sys-

tems and communication devices integra-

ted into the vehicle.

If you make any changes to the vehicle

electronics, the general operating permit is

rendered invalid.

>> Introduction.

There is a risk of damage to the vehicle

if:

the vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a

high kerb or an unpaved road

you drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g.

a kerb, speed bumps or a pothole in the

road

a solid object impacts with the vehicle

underside or chassis component

In situations like this, the body, the

underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tyres

could be damaged without the damage

being visible. Components damaged in

this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the

case of an accident, no longer withstand

the strain they are designed to.

In such situations, have the vehicle

checked and repaired immediately at a

qualified specialist workshop. If on con-

tinuing your journey you notice that

driving safety is impaired, pull over and

stop the vehicle immediately, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.

In such cases, consult a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

The multimedia device is equipped with

technical provisions to protect it against

theft. Further information is available from

any smart Centre.

The functionality of a roof aerial (radio,

DAB) may be impaired if roof carriers are

used. Metallised retrofit film on windows

may also affect radio and GPS reception and

have a negative impact on all other aerial

functions in the vehicle interior.

Diagnostics connection

The diagnostics connection is only inten-

ded for the connection of diagnostic equip-

ment at a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING

If you connect equipment to a diagnostics

connection in the vehicle, it may affect

the operation of vehicle systems. As a

result, the operating safety of the vehicle

could be affected. There is a risk of an

accident.

Only connect equipment to a diagnostics

connection in the vehicle, which is

approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-

Benz.

WARNING

Objects in the driver's footwell may

restrict the clearance around the pedals

or block a depressed pedal. This jeopard-

ises the operating and road safety of the

vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so

that they do not get into the driver's

footwell. Always fit the floormats

securely and as prescribed in order to

ensure that there is always sufficient

room for the pedals. Do not use loose

floormats and do not place several floor-

mats on top of one another.

If the engine is switched off and a

device is connected to a diagnostic con-

nection, the battery may become dis-

charged.

Qualified specialist workshop

A qualified specialist workshop has the

necessary special skills, tools and qualifi-

cations to correctly carry out any neces-

sary work on your vehicle. This particularly

applies to work relevant to safety.

Observe the information contained in the

Service Booklet.

Always have the following work carried out

on your vehicle at a smart Centre:

work relevant to safety

service and maintenance work

repair work

modifications, installations and conver-

sions

work on electronic components

replacing the 12 V battery within the

prescribed interval, at the latest every

three years

You can obtain current information con-

cerning the servicing of your vehicle at any

time from a qualified specialist workshop,

e.g. a smart Centre.

>> Introduction.

Replacing the 12 V battery

Observe the notes on the 12 V battery.

smart recommends that you have the 12 V

battery replaced at a qualified specialist

workshop, e.g. at a smart Centre.

If you intend to replace the battery your-

self, please observe the following points:

always replace a defective battery with a

battery which fulfils the specific vehicle

requirements

The vehicle is equipped with either an

AGM (Absorbent Glass Mat) technology

battery or a lithium-ion battery. Full

vehicle functionality is only guaranteed

with a battery of the same technology.

smart recommends that you only use bat-

teries of the same technology which have

been tested and approved for your vehi-

cle.

carry over detachable parts, e.g. the

breather hose, angled connecting piece or

terminal cover from the battery which is

being replaced

make sure that the breather hose is

always connected to the original opening

on the battery side

Fit any existing or supplied cell caps.

Otherwise, gases or battery acid may

leak.

make sure that the detachable parts are

reconnected in the same way

Vehicle registration

smart may ask its smart Centres to carry

out technical inspections on certain vehi-

cles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is

improved as a result of the inspection.

smart is only able to notify the vehicle

owner about vehicle inspections if smart

has the vehicle registration data.

In the following cases, it is possible that a

vehicle has not yet been registered in the

owner's name:

the vehicle was not purchased at an

authorised specialist dealer

the vehicle has not yet been examined at

a smart Centre

smart recommends registering the vehicle

in a smart Centre.

Notify smart as soon as possible if there is

a change of address or if ownership of the

vehicles changes. This can be done at a

smart Centre, for example.

High-voltage electrical system

Danger of electric shock

DANGER

The vehicle's high-voltage electrical sys-

tem is under high voltage. If you modify

components in the vehicle's high-voltage

electrical system or touch damaged com-

ponents, you may suffer an electric

shock. The components in the vehicle's

high-voltage electrical system may be

damaged in an accident, although the

damage is not visible. There is a risk of

fatal injury.

Never carry out modifications to the

high-voltage electrical system.

Never touch damaged components of the

high-voltage electrical system.

Do not touch high-voltage components

after an accident.

Have the vehicle transported away after

an accident.

Have the high-voltage electrical system

checked at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

All of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical

system components are marked with yellow

warning stickers which warn you of the

dangers of high voltages. The cables of the

>> Introduction.

vehicle's high-voltage electrical system are

orange in colour.

Observe the following before carrying out

general work such as replacing a bulb or

checking the coolant level:

the ignition must be switched off

the charging cable for charging the high-

voltage battery must not be connected

Automatically switching off the vehi-

cle's high-voltage electrical system

In order to prevent anyone coming into

contact with high voltage, the high-voltage

electrical system is generally switched off

automatically in the following cases:

the restraint systems are activated in the

event of an accident

an electrical short circuit is detected in

the vehicle's high-voltage electrical sys-

tem

an electrical connection in the vehicle's

high-voltage electrical system is discon-

nected

High-voltage battery

WARNING

In the event of a vehicle fire, the internal

pressure of the high-voltage battery

could exceed a critical value. In this case,

flammable gas escapes through a vent

valve in the vehicle's underbody. The gas

could ignite. There is a risk of injury.

If there is an unusual odour, smoke or

burn marks, stop charging immediately.

Leave the danger area immediately.

Secure the danger area at a suitable dis-

tance.

Call the fire service.

WARNING

If the housing of the high-voltage bat-

tery has been damaged, electrolyte and

gases may leak out. These are poisonous

and caustic. There is a risk of injury.

Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or

clothing. Immediately rinse electrolyte

splashes off with water and seek medical

attention straight away.

Correct use

If warning stickers are removed, you may

fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave

warning stickers in place.

The following are important sources of

information in regard to vehicle use:

safety notes in this Owner's Manual

technical data in this Owner's Manual

traffic rules and regulations

laws and safety standards pertaining to

motor vehicles

Implied warranty

Follow the instructions in this manual

about the proper operation of your vehi-

cle as well as about possible vehicle

damage. Damage to your vehicle that ari-

ses from culpable contraventions against

these instructions is not covered either

by the smart implied warranty or by the

New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

Information on the REACH Regulation

EU and EFTA countries only:

The REACH Regulation (Regulation (EU) no.

1907/2006, Article 33) provides for an obli-

gation to inform for Substances of Very

High Concern (SVHCs).

Daimler AG acts to the best of its knowledge

to prevent the use of SVHCs, and to enable

the customer to handle these substances

safely. There are SVHCs known to Daimler

AG, according to supplier information and

internal product information, found in

individual components of this vehicle in

quantities of over 0.1 percent by weight.

You can obtain further information at the

following addresses:

http://www.daimler.com/reach (German

version)

http://www.daimler.com/reach/en (Eng-

lish version)

>> Introduction.

QR codes for rescue card

The QR code is affixed on the charge socket

flap and on the door pillar (B-pillar), on the

opposite side. In the event of an accident,

rescue services can use the QR code to

quickly determine the corresponding res-

cue card for a vehicle. The current rescue

card contains the most important informa-

tion about the vehicle in compact form,

such as the routing of the electric cables.

Further information: http://www.mercedes-

benz.de/qr-code

Data stored in the vehicle

Electronic control units

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic

control units. Some of them are necessary

for your vehicle to function safely, some

provide support when driving (driver assis-

tance systems). In addition, your vehicle

offers comfort or entertainment functions

which are also made possible with elec-

tronic control units.

Electronic control units contain data mem-

ories which can permanently or tempora-

rily store technical information on vehicle

condition, component stress, service

requirements as well as technical incidents

and faults.

This information generally documents the

condition of a component, a module, a sys-

tem or of the environment such as:

operating states of system components

(e.g. fluid levels, battery status, tyre

pressure)

status messages of the vehicle or its

individual components (e.g. wheel revo-

lutions/speed, deceleration in movement,

lateral acceleration, display of seat belts

fastened)

malfunctions and defects in important

system components (e.g. the lights and

brakes)

information on incidents in which the

vehicle is damaged

reactions of the systems in specific driv-

ing situations (e.g. deployment of an air-

bag, use of stability control systems)

ambient conditions (e.g. temperature,

rain sensor)

In addition to the provision of control unit

functions, this data serves to detect and

rectify faults as well as to optimise vehicle

functions by the manufacturer. Most of this

data is volatile and is only processed in the

vehicle itself. Only a small proportion of

the data is stored in event or error memo-

ries.

When service work is carried out on your

vehicle, the technical data from the vehicle

can be read out by service network staff

(e.g. workshops, manufacturers) or third

parties (e.g. breakdown services). Service

work is, for example, repair work, mainte-

nance, warranty claims and quality assur-

ance measures. The data is read out via the

legally prescribed connection for the diag-

nostics connection in the vehicle. The

respective workshop of service network or

third parties collect, process and use the

data. The data documents technical states

of the vehicle, help in finding errors and in

improving quality and are transferred to

the manufacturer if necessary. In addition,

the manufacturer is subject to product lia-

bility. For this purpose, the manufacturer

requires technical data from vehicles.

Error memories in the vehicle can be reset

by a service outlet during repairs or service

work.

Depending on the equipment selected, you

can enter data in comfort and infotainment

functions of the vehicle.

This includes, for example:

multimedia data, such as music, films or

photos for playback in an integrated

multimedia system

address book data for use in an integra-

ted hands-free system or an integrated

navigation system

navigation destinations entered

data on the use of Internet services

This data can be saved locally in the vehi-

cle or it is located on a device which you

have connected to the vehicle (e.g. smart-

phone, USB memory stick or MP3 player). If

this data is saved in the vehicle, you can

delete it at any time. Transfer of this data

>> Introduction.

to third parties only occurs at your request,

especially as part of online services

according to the settings you have selected.

You can save comfort settings/individuali-

sation in the vehicle and change them at

any time.

Depending on the equipment, these include,

for example:

settings for seat and steering wheel posi-

tions

suspension and air-conditioning settings

individualisation such as interior light-

ing

If your vehicle is suitably equipped, you

can connect your mobile phone or another

mobile end device with the vehicle. You can

operate these devices via the control ele-

ments integrated in the vehicle. Images and

sound from the mobile phone can played

back via the multimedia system. At the

same time, certain information is transfer-

red to your mobile phone.

Depending on the type of integration, this

can include:

general vehicle status

position data

This allows the use of selected mobile

phone apps, e.g. navigation or music play-

back. There is no further interaction

between mobile phone and vehicle; in par-

ticular there is no active access to vehicle

data. The provider of the app being used

determines how the data may be further

processed. Which settings you can adjust, if

any, depends on the specific app and the

operating system of your mobile phone.

Online services

Wireless network connection

If your vehicle has a wireless network con-

nection, this will permit the exchange of

data between your vehicle and further sys-

tems. The wireless network connection is

enabled by a transmission and reception

device belonging to the vehicle or via

mobile end devices (e.g. mobile phones) you

bring into the vehicle. Online functions can

be used via this wireless network connec-

tion. These include online services and

applications/apps, which are provided by

the manufacturer or by other providers.

Manufacturer's own services

Regarding online services of the manufac-

turer, the individual functions are descri-

bed by the manufacturer in a suitable place

(e.g. Owner's Manual, the manufacturer's

website) along with the relevant data pro-

tection information. Personal identification

data may be used to provide online serv-

ices. The data exchange for this takes place

via a secure connection, e.g. with the man-

ufacturer's IT systems intended for the

purpose. The collecting, processing, and

use of personal identification data beyond

the provision of services occurs exclusively

on the basis of a legal permit or after due

consent.

Generally, you can enable or disable the

services and functions (which sometimes

have associated costs). In some cases, this

also applies to the whole data connection of

the vehicle. Excluded from this are special

legally prescribed functions and services.

Services of third parties

If it is possible to use online services from

other providers, these services are the

responsibility of the provider in question

and subject to that provider's data protec-

tion conditions and terms of use. The man-

ufacturer has no influence on the contents

exchanged whilst using these services.

Please ask the respective service provider

for details on the type, extent and purpose

of the collection and use of personal data in

the context of third party services.

Information on licences for Free and Open-

Source software used in the vehicle and its

electronic components is available at:

http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

and on the CD provided.

>> Introduction.

Cockpit

Function Page

Charge level display 71

Power display 71

;

Instrument cluster 36

Horn

Instrument cluster multi-

function lever 107

Windscreen wipers combi-

nation switch 88

Automatic locking feature 91

Hazard warning lamps 173

Overhead control panel 34

smart Audio-System 112

smart Media-System 120

Function Page

Climate control system

control panel 96

Ignition lock 66

Control panel for:

Lane Keeping Assist 75

Parking aid 102

Acoustic presence indica-

tor 69

Headlamp range control 87

Light combination switch 86

Cockpit

>> At a glance.

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

Colour display of the

instrument cluster 106

Monochrome display of

the instrument cluster 106

;

smart Audio-System 112

smart Media-System 120

Only for instrument clus-

ter with colour display:

WX Adjusts the vol-

ume 120

Switches voice-oper-

ated control on or off and

accepts or ends a call 120

® Increases or stores

the current speed 76

g Decreases current

speed 76

Function Page

° Calls up the last

speed stored 77

± Interrupts cruise

control or the limiter 76

C ¯ Activates cruise con-

trol 76

^ Deactivates cruise

control or the limiter 77

È Activates limiter 76

Only for instrument clus-

ter with colour display:

9: Scrolls through

menus 107

a Confirms the selec-

tion 109

Multifunction steering wheel

>> At a glance.

Centre console with drawer

Function Page

Cup holders 149

Ashtray 100

;

Drawer 149

smart EQ fortwo: coin

holder

smart EQ fortwo cabrio:

opens and closes the soft

top 93

Selector lever 68

Parking brake 67

Function Page

Cigarette lighter 100

12 V socket 101

smart Media-System: AUX

port, USB port and SD card

slot 120

Cup holders 149

Selector lever indicator 68

ECO mode 71

Centre console with drawer

>> At a glance.

Overhead control panel

Function Page

Left-hand reading lamp 88

;

Interior lighting 88

Right-hand reading lamp 88

Function Page

PASSENGER AIRBAG indi-

cator lamps 43

Rear-view mirror 64

Overhead control panel

>> At a glance.

Door control panel

Function Page

Opens the door 91

;

Adjusts the exterior mir-

rors 65

Function Page

Opens and closes the side

windows 93

Door control panel

>> At a glance.

Displays shown in the instrument cluster and the display

Function Page

Speedometer

;

Display

Warning and indicator

lamps

Doors or tailgate 189

Seat belts 190

Restraint system 191

Drive diagnostics 194

Brakes 193

ABS 197

ESP

Tyre pressure monitor 199

Power steering 202

Distance warning signal

Forward collision warning

Function Page

Lane Keeping Assist 203

12 V battery 205

Rear foglamp 87

Foglamps 87

Main-beam headlamps 86

Dipped-beam headlamps 86

Side lamps 87

Charging cable 194

Cruise control 204

Limiter 204

Brake lights, rain or light

sensors 206

Next service due date

194

READY indicator 205

Displays shown in the instrument cluster and the display

>> At a glance.

Occupant safety

Restraint system

Protection provided by the restraint

system

The restraint system includes the following

components:

Seat belt system

Airbags

Child restraint system

Child seat securing system

The restraint system can reduce the risk of

vehicle occupants coming into contact with

parts of the vehicle's interior in the event

of an accident. In the event of an accident,

the restraint system can also reduce the

forces to which the vehicle occupants are

subjected.

A seat belt can only provide maximum pro-

tection when worn correctly. Depending on

the type of accident detected, seat belt ten-

sioners and/or airbags may supplement a

correctly worn seat belt. Not every accident

will trigger the seat belt tensioners and/or

deploy the airbags.

In order for the restraint system to provide

the intended level of protection, each vehi-

cle occupant must observe the following

information:

fasten the seat belt correctly.

be in an almost upright position with the

back against the backrest.

sit with feet resting on the floor, if possi-

ble.

always secure persons under 1.50 m tall

in an additional restraint system suita-

ble for this vehicle.

However, no system available today can

completely eliminate injuries and fatalities

in every accident. In particular, the seat

belt and airbag generally do not protect

against objects penetrating the vehicle

from the outside. The risk of injuries due to

a deployed airbag also cannot be com-

pletely eliminated.

Limited protection from restraint sys-

tem

WARNING

If the restraint system is modified, it may

no longer work as intended. The restraint

system may then not perform its inten-

ded protective function by failing in an

accident or triggering unexpectedly, for

example. There is an increased risk of

injury, possibly even fatal.

Never modify parts of the restraint sys-

tem. Do not attempt to modify the wiring

as well as electronic components or their

software.

If it is necessary to adjust the vehicle to

accommodate a person with disabilities,

contact a qualified specialist workshop.

smart recommends that you use driving

aids which have been approved specifically

for your vehicle by smart.

Preparing the restraint system for

operation

When the ignition is switched on, the

restraint system warning lamp lights up

6 during the self-check. It goes out no

later than a few seconds after the vehicle is

started. The components of the restraint

system are then in operational readiness.

Malfunctioning restraint system

A malfunction has occurred in the restraint

system if:

When the ignition is switched on, the

6 restraint system warning lamp does

not light up.

While driving, the 6 restraint system

warning lamp remains lit or lights up

repeatedly.

If the restraint warning system is faulty,

the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system

may not be deactivated as intended in the

event of an accident.

DANGER

If the restraint system is malfunctioning,

restraint system components may be

Occupant safety

>> Safety.

triggered unintentionally or may not

deploy as intended during an accident.

This may affect the seat belt tensioner or

airbag, for example. Furthermore, in the

event of an accident, the vehicle's high-

voltage electrical system may not be

deactivated as intended. You may be

electrocuted if you touch the damaged

components of the vehicle's high-voltage

electrical system. This poses an

increased risk of injury or even fatal

injury.

Have the restraint system checked and

repaired immediately at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop. After an accident,

switch off the ignition immediately and

remove the key from the ignition lock.

Restraint system function during an

accident

The way the restraint system responds

depends on the severity of the impact

detected and the apparent type of accident:

Head-on collision

Rear impact

Side impact

Overturn

The activation threshold for the restraint

system components is determined based on

the analysis of the sensor values measured

at various points in the vehicle. This proc-

ess is pre-emptive in nature. The trigger-

ing process of the restraint system compo-

nents should take place in good time at the

start of the collision.

Factors which can only be seen and meas-

ured after a collision has occurred do not

play a decisive role in the deployment of an

airbag, nor do they provide an indication of

airbag deployment.

The vehicle may be deformed significantly

without an airbag being deployed. This is

the case if only parts which are relatively

easily deformed are affected and the rate of

vehicle deceleration is not high. Con-

versely, an airbag may be deployed even

though the vehicle suffers only minor

deformation. If, for instance, very rigid

vehicle parts such as longitudinal body

members are hit, the rate of vehicle decel-

eration may be sufficient.

The restraint system components can be

activated or triggered independently of

each other:

Component Detected trigger

situation

Belt tensioners Head-on collision,

rear impact, side

impact, overturn

Driver's airbag,

front-passenger

front airbag and

kneebag

Head-on collision

Sidebag Side impact

Windowbag

headbag

Side impact, over-

turn

, head-on col-

lision

WARNING

After the airbag deploys, the airbag parts

are hot. There is a risk of injury.

Do not touch the airbag parts. Have a

deployed airbag replaced at a qualified

specialist workshop as soon as possible.

smart recommends that you have the

vehicle towed to a qualified specialist

workshop after an accident. Take this

into account, particularly if a seat belt

tensioner was triggered or an airbag was

deployed.

If the belt tensioners are triggered or an

airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang,

and a small amount of powder may also be

released:

The bang will not usually affect your

hearing.

In general, the powder released is not

hazardous to health but may cause short-

Only for certain countries.

smart EQ fortwo.

smart EQ fortwo cabrio.

Occupant safety

>> Safety.

term breathing difficulties to persons

suffering from asthma or other pulmo-

nary conditions.

Provided it is safe to do so, leave the

vehicle immediately or open the window

in order to prevent breathing difficulties.

Seat belts

Protection provided by seat belts

Always fasten seat belts correctly before

commencing your journey. A seat belt can

only provide maximum protection when

worn correctly.

WARNING

If the seat belt is worn incorrectly, it

cannot perform its intended protective

function. Furthermore, an incorrectly

worn seat belt can cause additional inju-

ries, e.g. in the event of an accident,

heavy braking or sudden changes of

direction. There is an increased risk of

injury, possibly even fatal.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants

have their seat belts fastened correctly

and are sitting properly.

Always observe the notes on correct driv-

er's seat position (Y page 61) and seat

adjustment (Y page 62).

In order for the correctly worn seat belt to

provide the intended level of protection,

each vehicle occupant must observe the

following information:

the seat belt must not be twisted and

must fit tightly and snugly across the

body.

the seat belt must be routed across the

centre of the shoulder and as low down

across the hips as possible.

the shoulder section of the belt should

not touch your neck nor be routed under

your arm or behind your back.

avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a win-

ter coat.

press the lap belt down into your hip

joints and pull taut by the shoulder sec-

tion of the belt. The lap belt must never

be routed across your stomach or abdo-

men.

never route the seat belt across sharp,

pointed, abrasive or fragile objects.

only one person per seat belt. Infants and

children must never travel sitting on the

lap of a vehicle occupant.

never secure objects with a seat belt if

the seat belt is also being used by one of

the vehicle's occupants. Always observe

the notes on "Loading the vehicle" for

securing objects, luggage or loads

(Y page 150).

Also make sure that objects are never

placed between an occupant and the seat,

e.g. a cushion.

If children are travelling in the vehicle, be

sure to observe the instructions and safety

notes on "Children in the vehicle"

(Y page 43).

Limited protection from seat belts

WARNING

The seat belt does not offer the intended

level of protection if you have not moved

the backrest to an almost vertical posi-

tion. When braking or in the event of an

accident, you could slide underneath the

seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck

injuries, for example. This poses an

increased risk of injury or even fatal

injury.

Adjust the seat properly before beginning

your journey. Always ensure that the

backrest is in an almost vertical position

and that the shoulder section of your

seatbelt is routed across the centre of

your shoulder.

WARNING

Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the

seat belts correctly without an additional

suitable restraint system. If the seat belt

is worn incorrectly, it cannot perform its

intended protective function. Further-

more, an incorrectly worn seat belt can

cause additional injuries, e.g. in the

event of an accident, heavy braking or

Occupant safety

>> Safety.

sudden changes of direction. There is an

increased risk of injury, possibly even

fatal.

Always secure persons less than 1.50 m

tall in additional suitable restraint sys-

tems.

WARNING

Seat belts may not be used in the follow-

ing situations in particular:

the seat belt is damaged, has been

modified, is very dirty, bleached or

dyed.

the seat belt buckle is damaged or very

dirty.

modifications have been made to the

seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage

or seat belt retractor.

Seat belts may sustain non-visible dam-

age in an accident, e.g. due to glass

splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts

can tear or fail, for example in the event

of an accident. Modified seat belt ten-

sioners may be triggered unintentionally

or may not function as intended. There is

an increased risk of injury, possibly even

fatal.

Never modify seat belts, seat belt ten-

sioners, seat belt anchorages and inertia

reels. Ensure that seat belts are not dam-

aged or worn and are clean. After an acci-

dent, have the seat belts checked imme-

diately at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

smart recommends that you only use seat

belts which have been approved specifi-

cally for your vehicle by smart.

WARNING

Pyrotechnical belt tensioners which have

been triggered are no longer operational

and therefore cannot protect as intended.

There is an increased risk of injury, pos-

sibly even fatal.

Have pyrotechnic belt tensioners which

have been triggered replaced at a quali-

fied specialist workshop immediately.

smart recommends that you have the vehi-

cle towed to a qualified specialist workshop

after an accident.

Make sure that the seat belt is fully rol-

led up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt

tongue will be trapped in the door or in

the seat mechanism. This could damage

the door, the door trim panel and the seat

belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer

fulfil their protective function and must

be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist

workshop.

Fastening and releasing the seat belt

If the seat belt is pulled out quickly or

sharply, the inertia reel locks. The belt

strap cannot be pulled out any further.

If the co-driver's seat is not occupied,

do not engage the seat belt tongue in the

buckle on the co-driver's seat. Otherwise,

in the event of an accident the belt ten-

sioner could be triggered in addition to

other systems and would need to be

replaced.

For easy fastening, the seat belt is routed

through the seat belt guide on the side of

the seat, if available.

To fasten: always engage seat belt

tongue ; into belt buckle : of the cor-

responding seat.

To release: press the release button in

belt buckle : and guide the seat belt

back by belt tongue ;.

Occupant safety

>> Safety.

Function of seat belt warning for the

driver and front passenger

The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the

instrument display is a reminder that all

vehicle occupants must wear their seat

belts correctly.

In addition, a warning tone may sound.

The belt warning goes out as soon as the

driver and front-passenger fasten their

seat belts.

If you are using an ISOFIX or an i-Size

child restraint system on the front-

passenger seat and the child is not

secured using the seat belt of the front-

passenger seat, the belt warning may be

activated. In this case, you can insert the

belt tongue of the seat belt into the belt

buckle belonging to the front-passenger

seat. To do this, guide the seat belt

between the ISOFIX child restraint sys-

tem or i-Size child restraint system and

the backrest of the front-passenger seat.

Airbags

Overview of airbags

The installation location of an airbag is

identified by the AIRBAG symbol.

A deployed airbag can increase the level of

protection provided to the vehicle occu-

pant.

AIRBAG Possible protection

for:

Headbag

Head

;

Driver's

kneebag

Thigh, knee and

lower leg

Driver's air-

bag

Head and thorax

Front-

passenger

front airbag

Head and thorax

Windowbag

Head

Sidebag Thorax and pelvis

The front-passenger front airbag can be

deployed in an accident only if the

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is

lit. If the front-passenger seat is occupied,

make sure both before and during the jour-

ney that the status of the front-passenger

front airbag is correct (Y page 43).

Protection provided by the airbags

Depending on the type of accident, an air-

bag can supplement a correctly worn seat

belt and provide added protection.

WARNING

If you deviate from the correct seat posi-

tion, the airbag cannot carry out its

intended function and may even cause

additional injuries if it is deployed. There

is an increased risk of injury, possibly

even fatal.

To avoid risks, vehicle occupants must

ensure the following points are followed:

fasten the seat belt correctly. in par-

ticular, make sure that the lap belt

smart EQ fortwo cabrio.

smart EQ fortwo.

Occupant safety

>> Safety.

never runs over the stomach or abdo-

men of pregnant women..

take the correct seating position and

keep as far away from the airbags as

possible.

observe the following information:

Always make sure that there are no

objects between the airbag and vehicle

occupant.

To avoid the risks resulting from the

deployment of an airbag, each vehicle

occupant must observe the following notes:

Adjust seats correctly before starting

your journey and move the driver's and

front passenger seat as far back as possi-

ble.

Always observe the information on the

correct driver's seat position

(Y page 61).

Only hold onto the outside of the steering

wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be

fully deployed.

Always lean against the backrest while

driving. Do not lean forwards or against

the door or side window. You may other-

wise be in the deployment area of the

airbags.

Always keep your feet on the floor. Do not

put your feet on the dashboard, for exam-

ple. Your feet may otherwise be in the

deployment area of the airbag.

When children are travelling in the vehi-

cle, follow the related additional notes

(Y page 43).

Always properly stow and secure objects.

Objects in the vehicle interior may limit an

airbag's ability to function correctly. Each

vehicle occupant must always make sure of

the following:

There are no people, animals or objects

between the vehicle occupants and an

airbag.

There are no objects between the seat,

the door and the door pillar (B-pillar).

No hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, are

hanging on the grab handles or coat

hooks.

There are no accessory parts, such as

mobile navigation devices, mobile phones

or cup holders, attached to the vehicle

within the deployment area of an airbag,

e.g. on the cockpit, on doors, side win-

dows or side panelling.

In addition, no connection cable, tension-

ing strap or retainer belt may be routed

or secured in the deployment area of an

airbag. Always observe the accessory

manufacturer's installation instructions,

in particular the notes on a suitable

place to fit the accessory.

No heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects

are kept in the pockets of clothing. Store

such objects in a suitable place.

Limited protection from airbags

WARNING

If you modify the cover of an airbag or

affix objects such as stickers to it, the

airbag can no longer perform its intended

function. This poses an increased risk of

injury.

Never modify the cover of an airbag or

affix objects to it.

The installation location of an airbag is

indicated by the AIRBAG symbol

(Y page 41).

WARNING

Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct or

even prevent deployment of the airbags

integrated into the seats. The airbags

may then fail to protect the vehicle occu-

pants as intended. There is an increased

risk of injury, possibly even fatal.

Use only seat covers which have been

specifically approved for the respective

seat by smart.

WARNING

Sensors to control the airbags are located

in the doors. Modifications or work not

performed correctly to the doors or door

panelling, as well as damaged doors, can

lead to the function of the sensors being

impaired. The airbags might therefore not

function properly any more. Conse-

Occupant safety

>> Safety.

quently, the airbags cannot protect vehi-

cle occupants as they are designed to do.

This poses an increased risk of injury.

Never modify the doors or parts of the

doors. Always have work on the doors or

door panelling carried out at a qualified

specialist workshop.

WARNING

An airbag that has been deployed once

cannot provide any further protection

and, in the event of an accident, can no

longer perform its intended protective

function. There is an increased risk of

injury.

Have the vehicle towed to a qualified

specialist workshop to have the deployed

airbag replaced.

Have deployed airbags replaced immedi-

ately.

Status of the front passenger front air-

bag

Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indi-

cator lamps

The front-passenger front airbag can be

enabled or disabled using the airbag-off

switch in the instrument panel on the

front-passenger side (Y page 53).

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps are

part of the front-passenger front airbag

deactivation system.

The indicator lamps display the status of

the front-passenger front airbag:

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the

front-passenger front airbag is disabled.

It will then not be deployed in the event

of an accident.

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the

front-passenger front airbag is enabled.

The front-passenger front airbag may

deploy during an accident.

If the front-passenger seat is occupied,

make sure that the status of the front-

passenger front airbag is correct depending

on the situation both before and during the

journey:

Children in a child restraint system:

whether the front-passenger front airbag

should be enabled or disabled depends on

the child restraint system fitted and the

age and size of the child. Make sure that

you observe the notes on "Children in the

vehicle" (Y page 43). There you will also

find instructions on backwards and for-

wards-facing child restraint systems on

the front-passenger seat.

All other persons: the PASSENGER AIR BAG

ON indicator lamp must be lit. The front-

passenger front airbag is enabled. Be

sure to observe the notes on "Seat belts"

(Y page 39) and "Airbags" (Y page 41).

There you can also find information on

the correct seat position.

Observe the information on the airbag

deactivation system of the front-passenger

front airbag (Y page 53).

Travelling safely with children in the

vehicle

Observe carefully when children are

travelling in the vehicle

Be diligent

Be sure to observe the safety notes rele-

vant to the situation. In doing so, you

will be able to identify possible risks and

avoid dangers when children are travel-

ling in the vehicle (Y page 44).

Bear in mind that negligence when secur-

ing the child in the child restraint system

may have serious consequences. Always be

Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

>> Safety.

diligent and secure a child carefully before

each journey.

To improve protection for children younger

than twelve years old and under 1.50 m in

height, smart recommends you always

observe the following notes:

Always secure the child in a child

restraint system suitable for your smart

vehicle.

The child restraint system must be

appropriate to the age, weight and size of

the child.

The vehicle seat must be suitable for the

child restraint system to be fitted

(Y page 48).

The generic term child restraint system

The generic term child restraint system is

used in this Owner's Manual. A child

restraint system is, for example:

a baby car seat

a rearward-facing child seat

a forward-facing child seat

a child booster seat with a backrest and

seat belt guides

The child restraint system must be appro-

priate to the age, weight and size of the

child.

Observing laws and regulations

Always observe the legal requirements for

using a child restraint system in the vehi-

cle.

Ensure that the child restraint system is

approved in accordance with the valid test

specifications and guidelines. Further

information can be obtained at a qualified

specialist workshop. smart recommends

that you use a smart Centre.

Use only approved child restraint sys-

tems

Only child restraint systems that meet the

following UNECE standards are permitted

for use in the vehicle:

UN-R44

UN-R129 (i‑Size child restraint systems)

Information about the approval categories

for child restraint systems and details on

the approval label on the child restraint

system (Y page 48).

Detecting risks, avoiding danger

Securing systems for child restraint

systems in the vehicle

Only use the following securing systems for

child restraint systems:

the ISOFIX or i‑Size securing rings

the vehicle's seat belt system

the Top Tether anchorages

Preferably, fit an ISOFIX or i‑Size child

restraint system.

The risk of incorrectly fitting the child

restraint system can be reduced by simply

fitting it on the securing rings of the vehi-

cle.

When the child is secured using the seat

belt integrated in the ISOFIX or i-Size child

restraint system, be sure to observe the

maximum permissible weight of the child

and child restraint system together

(Y page 51).

The advantage of a rearward-facing

child restraint system

Babies or infants should preferably travel

in a suitable rearward-facing child

restraint system. In this case, the child is

seated in the opposite direction to the

direction of travel and is facing backwards.

Babies and infants have comparatively

poorly developed neck muscles in relation

to the size and weight of their head. A rear-

ward-facing child restraint system can

reduce the risk of injury to the cervical

spine in an accident.

Secure the child restraint system cor-

rectly at all times

WARNING

If the child restraint system is incor-

rectly fitted on the seat position suitable

for this purpose, it cannot perform its

intended protective function. In the event

of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden

Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

>> Safety.

change in direction, the child may not be

held securely. There is an increased risk

of serious or even fatal injuries.

Observe the manufacturer's installation

instructions and the correct use for the

child restraint system. Make sure that

the entire surface of the child restraint

system is resting on the seat surface.

Never place objects under or behind the

child restraint system, e.g. cushions.

Only use child restraint systems with the

original cover designed for them. Only

replace damaged covers with genuine

covers.

Where possible, use child restraint systems

recommended for Mercedes-Benz

(Y page 46).

WARNING

If the child restraint system is fitted

incorrectly or is not secured, it can come

loose in the event of an accident, heavy

braking or a sudden change in direction.

The child restraint system could be

thrown about, striking vehicle occupants.

There is an increased risk of injury, pos-

sibly even fatal.

Always fit child restraint systems prop-

erly, even if they are not being used.

Make sure that you observe the child

restraint system manufacturer's installa-

tion instructions.

Be sure to observe the installation and

operating instructions provided by the

manufacturer for the child restraint sys-

tem being used as well as the vehicle-

specific notes at all times:

Fitting an ISOFIX or i-Size child

restraint system to the front-

passenger seat (Y page 51).

Securing the child restraint system

with the seat belt on the front-

passenger seat (Y page 56). Observe

the specific notes on rearward-facing

and forward-facing child restraint

systems (Y page 56).

If the front-passenger seat is occupied,

make sure that the status of the front-

passenger front airbag is correct

depending on the situation both before

and during the journey (Y page 43).

Observe the warning labels in the vehicle

interior and on the child restraint sys-

tem.

Also secure Top Tether, if available.

Do not modify the child restraint sys-

tem

WARNING

If you modify a child restraint system or

affix objects to it, e.g. toys or unsuitable

accessories, the child restraint system

may no longer function properly. This

poses an increased risk of injury.

Never modify a child restraint system.

Only affix accessories which have been

specially approved for this child

restraint system by the child restraint

system's manufacturer.

smart recommends you use smart care

products to clean child restraint systems

recommended by smart.

Only use child restraint systems which

are not damaged

WARNING

Child restraint systems or their securing

systems that have been damaged or sub-

jected to a load in an accident cannot

perform their intended protective func-

tion. In the event of an accident, sharp

braking or a sudden change in direction,

the child may not be held securely. There

is an increased risk of serious or even

fatal injuries.

Immediately replace child restraint sys-

tems that have been damaged or subjec-

ted to a load in an accident. Have the

child restraint securing systems checked

in a qualified specialist workshop before

fitting a child restraint system again.

Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

>> Safety.

Avoiding direct sunlight

WARNING

If the child restraint system is placed in

direct sunlight, the parts could become

very hot. Children could be suffer burns

by touching these parts, in particular on

the metallic parts of the child restraint

system. There is a risk of injury.

If you and your child leave the vehicle,

always make sure that the child restraint

system is not in direct sunlight. Cover it

with a blanket, for example. If the child

restraint system has been exposed to

direct sunlight, leave it to cool down

before securing the child in it. Never

leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Observe the following when stopping or

parking

WARNING

If children are left unattended in the

vehicle, they could in particular:

open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users.

get out and be struck by oncoming

traffic.

operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set

the vehicle in motion, for example by:

releasing the parking brake.

changing the transmission position.

you start the vehicle.

There is a risk of accident and injury.

Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always take

the key with you and lock the vehicle.

Keep the key out of the reach of children.

WARNING

If persons (particularly children) are

exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged

period, there is a risk of serious or even

fatal injuries. Never leave persons (par-

ticularly children) unattended in the

vehicle.

Overview of recommended child restraint systems

The smart EQ fortwo is equipped with a manual front-passenger front airbag deactivation

system.

Before using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, dis-

able the front-passenger front airbag (Y page 53).

You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from a

qualified specialist workshop. smart recommends that you use a smart Centre.

Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

>> Safety.

Securing with ISOFIX

Weight category

Size category

Type

Type approval number

Order number

Category 0+:

up to 13 kg and up to

approximately 15 months

Size category E

BABY SAFE PLUS

E1 04 301 146

B6 6 86 8224

Category I:

9–18 kg

Size category B1

DUO PLUS

E1 04 301 133

A 000 970 17 02

Securing with the vehicle seat belt

Weight category

Type

Type approval number

Order number

Category 0:

up to 10 kg and up to

approximately 6 months

BABY SAFE plus II

E1 04 301 146

A 000 970 13 02

Category 0+:

up to 13 kg and up to

approximately 15 months

BABY SAFE plus II

E1 04 301 146

A 000 970 13 02

Category I:

9–18 kg and from approx-

imately 9 months to 4 years

DUO PLUS

E1 04 301 133

A 000 970 17 02

Category II/III:

15–36 kg and from approx-

imately 4–12 years

KIDFIX

E1 04 301 198

A 000 970 20 02

Category II/III:

15–36 kg and from approx-

imately 4–12 years

KIDFIX XP

E1 04 301 304

A 000 970 23 02

Manufacturer: Britax Römer.

With colour code 9H95.

Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

>> Safety.

Suitable seats in the vehicle for fitting a child restraint system

Securing systems for child restraint systems

Vehicle seat

Front-passenger seat Preferred securing system:

ISOFIX child seat

securing system

(Y page 49)

i‑Size child seat

securing system

(Y page 51)

Also secure Top

Tether if available

(Y page 52)

Other securing system:

Vehicle seat belt

(Y page 55)

Be sure to observe:

If the front-passenger

seat is occupied, make

sure that the status of the

front-passenger front

airbag is correct depend-

ing on the situation both

before and during the

journey (Y page 43).

Permitted categories for child

restraint systems

Use only approved child restraint sys-

tems

Only child restraint systems that meet the

following UNECE standards are permitted

for use in the vehicle:

UN-R44

UN-R129 (i‑Size child restraint systems)

Identification on the child restraint

system

Information about the approval category,

weight category and approval number, for

example, is on the approval label on the

child restraint system.

Depending on the approval category of the

child restraint system, there may be fur-

ther information, e.g. the ISOFIX size cate-

gory.

Approval categories in accordance with

UN-R44

Example of an approval label

Universal: child restraint systems in the

"Universal" category are approved for

installation in vehicles. They can be

used, in accordance with overviews of the

suitability of seats for securing child

restraint systems, on seats labelled U, UF

or IUF.

The designation IUF refers to ISOFIX child

restraint systems in the "Universal" cat-

egory. These child restraint systems

must also be secured using Top Tether or

a supporting bracket.

Semi-Universal: child restraint systems

in the "semi-universal" category may

only be used if the vehicle and the seat

Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

>> Safety.

are listed in the child restraint system

manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Vehicle-specific: child restraint systems

in the "vehicle-specific" category may

only be used if the vehicle and the seat

are listed in the child restraint system

manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Approval categories in accordance with

UN-R129

Example of an approval label

i‑Size: child restraint systems in the

"i‑Size" category are approved for instal-

lation in vehicles with i‑Size securing

rings. They can be used, in accordance

with overviews of the suitability of seats

for securing child restraint systems, on

seats labelled i-U.

The designation i-U refers to i-Size child

restraint systems in the "Universal" cat-

egory. These child restraint systems

must also be secured using Top Tether or

a supporting bracket.

Observe the suitability of vehicle seats

Depending on the approval category, there

are forward-facing and/or rearward-facing

child restraint systems. Usage may be limi-

ted for certain vehicle seats.

Suitability of the seats for attaching ISO-

FIX child restraint systems (Y page 49)

Suitability of the seats for attaching

i‑Size child restraint systems

(Y page 51)

Suitability of the seats for attaching

belt-secured child restraint systems

(Y page 55)

Securing the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system

Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems

ISOFIX identification

ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for special restraint systems.

This symbol indicates which seats are suitable for securing an ISOFIX

child restraint system in accordance with UN-R44 (Y page 48).

Only secure child restraint systems approved by UN-R44 in accordance

with the following ISOFIX tables.

Carry cot

Size class Equipment Front-passenger front air-

bag enabled

Front-passenger front air-

bag disabled

F ISO/L1 X X

G ISO/L2 X X

Not suitable for an ISOFIX child

restraint system in this weight cate-

gory and/or size category.

The vehicle is equipped with a front-

passenger front airbag deactivation

system. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp must be lit.

Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

>> Safety.

Weight category 0 (up to 10 kg and up to approximately 6 months)

Size class Equipment Front-passenger front air-

bag enabled

Front-passenger front air-

bag disabled

E ISO/R1 X IL

Not suitable for an ISOFIX child

restraint system in this weight cate-

gory and/or size category.

The vehicle is equipped with a front-

passenger front airbag deactivation

system. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp must be lit.

Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint

systems in accordance with the table in

"Overview of recommended child

restraint systems", or if the vehicle and

the seat are listed in the child restraint

system manufacturer's vehicle model

list.

Weight category 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approximately 15 months)

Size class Equipment Front-passenger front air-

bag enabled

Front-passenger front air-

bag disabled

E ISO/R1 X IL

D ISO/R2 X IL

C ISO/R3 X IL

Not suitable for an ISOFIX child

restraint system in this weight cate-

gory and/or size category.

The vehicle is equipped with a front-

passenger front airbag deactivation

system. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp must be lit.

Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint

systems in accordance with the table in

"Overview of recommended child

restraint systems", or if the vehicle and

the seat are listed in the child restraint

system manufacturer's vehicle model

list.

Weight category I (9‑18 kg and approximately 9 months to 4 years)

Size class Equipment Front-passenger front air-

bag enabled

Front-passenger front air-

bag disabled

D ISO/R2 X IL

C ISO/R3 X IL

B ISO/F2 IUF IUF

B1 ISO/F2X IUF IUF

Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

>> Safety.

Size class Equipment Front-passenger front air-

bag enabled

Front-passenger front air-

bag disabled

A ISO/F3 IUF IUF

Not suitable for an ISOFIX child

restraint system in this weight cate-

gory and/or size category.

IUF

Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX

child restraint systems in the "Univer-

sal" category in this weight category.

The vehicle is equipped with a front-

passenger front airbag deactivation

system. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp must be lit.

Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint

systems in accordance with the table in

"Overview of recommended child

restraint systems", or if the vehicle and

the seat are listed in the child restraint

system manufacturer's vehicle model

list.

Suitability of the seats for attaching i‑Size child restraint systems

i‑Size identification

i‑Size is a standardised securing system for special restraint systems.

This symbol indicates which seats are suitable for securing an i‑Size

child restraint system in accordance with UN-R129 (Y page 48).

Child restraint systems which have been approved in accordance with

the following may be secured:

UN-R44 in accordance with the ISOFIX tables (Y page 49)

UN-R129 in accordance with the following i‑Size table

Front-passenger front air-

bag enabled

Front-passenger front air-

bag disabled

i‑Size child restraint sys-

tem

i-UF i‑U

i-UF

Suitable for a forward-facing

i‑Size child restraint system in the

"Universal" category.

The vehicle is equipped with a front-

passenger front airbag deactivation

system. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp must be lit.

i-U

Suitable for forward-facing and

rearward-facing i‑Size child restraint

systems in the "Universal" category.

Installing an ISOFIX or i-Size child

restraint system on the front passenger

seat

WARNING

For ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint sys-

tems, where the child is secured using

the integrated seat belt of the child

restraint system, the permissible gross

weight of the child and the child

restraint system is 33 kg.

If the child together with the child

restraint system weighs more than 33 kg,

Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

>> Safety.

ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint systems

with integrated seat belt no longer offer

sufficient protection. ISOFIX or i‑Size

child seat securing systems may be over-

loaded and will not be able to restrain the

child, for example, in the event of an

accident. This poses an increased risk of

injury or even fatal injury.

If the child together with the child

restraint system weighs more than 33 kg ,

only use ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint

systems with which the child is secured

with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the

child restraint system with the Top

Tether belt, if available.

Always observe the information on the

weight of the child restraint system:

in the installation and operating instruc-

tions provided by the manufacturer for

the child restraint system being used

on the label of the child restraint system,

if present

Regularly check that the maximum permis-

sible weight of the child and child restraint

system together is still complied with.

When fitting a child restraint system, be

sure to observe the following:

be sure to observe the correct use and

the suitability of seats for securing a

child restraint system.

ISOFIX child seat securing system

(Y page 49)

i‑Size child seat securing system

(Y page 51)

be sure to observe the installation and

operating instructions provided by the

manufacturer for the child restraint

system being used.

When fitting an ISOFIX child

restraint system, also observe the follow-

ing:

For certain child restraint systems in

weight category II or III, there may be

restrictions on the maximum size set-

ting, e.g. due to possible contact with

the roof.

The child restraint system must not be

put under strain between the roof and

the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing

the wrong direction.

ISOFIX securing rings

;

i-Size securing rings

Before every trip, make sure that the ISOFIX

child restraint system or the i-Size child

restraint system is engaged correctly in

both ISOFIX or i-Size securing rings.

Fit the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint

system on both securing rings of the

vehicle.

Securing Top Tether

If the child restraint system is

equipped with a Top Tether belt:

Top Tether can reduce the risk of injury.

The Top Tether belt provides an additional

connection between the child restraint sys-

tem secured with ISOFIX or i-Size and the

vehicle.

Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

>> Safety.

Top Tether anchorage ; is fitted to the

luggage compartment floor.

Fit the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint

system with Top Tether. Always comply

with the child restraint system manufac-

turer's installation instructions when

doing so.

Route Top Tether belt ? back over the

head restraint, keeping it as central as

possible, into the luggage compartment

through loop :.

Hook Top Tether hook = of Top Tether

belt ? into Top Tether anchorage ;.

Lift up the carpet a little if necessary.

Ensure that:

Top Tether hook = is hooked into Top

Tether anchorage ; as shown.

Top Tether belt ? is not twisted.

Tension Top Tether belt ?. Always com-

ply with the child restraint system man-

ufacturer's installation instructions

when doing so.

Disabling or enabling the front

passenger front airbag

WARNING

If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator

lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air-

bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in

the event of an accident and cannot per-

form its intended protective function. A

person in the front-passenger seat could

then, for example, come into contact with

the vehicle's interior, especially if the

person is sitting too close to the dash-

board. This poses an increased risk of

injury or even fatal injury.

In this case the front-passenger seat may

not be used. You may only transport a

child on the front-passenger seat if they

are seated in a suitable rearward or

forward-facing child restraint system.

Always observe the information about

suitable positioning of the child restraint

system in this Owner's Manual as well as

the child restraint system manufacturer's

installation instructions.

WARNING

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing

child restraint system on the front-

passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR

BAG ON indicator lamp is lit, the front-

passenger front airbag can deploy in the

event of an accident. The child could be

struck by the airbag. This poses an

increased risk of injury or even fatal

injury.

Make sure that the front-passenger front

airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

NEVER use a rearward-facing child

restraint on a seat protected by an

ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or

SERIOUS INJURY to the child can occur.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR

BAG ON indicator lamp is lit, do not fit a

rearward-facing child restraint system to

Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

>> Safety.

the front-passenger seat. Further informa-

tion can be found under "Problems with the

front-passenger front airbag deactivation

system" (Y page 191).

WARNING

If you secure a child in a forward-facing

child restraint system on the front-

passenger seat and you position the

front-passenger seat too close to the

dashboard, in the event of an accident,

the child could:

come into contact with the vehicle's

interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp is lit, for example

be struck by the airbag if the

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp

is on.

This poses an increased risk of injury or

even fatal injury.

Move the front-passenger seat as far

back as possible. Always make sure that

the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed

from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoul-

der belt guide on the child restraint sys-

tem. The shoulder belt strap must be

routed forwards and downwards from the

vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust

the front-passenger seat accordingly.

Additionally, always observe the infor-

mation on suitable positioning of the

child restraint system in this Owner's

Manual in addition to the child restraint

system manufacturer's installation

instructions.

Symbol for a rearward-facing child restraint

system

If you use a rearward-facing child restraint

system on the front-passenger seat, you

must disable the front-passenger front air-

bag.

Airbag-off switch : for enabling and disa-

bling the front-passenger front airbag

manually is in the dashboard on the front-

passenger side.

Push in airbag-off switch : of the front-

passenger front airbag beyond the point

of resistance.

To disable the front-passenger front air-

bag: turn airbag-off switch : anti-

clockwise.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 4 indica-

tor lamp on the overhead control panel

lights up and stays on when the ignition

is switched on (Y page 43).

To enable the front-passenger front air-

bag: turn airbag-off switch : clockwise.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON × indica-

tor lamp on the overhead control panel

lights up and stays on when the ignition

is switched on (Y page 43).

The front-passenger front airbag is gener-

ally enabled when the ignition is switched

Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

>> Safety.

on, except when the front-passenger front

airbag has been disabled manually. When

the front-passenger front airbag is disa-

bled, the 4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp on the overhead control

panel (Y page 43) lights up continuously

when the ignition is switched on.

Attaching a child restraint system with the seat belt

Notes on the suitability of the seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint sys-

tems

Front-passenger seat – notes

Notes on child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat

Observe the specific notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint sys-

tems. If the front-passenger seat is occupied, make sure that the status of the front-

passenger front airbag is correct depending on the situation both before and during

the journey (Y page 43).

Weight category Front-passenger front air-

bag is enabled

Front-passenger front air-

bag is disabled

The vehicle is equipped with a front-

passenger front airbag deactivation

system. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp must be lit.

Category 0: up to 10 kg X U, L

Category 0+: up to 13 kg X U, L

Category I: 9 to 18 kg UF, L U, L

Category II: 15 to 25 kg UF, L U, L

Category III: 22 to 36 kg U, L U, L

Not suitable for an ISOFIX child

restraint system in this weight cate-

gory and/or size category.

Suitable for forward-facing child

restraint systems in the "Universal"

category in this weight category.

Suitable for child restraint systems

in the "Universal" category in this

weight category.

Suitable for semi-universal child

restraint systems in accordance with

the table in "Recommended child

restraint systems", or if the vehicle and

the seat are listed in the child restraint

system manufacturer's vehicle model

list.

Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

>> Safety.

Notes on rearward-facing and forward-

facing child restraint systems on the

front passenger seat

WARNING

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing

child restraint system on the front-

passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front-

passenger front airbag can deploy in the

event of an accident. The child could be

struck by the airbag. This poses an

increased risk of injury or even fatal

injury.

Make sure that the front-passenger front

airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

NEVER use a rearward-facing child

restraint on a seat protected by an

ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or

SERIOUS INJURY to the child can occur.

Observe the specific notes on rearward-

facing and forward-facing child restraint

systems.

Warning notice on the front-passenger sun

visor

Always pay attention to the status of the

front-passenger front airbag with the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp:

If you fit a child restraint system to the

front-passenger seat, be sure to observe

the notes on disabling the front-

passenger front airbag (Y page 53).

When using a rearward-facing child

restraint system on the front-passenger

seat, the front-passenger front airbag

must always be disabled. This is only the

case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-

cator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 43).

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp goes out, the front-passenger front

airbag is enabled. The front-passenger

front airbag may deploy during an acci-

dent.

Attaching a child restraint system with

the seat belt to the front passenger seat

When fitting a belt-secured child restraint

system on the front-passenger seat, always

observe the following:

Be sure to observe the installation and

operating instructions provided by the

manufacturer for the child restraint

system being used.

When using a "Universal" or "Semi-

Universal" category child restraint

system, ensure that it is approved for

the vehicle seat.

Observe the notes under "Suitability of

seats for attaching belt-secured child

restraint systems" (Y page 55).

The backrest of a forward-facing child

restraint system must, as far as possi-

ble, rest flat against the backrest of the

front-passenger seat.

For certain child restraint systems in

weight categories II or III, the maxi-

mum size setting may be restricted, for

instance due to possible contact with

the roof.

The child restraint system must not be

put under strain between the roof and

the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing

the wrong direction.

The child restraint system must not be

put under strain by the head restraint.

Never place objects, such as a cushion,

under or behind the child restraint

system.

Set the front-passenger seat as far back

as possible.

Adjust the seat backrest to an almost

vertical position.

Fit the child restraint system.

The base of the child restraint system

must lie fully against the seat cushion of

the front-passenger seat.

Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

>> Safety.

Always make sure that the shoulder belt

strap is correctly routed from the vehicle

belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on

the child restraint system.

The shoulder belt strap must be routed

forwards and downwards from the belt

outlet.

If necessary, adjust the belt outlet and

the front-passenger seat as appropriate.

Pets in the vehicle

WARNING

If you leave animals unsupervised or

unsecured in the vehicle, they may press

buttons or switches, for instance.

In this way, animals may:

activate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example

switch systems on or off and thereby

endanger other road users

Furthermore, unsecured animals may be

flung around inside the vehicle in the

event of an accident or abrupt steering or

braking manoeuvre, and thereby injure

vehicle occupants. There is a risk of acci-

dent and injury.

Never leave animals unattended in the

vehicle.

Always secure animals properly when

driving, for instance with a suitable pet

carrier.

Driving safely

Driving safety system limitations

Make sure you have suitable tyres, so

that assistance systems and driving

safety systems can work as effectively as

possible.

If you fail to adapt your driving style or if

you are inattentive, the driving safety sys-

tems can neither reduce the risk of accident

nor override the laws of physics. Driving

safety systems are merely aids designed to

assist driving. You are responsible for the

distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle

speed and for braking in good time. Always

adapt your driving style to suit the pre-

vailing road, weather and traffic conditions

and maintain a safe distance from the vehi-

cle in front. Drive carefully.

For safety reasons, smart recommends that

you only use snow chains that have been

specially approved for your vehicle by

smart. Further information can be obtained

at a smart Centre or a qualified specialist

workshop.

Braking with ABS (Anti-lock Braking

System)

ABS controls brake pressure in such a way

that the wheels do not lock when you brake.

This allows you to continue steering the

vehicle when braking.

When you switch on the ignition, the !

warning lamp in the instrument cluster

lights up. It goes out after the engine is

started.

ABS works from a speed of about 6 km/h,

regardless of road surface conditions. ABS

intervenes in the case of slippery road sur-

faces, even if you only brake gently.

To brake while ABS intervenes: continue

to depress the brake pedal with force

until the braking situation is over.

To make a full brake application: depress

the brake pedal with full force.

WARNING

If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock

when braking. The steerability and brak-

ing characteristics may be severely

impaired. Additionally, further driving

safety systems are deactivated. There is

an increased danger of skidding and

accidents.

Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked

immediately at a qualified specialist

workshop.

Driving safely

>> Safety.

Using Active Brake Assist

Useful information

With the help of the radar sensor system,

Active Brake Assist can calculate the dis-

tance of your vehicle to the vehicle in front.

If for several seconds, the distance to the

vehicle in front is insufficient for the speed

you are driving at, Active Brake Assist

alerts the driver visually.

If a risk of collision is detected, Active

Brake Assist alerts the driver both visually

and acoustically. In addition, Active Brake

Assist prepares the vehicle for a possible

emergency braking manoeuvre.

In particularly critical situations Active

Brake Assist may brake autonomously. In

this case, Active Brake Assist continues to

alert the driver both visually and acousti-

cally.

Please note

WARNING

Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly

identify objects and complex traffic sit-

uations.

In these cases, Active Brake Assist may:

warn or brake for no reason

not issue a warning

not brake

There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traf-

fic situation and do not rely on Active

Brake Assist alone. Be prepared to brake

or manoeuvre if necessary.

WARNING

Active Brake Assist does not react:

to persons, bicycles, motorcycles or

animals

to approaching vehicles

to cross traffic

on bends

As a result, Active Brake Assist cannot

intervene in all critical situations. There

is a risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traf-

fic situation and be prepared to brake.

WARNING

Severe jolting, for example in the case of

a collision, may cause the radar sensors

to be misaligned. The function of Active

Brake Assist is then impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.

Deactivate Active Brake Assist. Have

Active Brake Assist checked at a qualified

specialist workshop.

The following requirements must also be

fulfilled:

the selector lever is in position h.

the parking brake is released.

the driving speed is within the suitable

speed range.

Detection can be restricted under the fol-

lowing conditions:

the vehicle is new or service work has

been carried out on the system. In this

case, observe the information on run-

ning-in the vehicle.

the radio sensors are dirty or covered

(Y page 169).

in heavy rain or snow.

there is interference from other radar

sources, e.g. in multi-storey car parks.

the vehicle travelling in front is narrow,

e.g. a motorcycle.

the vehicle travelling in front is travel-

ling on a different line.

Autonomous braking can be cancelled by

briefly depressing the accelerator pedal.

If the brake lamps are inoperative, deacti-

vate Active Brake Assist.

Observe the notes on "Limitations of the

driving safety systems" (Y page 57).

Driving safely

>> Safety.

Distance warning and forward collision

warning with autonomous braking

function

Method of operation

If the distance maintained to the vehicle

ahead is insufficient for the speed you are

driving at, the · warning lamp lights

up.

If Active Brake Assist detects a risk of colli-

sion while driving, the · warning lamp

lights up and a warning tone sounds. If the

driver depresses the brake pedal fast, the

braking pressure may be increased to a full

brake application.

The autonomous braking function may

intervene if the driver does not react to the

forward collision warning.

When driving at speeds of more than

30 km/h, the collision warning may issue a

warning in the following situations:

Situation Speed you are trav-

elling

Vehicles in front 30 - 140 km/h

Vehicles coming to

a standstill

30 - 140 km/h

Stationary vehicles 30 - 80 km/h

Other objects or

crossing vehicles

No warning possi-

ble

When driving at speeds of more than

30 km/h, the autonomous braking function

may intervene in the following situations:

Situation Speed you are trav-

elling

Vehicles in front 30 - 140 km/h

Vehicles coming to

a standstill

30 - 140 km/h

Stationary vehicles No intervention

possible

Other objects or

crossing vehicles

No intervention

possible

Activating/deactivating Active Brake

Assist

Active Brake Assist is automatically activa-

ted when you start the engine.

Monochrome display: activating/deactivat-

ing Active Brake Assist using the on-board

computer (Y page 109).

Colour display: activating/deactivating

Active Brake Assist using the on-board

computer (Y page 110).

Driving with ESP

WARNING

If ESP

is malfunctioning, ESP

is unable

to stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other

driving safety systems are switched off.

This increases the risk of skidding and an

accident.

Drive on carefully. Have ESP

checked at

a qualified specialist workshop.

Within physical limits, ESP

can monitor

and improve the driving stability and trac-

tion in the following situations:

when pulling away on wet or slippery

road surfaces

when braking

in case of strong crosswinds

If the vehicle deviates from the direction

desired by the driver, ESP

can stabilise the

vehicle by intervening in the following

ways:

braking one or more wheels accordingly

adjusting the engine output according to

the situation

ESP

comprises ETS (Electronic Traction

System) and Crosswind Assist.

ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if

they spin. This enables you to pull away or

accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example

if the road surface is slippery on one side.

If the ÷ warning lamp goes out before

beginning the journey, ESP

is active.

If the ÷ warning lamp flashes in the

instrument cluster, ESP

is intervening.

Driving safely

>> Safety.

If ESP

intervenes, observe the following

points:

pull away carefully: only depress the

accelerator pedal as far as necessary

adapt your driving style to the prevailing

road and weather conditions

If the ÷ ESP

warning lamp lights up

continuously, ESP

is not available due to a

malfunction. Crosswind Assist is then also

no longer active.

Observe the additional information on indi-

cator and warning lamps and display mes-

sages.

Crosswind Assist recognises suddenly

occurring crosswinds and helps the driver

to keep the vehicle in the correct lane. The

vehicle is stabilised using a targeted and

one-sided application of the brakes.

Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds

above 70 km/h when driving straight ahead

or cornering gently.

Information on EBD (Electronic Brake-

force Distribution)

EBD monitors and controls the brake pres-

sure on the rear wheels to improve driving

stability while braking.

WARNING

If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels

can lock, e.g. under full braking. This

increases the risk of skidding and an

accident.

You should therefore adapt your driving

style to the different handling character-

istics. Have the brake system checked at

a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving safely

>> Safety.

Understanding functions of the key

The following keys are available:

folding key

replacement key with fixed bit

% Unlocks the vehicle

;

º smart EQ fortwo: opens the upper

tailgate (press and hold)

;

º smart EQ fortwo cabrio: opens the

soft top (press and hold)

& Locks the vehicle

% Unlocks the vehicle

;

& Locks the vehicle

é smart EQ fortwo: opens the upper

tailgate (press and hold)

é smart EQ fortwo cabrio: opens the

soft top (press and hold)

To unlock centrally: press the % but-

ton.

The turn signals flash once.

After unlocking, open the vehicle within

approximately two minutes to prevent it

from locking itself and priming the anti-

theft alarm system again.

To unlock and open the upper tailgate

(smart EQ fortwo): press and hold the

º or é button.

To open the soft top to the B-pillar (smart

EQ fortwo cabrio): press and hold the

º or é button.

To lock centrally: press the & button.

The turn signals flash twice.

To activate the double-lock function (for

United Kingdom only): press the &

button twice.

The turn signals flash twice slowly and

three times quickly.

Opening the door

Press the # button on the key.

Open the door.

After unlocking, open the vehicle within

approximately two minutes to prevent it

from locking itself and priming the anti-

theft alarm system again.

Correct driver's seat position

WARNING

You could lose control of the vehicle

while driving if you:

adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel

or mirror

fasten the seat belt.

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or

mirror and fasten the seat belt before

starting the engine.

Correct driver's seat position

>> Entering and setting up.

Observe the following rules on the correct

driver's seat position:

the driver must be as far away from the

driver's airbag as possible (Y page 41).

the driver must be wearing seat belt =

properly.

the driver must be able to depress the

pedals properly.

the driver must be able to move their legs

freely.

the driver must be able to reach steering

wheel : with their arms slightly bent.

the driver must be able to see all the dis-

plays in the instrument cluster clearly.

move seat backrest ; to an almost verti-

cal position.

sit in a normal upright position.

the seat belt must fit snugly across your

body.

the seat belt must be routed across the

middle of your shoulder.

the seat belt must be routed in your pel-

vic area across the hip joints.

adjust the rear-view and exterior mirrors

so that the driver has a good view of the

road and traffic.

Adjusting the seats

Please note

WARNING

If children adjust the seats, they could

become trapped, especially if they are

unattended. There is a risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take

the key with you and lock the vehicle.

Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

WARNING

If the driver's seat is not correctly

engaged, it could unexpectedly move

while driving. This could cause you to

lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk

of an accident.

Always ensure that the driver's seat is

engaged before starting the vehicle.

WARNING

When adjusting a seat, you or another

vehicle occupant could become trapped

by the guide rail of the seat, for instance.

There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that no one has any part of

their body within the area of movement of

the seat when adjusting it.

WARNING

The seat belt does not offer the intended

level of protection if you have not moved

the backrest to an almost vertical posi-

tion. When braking or in the event of an

accident, you could slide underneath the

seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck

injuries, for example. This poses an

increased risk of injury or even fatal

injury.

Adjust the seat properly before beginning

your journey. Always ensure that the

backrest is in an almost vertical position

and that the shoulder section of your

seatbelt is routed across the centre of

your shoulder.

WARNING

The steering wheel may move unexpect-

edly if you adjust it while driving. This

could cause you to lose control of the

vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Make sure that the steering wheel is

locked before driving off. Never unlock

Adjusting the seats

>> Entering and setting up.

the steering wheel when the vehicle is in

motion.

WARNING

You could lose control of the vehicle

while driving if you:

adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel

or mirror

fasten the seat belt.

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or

mirror and fasten the seat belt before

starting the engine.

Make sure that there are no objects in

the footwell under or behind the seats

when moving the seats back. There is a

risk that the seats and/or the objects

could be damaged.

Observe the safety notes on "Airbags"

(Y page 41) and "Children in the vehicle"

(Y page 43).

Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft posi-

tion

Seat with a lever

Seat with a handwheel

To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position,

the seat belt must not be fastened.

Lift lever =.

Slide the seat forwards or backwards.

The seat engages audibly.

Adjusting the seat height (seat with a

lever only)

Pull handle ; up or push it down several

times.

Adjusting the seat backrest (seat with

a lever)

Pull lever : upwards.

At the same time, move the backrest for-

wards or backwards.

Adjusting the seat backrest (seat with

a handwheel)

Turn handwheel ? forwards or back-

wards.

Adjusting the steering wheel

WARNING

The steering wheel may move unexpect-

edly if you adjust it while driving. This

could cause you to lose control of the

vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Adjusting the steering wheel

>> Entering and setting up.

Make sure that the steering wheel is

locked before driving off. Never unlock

the steering wheel when the vehicle is in

motion.

WARNING

You could lose control of the vehicle

while driving if you:

adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel

or mirror

fasten the seat belt.

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or

mirror and fasten the seat belt before

starting the engine.

WARNING

Children could become trapped by the

steering wheel if they adjust it. There is a

risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take

the key with you and lock the vehicle.

Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

Fold down lever :.

Set desired steering wheel height 2.

Fold up lever :.

Check that the steering column is locked.

Adjusting the mirrors

Adjusting the rear-view mirror

Move the rear-view mirror up, down, left

or right.

Manually setting the rear-view mirror

to anti-dazzle mode

Fold lever : forwards.

Understanding automatic anti-dazzle

mode of rear-view mirror

Please note

WARNING

Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an

automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. The

electrolyte is harmful and causes irrita-

tion. It must not come into contact with

your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or

clothing or be swallowed. There is a risk

of injury.

If you come into contact with the electro-

lyte, observe the following:

Rinse off the electrolyte from your skin

immediately with water.

Immediately rinse the electrolyte out of

your eyes thoroughly with clean water.

If the electrolyte is swallowed, immedi-

ately rinse your mouth out thoroughly.

Do not induce vomiting.

Adjusting the mirrors

>> Entering and setting up.

If electrolyte comes into contact with

your skin or hair or is swallowed, seek

medical attention immediately.

Immediately change out of clothing

which has come into contact with elec-

trolyte.

If an allergic reaction occurs, seek

medical attention immediately.

Useful information

The rear-view mirror automatically goes

into anti-dazzle mode if simultaneously:

the ignition is switched on

incident light from headlamps hits the

sensor in the rear-view mirror

The rear-view mirror does not go into anti-

dazzle mode if reverse gear is engaged or if

the interior lighting is switched on.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors man-

ually

WARNING

You could lose control of the vehicle

while driving if you:

adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel

or mirror

fasten the seat belt.

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or

mirror and fasten the seat belt before

starting the engine.

WARNING

The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the

image. Objects visible in the mirrors are

closer than they appear. You could mis-

judge the distance from road users driv-

ing behind you when changing lanes, for

instance. There is a risk of an accident.

You should therefore always look over

your shoulder to determine the actual

distance from road users driving behind

you.

Move lever : up, down, left or right.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors electri-

cally

In order to adjust the exterior mirrors elec-

trically, the ignition must be switched on.

To select the left or right exterior mirror:

turn control = left 1 or right 2.

To adjust the exterior mirrors: move con-

trol = up, down, left or right.

Using the armrest

Please note

Do not lean on the armrest with full

force or it could become damaged.

Using the armrest

>> Entering and setting up.

Starting the engine

Please note

WARNING

If children are left unsupervised in the

vehicle, they can:

open doors and endanger other persons

or road users

climb out and be injured by the traffic

operate vehicle equipment and, for

example, trap themselves.

Children could also set the vehicle in

motion, for example by:

releasing the parking brake

shifting the automatic transmission

out of park position P

starting the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take

the key with you and lock the vehicle.

Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach

of children.

WARNING

If you attach heavy or large objects to the

key, the key could be unintentionally

turned in the ignition lock. This could

cause the engine to be switched off. There

is a risk of an accident.

Do not attach any heavy or large objects

to the key. Remove any bulky keyrings

before inserting the key into the ignition

lock.

To insert the key into the ignition lock

To switch on the power supply

To switch on the ignition

To start the engine

Automatic transmission

Turn the key to position 3 until the

READY indicator appears in the instru-

ment cluster and a warning tone sounds.

Shift out of transmission position j or

Hold the key in position 3 until the

engine starts.

Pulling away

Please note

WARNING

Objects in the driver's footwell can

impede pedal travel or block a pedal

which is depressed. This jeopardises safe

operation of the vehicle. There is a risk of

an accident.

Stow all objects in the vehicle safely, so

that they cannot reach the driver's foot-

well. Make sure the floormats and carpets

are properly secured so that they cannot

slip and obstruct the pedals. Do not lay

several floormats or carpets on top of one

another.

Pulling away

>> Driving.

WARNING

Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct

usage of the pedals, e.g.:

shoes with thick soles

shoes with high heels

slippers

There is a risk of an accident.

Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct

usage of the pedals.

WARNING

If you switch off the ignition while driv-

ing, safety-relevant functions are only

available with limitations, or not at all.

This could affect, for example, the power

steering and the brake boosting effect.

You will require considerably more effort

to steer and brake. There is a risk of an

accident.

Do not switch off the ignition while driv-

ing.

Note the following when pulling away:

Do not drive with the parking brake

applied.

Use caution when pulling away on slip-

pery surfaces.

Do not allow tyres to spin.

Depress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.

Press the release button on the selector

lever.

Shift the gear selector lever to position

h or k.

Using the parking brake

Please note

WARNING

If the parking brake has not been fully

released when driving, the parking brake

can:

overheat and cause a fire

lose its hold function.

There is a risk of fire and an accident.

Release the parking brake fully before

driving off.

WARNING

If you must brake the vehicle with the

parking brake, the braking distance is

considerably longer and the wheels could

lock. This increases the risk of skidding

and an accident.

Only use the parking brake to brake the

vehicle when the service brake is faulty.

Do not apply the parking brake too

firmly. If the wheels lock, release the

parking brake until the wheels begin

turning again.

WARNING

If you leave children unattended in the

vehicle, they may be able to set the vehi-

cle in motion if, for example, they:

release the parking brake

shift the automatic transmission out of

park position P

start the engine

In addition, they may operate vehicle

equipment and become trapped. There is

a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take

the key with you and lock the vehicle.

Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

Applying the parking brake

Pulling away

>> Driving.

Pull parking brake ; upwards.

The brake lights do not light up when you

brake the vehicle with the parking brake.

Releasing the parking brake

Depress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.

Press release button : on parking

brake ; and move the parking brake

down to the stop.

Hill start assist

WARNING

After a while, hill start assist no longer

holds the vehicle and it may roll away.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Therefore, quickly move your foot from

the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.

Never leave the vehicle when it is held by

hill start assist.

Hill start assist keeps the vehicle in place

when driving uphill as soon as the brake

pedal is released.

Hill start assist is only active in the follow-

ing situations:

when pulling away on an uphill slope

when the parking brake is released

the transmission is not in position i

ESP

is functioning correctly.

Release the brake pedal.

The vehicle is then held for about one

second.

Pull away.

Automatic transmission

Please note

WARNING

When the engine is switched off, the

automatic transmission shifts into neu-

tral position N. The vehicle may roll

away. There is a risk of an accident.

Always shift to parking position P before

switching off the engine. Secure the

parked vehicle against rolling away by

applying the parking brake.

Transmission position display

Only shift into transmission positions

B, C or A when the vehicle is

stationary. Otherwise, you may damage

the transmission.

The following transmission positions are

available:

j Park position

Position j should not be used to brake

the vehicle when parking. To secure the

vehicle, apply the parking brake in addi-

tion to shifting to transmission position

k Reverse gear

i Neutral

No power is transmitted from the engine

to the drive wheels.

h Drive

Changing the transmission position

Park position with parking lock

Reverse gear

Neutral

Drive

The ignition must be switched on in order

to shift the transmission to positions j,

i or k. To shift the transmission from

position j, you must also depress the

brake pedal.

Automatic transmission

>> Driving.

Press release knob :.

Shift the selector lever to the desired

transmission position.

Maximum acceleration (kickdown)

To reach maximum acceleration, use kick-

down:

Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the

pressure point.

Ease off the accelerator pedal once the

desired speed is reached.

Using the turn signals

The ignition must be switched on in order

to use the turn signals.

To indicate: press the combination switch

in the direction of arrow 1 (right) or 2

(left) past the point of resistance.

To indicate briefly: press the combina-

tion switch briefly to the point of resist-

ance.

The turn signal flashes three times.

Acoustic presence indicator

Useful information

Vehicles with an electric motor generate

much less driving noise than vehicles with

internal combustion engines. As a result,

the vehicle may not be heard by other road

users in certain situations.

In order to allow your vehicle to be heard

when it is moving at slow speeds, a sound

generator installed in the vehicle produces

a specific noise at speeds between 0 and

30 km/h. This function is called the acoustic

presence indicator. This helps other road

users, particularly pedestrians and

cyclists, to hear your vehicle better. The

acoustic presence indicator can also be

heard in the vehicle interior.

The volume of the acoustic presence indi-

cator depends on the engine speed. The

faster you accelerate, the louder the sound

is. At speeds of over 30 km/h, the sound is

switched off. Above this speed, the driving

noise naturally created by the vehicle is

typically sufficient for the vehicle to be

heard in good time by other road users.

Deactivating/activating the acoustic

presence indicator

The acoustic presence indicator is automat-

ically activated each time the ignition is

started.

Press the switch.

If the acoustic presence indicator is

deactivated, the LED on the switch

lights up.

Radar-based recuperation

Only for instrument cluster with colour dis-

play:

The "Radar-based recuperation" function

adapts the vehicle's rate of recuperation to

current traffic conditions. It activates itself

automatically as soon as the accelerator

pedal is released. There are five levels up to

the maximum value for optimum recupera-

tion and distance to the vehicle ahead. The

Radar-based recuperation

>> Driving.

maximum value can vary depending on the

charge status of the battery and the battery

temperature.

Radar sensors measure the distance to and

the speed of a vehicle ahead. The shorter

the distance to the vehicle ahead, the

greater the recuperation. When recupera-

tion is high, the brake lamps also light up.

The current level of recuperation is not

shown in the power display (Y page 71).

Radar-based recuperation is not active in

the following cases:

the radar sensor system is malfunction-

ing

the connection to the radar is interrupted

Active Brake Assist is deactivated

ECO mode is activated.

the vehicle speed is too low

the transmission is in position k or i

Radar-based recuperation is deactivated

when ECO mode is activated.

On-board computer with colour display: the

symbol in the display indicates the

status of radar-based recuperation:

lights up white: switched on, not

active

lights up green: switched on, active

is not displayed: Active Brake Assist

is deactivated or the radar sensor is mal-

functioning

On-board computer with colour display:

radar-based recuperation is switched on

and off in the on-board computer

(Y page 110).

Observe the notes on safe driving

(Y page 57).

Driving economically

Notes on economical driving

In order to save energy, a part of the kinetic

energy is recuperated and stored in the

high-voltage battery. When the driver

releases the accelerator pedal, the vehicle

decelerates.

In the following cases, the vehicle does not

decelerate, or only decelerates to a limited

extent, when the accelerator pedal is

released:

the gear lever is in position h and the

vehicle is rolling backwards

the gear lever is in position k and the

vehicle is rolling forwards

On steep slopes, the vehicle may not be

held at all or only be held to a limited

degree.

In the following cases recuperation is

restricted:

the high-voltage battery is full or too

cold

the power electronics or engine has over-

heated

Recommendations for driving economically:

accelerate moderately

observe the power availability dis-

play(Y page 71)

drive with care

use the air conditioning and the electri-

cal consumers sparingly

have maintenance work carried out at the

specified service intervals

You can use ECO mode in order to save more

energy.

ECO mode has the following characteristics:

reduced torque and significantly reduced

power. This supports a particularly effi-

cient, steady driving style. The speed is

reduced to approx. 110 km/h.

the performance of the air-conditioning

and heating systems is reduced.

the maximum available recuperation is

activated.

the vehicle accelerates more slowly.

the "radar-based recuperation" function

is switched off.

To increase acceleration when in ECO mode,

depress the accelerator pedal beyond the

pressure point.

Driving economically

>> Driving.

Switching ECO mode on/off

Press button :.

If the energy-saving function is activa-

ted, the ECO display is shown in the on-

board computer.

The energy-saving function is switched

off when the ignition is restarted.

Power and charge level display

Useful information

Power display

;

Charge level display

Power display : and charge level dis-

play ; can be adjusted to the left or right.

The charge level display lights up when the

vehicle is unlocked.

Power display

Do not hang any objects on the power

display.

This could cause the dashboard clock to

be torn out of its anchorage point and be

severely damaged.

Power display : contains two areas:

Area to the right of 0

The current power that the high-voltage

battery provides is shown here. 100% cor-

responds to the peak performance of the

high-voltage battery.

Area to the left of 0

The vehicle's level of recuperation in

overrun mode and when braking is shown

here.

The LED ring in power display : shows the

power output available.

If the needle for power display : is in the

"OFF" position, the vehicle is not ready to

drive because:

the ignition is switched off

the gear lever has not been moved to

position i or j to start the drive sys-

tem

the charging cable is still connected to

the vehicle socket

there is insufficient power available from

the high-voltage battery

there is a malfunction in the vehicle's

high-voltage electrical system

If the drive system has been started, the

needle of power display : is in position

"0". The READY indicator appears in the

instrument cluster. A tone sounds. The

vehicle is ready for driving.

Charge level display

Do not hang any objects on the charge

level gauge.

This could cause the charge level gauge

to be torn out of its anchorage point and

be damaged.

Charge level display ; displays the charge

status of the high-voltage battery as a per-

centage.

The high-voltage battery has reached the

reserve level in the following cases:

the Battery Reserve Level message

appears in the display

charge level display ; is in the red area

i Charge the high-voltage battery when

the charge falls below 20%.

Driving economically

>> Driving.

Understanding the eco score display

in the on-board computer

Useful information

The eco score display provides information

on how to drive economically.

A higher percentage indicates a more eco-

nomical driving style.

The percentage of the eco score display

only appears after covering a short dis-

tance. If the ignition remains switched off

for longer than four hours, the eco score

display will be reset.

Monochrome display

The percentage of the eco score display

increases when you:

accelerate with moderation

avoid unnecessary acceleration and

deceleration

Colour display

The percentage in the eco score display is

calculated using the following categories:

Speed: the value increases when driving

at low speeds.

Anticipation: the value increases when

unnecessary acceleration and decelera-

tion is avoided.

Using the eco score display in the

smart Media-System

Calling up the eco score menu

Select Vehicle > eco score.

Evaluating the current trip

Select Current trip.

Evaluation information and values are

calculated.

The following rating information and

values appear:

Bar graphs for accelerate, anticipa‐

tory and shift

Bar graphs for Speed and Anticipation

Distance covered

Total eco score as a percentage

Saving the current trip

Select Current trip > Save.

Select the category under which you

want to save the trip.

The values for the current trip will be

added to the category selected and the

current trip will be reset. In the instru-

ment cluster, the trip computer values

will be returned to "From reset".

The values for the current trip will be

added to the category selected and the

current trip will be reset. In the instru-

ment cluster, the values for the "From

start" trip computer and eco score dis-

play will be reset.

Driving economically

>> Driving.

Comparing the current trip with the

saved trips from a category

Last trip saved in this category

;

Average value for the category

Best trip in the category

Select Current trip > W > Compare.

Select a category.

A comparison of the values for the cur-

rent trip with the values of the selected

category appears.

Select comparison value :, ; or =.

The current trip is compared to the

respective comparison value from the

category.

Resetting the current trip data

Select Current trip > Reset.

Select Yes.

In the instrument cluster, the trip com-

puter values will be returned to "From

reset".

In the instrument cluster, the values for

the "From start" trip computer and eco

score display will be reset.

Activating/deactivating eco score after

a trip

To activate: select Current trip > W >

Show eco score after trip.

To deactivate: select Current trip >

W > Hide eco score after trip.

Displaying eco score for saved trips in a

category

Select Vehicle > eco score > My prefer‐

red trips.

Select a category.

eco score displays the comparison values.

eco score contains the following compari-

son values for each category:

Summary

Last value

Average value

Best value

For the category Last trip saved you

can choose from various types of evalua-

tions.

Types of evaluations:

Summary

Detailed report

Renaming an eco score category

At least one trip must be stored in the

respective category.

Select Vehicle > eco score > My prefer‐

red trips > W > Rename this cate‐

gory.

Resetting the eco score of a category

At least one trip must be stored in the

respective category.

Select Vehicle > eco score > My prefer‐

red trips > W > Reset this cate‐

gory.

Braking correctly

Please note

WARNING

The braking system can overheat if you

leave your foot on the brake pedal while

driving. This increases the braking dis-

tance and could even cause the braking

system to fail. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

Braking correctly

>> Driving.

Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.

Do not simultaneously depress both the

brake pedal and the accelerator pedal

while driving.

The vehicle decelerates as soon as you

release the accelerator pedal. This aids

recuperation as the motor is used as a gen-

erator and charges the high-voltage bat-

tery.

Braking on steep downhill gradients

Observe the following rules when driving

on downhill gradients:

do not move the selector lever to position

if recuperation is restricted, also brake at

intervals

Braking on wet road surfaces

There may be a delayed brake response

when driving on wet roads, after driving

through a car wash or after driving through

deep water.

Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle

in front.

Brake more firmly.

Braking on salt-treated roads

When driving on salt-treated roads, a layer

of salt may form on the brake discs and

pads. This increases the vehicle's braking

distance.

In order to prevent any salt build-up,

apply the brakes occasionally while pay-

ing attention to the traffic conditions.

Brake carefully at the end of the journey

and when starting the next journey.

Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle

in front.

Driving on wet roads

Aquaplaning

Depending on driving style and tyre tread

depths, aquaplaning can occur on the road.

Adapt your driving style as follows:

Reduce the speed.

Brake carefully.

Avoid sudden steering movements.

Avoid tyre ruts.

Fording

Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in

front or in the opposite direction create

waves. This may cause the maximum per-

missible water depth to be exceeded.

These notes must be observed under all

circumstances. You could otherwise dam-

age the engine, the electronics or the

transmission.

Observe the following when driving

through standing water:

Do not drive through water that is higher

than the lower edge of the vehicle body.

Drive at walking pace.

Winter driving

Before the start of winter, have the vehi-

cle checked at a qualified specialist

workshop.

Use winter tyres and, if applicable, snow

chains.

Drive carefully and avoid sudden accel-

eration, turning and braking on slippery

road surfaces.

Do not use cruise control.

If the vehicle skids, take corrective steer-

ing actions to counteract the movement.

If the vehicle skids, shift the transmis-

sion to position i.

Do not use the outside temperature dis-

play as a way to determine if conditions

are icy.

Observe the road surface.

Winter driving

>> Driving.

Lane Keeping Assist

Please note

WARNING

Lane Keeping Assist cannot always

clearly detect lane markings.

In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can:

issue an unnecessary warning

not issue a warning

There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay particular attention to the

traffic situation and keep within the lane,

especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts

you.

WARNING

The Lane Keeping Assist warning does

not return the vehicle to the original

lane. There is a risk of an accident.

Always steer, apply the brakes or accel-

erate the vehicle yourself, especially if

Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.

Lane Keeping Assist issues an acoustic and

visual warning when a vehicle uninten-

tionally leaves the lane.

Lane Keeping Assist uses a camera which is

located on the windscreen behind the rear-

view mirror.

Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your

vehicle in its lane. The driver is responsible

for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and

staying within the lane.

Lane Keeping Assist could be impaired or

fail to respond under the following condi-

tions:

poor visibility

strong glaring light

dirty windscreen in the camera area

unclear or broken lane markings

very narrow and winding roads

highly variable shade conditions on the

road

When the turn signal is set, warnings are

suppressed for a certain period of time.

No warning is given in the following situa-

tions:

when crossing a lane marking quickly

at speeds below 70 km/h

On-board computer with monochrome dis-

play: the ¸ and ¤ symbols in the dis-

play indicate the status of Lane Keeping

Assist:

¸: speed is below 70 km/h or lanes are

not detected due to external causes. No

warning is given when the vehicle leaves

the lane.

¤: speed is above 70 km/h and the

system is able to detect lane markings. A

warning is given if the vehicle uninten-

tionally leaves the detected lane.

On-board computer with colour display: The

¸ symbol in the display indicates the

status of Lane Keeping Assist:

¸ lights up white: speed is below

70 km/h or lanes are not detected due to

external causes. No warning is given

when the vehicle leaves the lane.

¸ lights up green: speed is above

70 km/h and the system is able to detect

lane markings. A warning is given if the

vehicle unintentionally leaves the detec-

ted lane.

Activating and deactivating Lane

Keeping Assist

Press the switch.

When Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated,

the LED on the switch lights up.

On-board computer with colour display:

the display also shows a message.

Lane Keeping Assist

>> Driving.

When the ignition is restarted, the last set-

ting of Lane Keeping Assist is retained.

Cruise control and limiter

Please note

WARNING

If you call up the stored speed and this

differs from your current speed, the vehi-

cle will accelerate. If you do not know the

stored speed, the vehicle can accelerate

unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

Before you call up the stored speed, pay

attention to traffic conditions. If you do

not know the stored speed, store the

desired speed again.

Cruise control is used in order to drive at a

constant speed for a prolonged period. The

limiter helps to avoid exceeding a stored

speed.

The driver is responsible for driving the

vehicle in a safe manner, controlling the

vehicle speed and braking in good time.

If there is a change of drivers, inform the

new driver of the speed stored.

The two driver assist systems require the

following:

favourable weather and good visibility

good road and traffic conditions

The cruise control and limiter systems do

not brake automatically.

reduce the vehicle speed by applying the

brakes

Speed regulation is cancelled when the fol-

lowing occur:

braking (including the parking brake)

ESP

intervention

On downhill gradients or when accelerating

briefly, cruise control may interrupt speed

regulation. Afterwards, the set speed is

applied again.

On downhill slopes, the limiter can exceed

the set speed. In this case, the stored speed

flashes in the display and a warning tone

sounds.

Cruise control is ready for use at speeds

above 30 km/h. With the limiter, speeds of

30 km/h and over can be set as the maxi-

mum speed.

Cruise control and limiter cannot be activa-

ted at the same time.

Activating cruise control or the lim-

iter

Press top (cruise control) or bottom (lim-

iter) of button :.

The ¯ (cruise control) or È (lim-

iter) button appears in the instrument

cluster display.

Storing the current speed

Press the ® button ;.

Limiter: the stored speed appears next to

the È symbol in the instrument clus-

ter display.

Cruise control: the stored speed appears

next to the ¯ symbol in the instru-

ment cluster display.

Adjusting the stored speed

Press the ® button ; or the g button

until the desired speed is reached.

Interrupting cruise control and the

limiter

Press the ± button ?.

The stored speed can be accessed again

later.

Cruise control and limiter

>> Driving.

The stored speed is deleted when the

engine is switched off.

Calling up the stored speed

Press the ° button =.

Cruise control: release the accelerator

pedal.

Deactivating cruise control or the

limiter

Press button : to the OFF centre posi-

tion.

The ¯ or È symbol in the instru-

ment cluster display goes out. The stored

speed is deleted.

The stored speed is deleted when the

engine is switched off.

Charging the high-voltage battery

Please note

DANGER

The vehicle's high-voltage electrical sys-

tem is under high voltage. If you modify

components in the vehicle's high-voltage

electrical system or touch damaged com-

ponents, you may suffer an electric

shock. The components in the vehicle's

high-voltage electrical system may be

damaged in an accident, although the

damage is not visible. There is a risk of

fatal injury.

Never carry out modifications to the

high-voltage electrical system.

Never touch damaged components of the

high-voltage electrical system.

Do not touch high-voltage components

after an accident.

Have the vehicle transported away after

an accident.

Have the high-voltage electrical system

checked at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

WARNING

In the event of a vehicle fire, the internal

pressure of the high-voltage battery

could exceed a critical value. In this case,

flammable gas escapes through a vent

valve in the vehicle's underbody. The gas

could ignite. There is a risk of injury.

In cases of unusual smells developing,

smoke or burn marks, stop the charging

process immediately.

Leave the danger area immediately.

Secure the danger area at a suitable dis-

tance.

Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING

If the housing of the high-voltage bat-

tery has been damaged, electrolyte and

gases may leak out. These are poisonous

and caustic. There is a risk of injury.

Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or

clothing. Immediately rinse electrolyte

splashes off with water and seek medical

attention straight away.

DANGER

The vehicle's high-voltage electrical sys-

tem is under high voltage. If you carry

out work on high-voltage components,

you may suffer an electric shock. There is

a risk of fatal injury.

To avoid such risks, observe the follow-

ing:

do not tamper with high-voltage com-

ponents or the orange cables of the

vehicle's high-voltage electrical sys-

tem

never touch the high-voltage compo-

nents or the orange cables of the high-

voltage electrical system in a vehicle

which has been involved in an accident

never touch any damaged components

or the damaged orange cables of the

vehicle's high-voltage electrical sys-

tem

Charging the high-voltage battery

>> Driving.

do not remove the covers of the high-

voltage electrical system components

that are marked with a yellow warning

sticker

do not insert any objects which con-

duct electricity into the charging cable

connector or the charging cable socket

DANGER

The vehicle's high-voltage electrical sys-

tem is under high voltage. If the charging

process is not performed properly, it

could cause a fire or an electric shock.

There is a risk of fatal injury.

Do not perform the charging process in

the following situations:

at temperatures of over 50 † and below

-40 †

in storms

if the charging cable is damaged, rus-

ted or corroded

if there is moisture on the charging

cable connector or charging cable

socket, or your hands are wet

when cleaning the vehicle

To avoid hazardous situations, always han-

dle the charging cable correctly before and

after using it:

before using the charging cable for the

first time, remove the adhesive tape

which holds the cable together

unwind the charging cable fully before

every charging process

there must be no foreign objects in the

charging cable connector or on the

charging cable socket

keep the charging cable out of the reach

of children and animals. Always store the

charging cable in a safe place, e.g. in the

charging cable bag

The high-voltage battery must not be

charged with a damaged charging cable.

Therefore, always make sure that:

you do not damage the charging cable,

e.g. by driving over it, pulling too hard or

as a result of heavy impacts

the charging cable is not twisted, as oth-

erwise the charging cable may overheat

and the cable covering may be damaged

the charging cable is not placed in water,

fluids or snow

The charging cable must always be used in

the correct manner. In order to ensure the

charging cable is handled correctly,

observe the following:

do not make any changes or modifica-

tions to the charging cable

only use the charging cable to charge the

high-voltage battery

do not pull out the charging cable con-

nector or the charging cable socket dur-

ing the charging process

For safety reasons, only use the charging

cable which is supplied with the vehicle or

has been approved by smart for this vehi-

cle.

Useful information

Method of operation

The vehicle is equipped with a high-volt-

age battery for driving. The high-voltage

battery stores the energy needed to operate

the electric motor and releases it again.

The electric motor uses energy stored in the

high-voltage battery for pulling away and

accelerating.

In overrun mode, kinetic energy is conver-

ted into electrical energy by recuperation

and stored in the high-voltage battery.

In addition to recuperation, the high-volt-

age battery can be charged as follows:

with the suitable charging cable at a

mains socket while the vehicle is station-

ary

with the suitable charging cable at a

wallbox while the vehicle is stationary

with the suitable charging cable at a

charging station while the vehicle is sta-

tionary

Charging the high-voltage battery

>> Driving.

Charging cable for charging at a charg-

ing station or wallbox

;

Charging cable for charging at a mains

socket

Charging cables may differ from the ver-

sions shown depending on the country.

The different versions of charging cables

are distinguished by their charging cable

connectors. The charging cable which is

charged at a mains socket also has controls.

The options listed for charging a high-volt-

age battery are not available in all coun-

tries.

The high-voltage battery can be charged at

a charging station or wallbox in a nominal

voltage range from 100 V to 400 V.

Vehicles with 22 kW on-board charger: the

high-voltage battery can be charged in a

nominal voltage range from 220 V to 400 V.

If possible, only charge the high-volt-

age battery when the charge is below

80%. Charge the high-voltage battery at

the latest when the charge falls below

20%.

Discharged high-voltage battery

The high-voltage electrical system

switches off if the high-voltage battery is

completely discharged. This protects the

high-voltage battery from exhaustive dis-

charge.

Switching the ignition on and then off

can reactivate the high-voltage electrical

system temporarily. The vehicle can then

be parked safely.

Do not leave the vehicle with a discharged

or almost fully discharged high-voltage

battery for longer than 14 days. You can

check the charge status in the charge level

display (Y page 71).

Extreme outside temperatures

The efficiency of the high-voltage battery

is temperature-dependent and is signifi-

cantly reduced at low or high temperatures.

In addition, the electrolytes used may

freeze at very low temperatures.

The LED ring in the power output display

shows the power output available

(Y page 71).

Energy consumption and range

The available energy in the high-voltage

battery is basically reduced by the follow-

ing factors:

low outside temperatures

operating the air-conditioning system or

heating

use of electrical consumers

Leaving the vehicle parked for an extended

period at low outdoor temperatures without

charging it can lead to the following:

high-voltage battery output is signifi-

cantly reduced

charge times can be longer

range can be significantly reduced

In extreme cases, it may not be possible to

start the vehicle as a result. You should

therefore always ensure that the high-volt-

age battery is fully charged or that the

charging cable is connected when parking

the vehicle for an extended period of time

at low outside temperatures.

As the high-voltage battery ages, the capa-

city of the high-voltage battery will dimin-

ish over the battery's lifetime. This means

that the maximum range and the maximum

acceleration are reduced.

Charging the high-voltage battery

>> Driving.

Battery care

Observe the following notes on battery

care:

avoid storing or transporting the vehicle

in high temperatures over a long period

(e.g. container transport).

connect the vehicle to a power supply

when parking it for an extended period of

time.

temperatures below Ò25 † for more than

seven days can cause irreversible dam-

age to the vehicle due to frost damage.

Observe the information on exceptions and

limitations in the warranty documentation

and in the Service Booklet.

Voltage surge protector

Overvoltage in the mains supply can

damage the vehicle. The vehicle is there-

fore equipped with a device which pro-

tects it from overvoltage in the mains

supply. This device may be triggered

during severe thunderstorms, for exam-

ple, and may lead to the building's circuit

breaker being tripped and an interrup-

tion in the power supply. These functions

protect the vehicle. After the building's

circuit breaker is switched on again, the

charging process resumes automatically.

Following an interruption in the power

supply without the building's circuit

breaker being tripped, it may take up to

ten minutes for charging to resume auto-

matically.

After the device has triggered, switch the

building's fuse unit on again. Otherwise,

the charging process will not resume.

Heat generated by the charging cable

and charging cable connector

Charging cables and charging cable con-

nectors may heat up during the charging

process at a power socket.

In the following cases, the degree of heat-

ing is within the permissible limits:

the mains supply and charging cable

infrastructure are intact

the instructions for handling the charg-

ing cable and control panel of the charg-

ing cable are observed

If heating up beyond the permissible limits

occurs, have the mains supply infrastruc-

ture checked.

Disposing of a charging cable

Do not dispose of a charging cable with

household rubbish, give it to a suitable

recycling service. Abide by the potential

legal requirements for recycling.

Understanding the vehicle socket

Vehicle socket overview

DANGER

Connecting the charging cable to the

mains supply via incorrectly installed

mains sockets or by means of adapters,

extension cables or similar could cause a

fire or an electric shock. There is a risk of

fatal injury.

To avoid hazardous situations, observe

the following:

Only connect the charging cable to

mains sockets:

which have been properly installed

and

which have been inspected by a

qualified electrician

For safety reasons, only use the charg-

ing cables supplied with the vehicle, or

charging cables which have been

approved for use with this vehicle.

Never use a damaged charging cable.

Do not use:

extension cables

extension reels

multiple sockets

Charging the high-voltage battery

>> Driving.

Never use socket adapters to connect

the charging cable to the mains socket.

The only exception being if the adapter

has been tested and approved by the

manufacturer for charging the high-

voltage battery of an electric vehicle.

Observe the safety notes in the operat-

ing instructions for the socket adapter.

Charge socket flap

;

Socket cap

Locking mechanism

Indicator lamp

Vehicle socket

Indicator lamp on the vehicle socket

When the indicator lamp on the vehicle

socket lights up, this means the following:

Indicator lamp

Flashes

green

slowly

High-voltage battery is

charging.

Lights up

green

High-voltage battery is

fully charged.

Flashes

orange

slowly

Vehicle waiting for charg-

ing to start.

Indicator lamp

Flashes

orange

Vehicle is paused from

charging.

Flashes red

quickly

A malfunction occurred

during charging.

Charging the battery at a charging

station or wall box

Charging stations without communica-

tions functionality

Charging stations without communications

functionality must be activated before

charging, e.g. by using an RFID card.

Observe the notes provided by the charging

station operator.

Charging stations with communication

capabilities (Plug&Charge)

The "Plug&Charge" function is not available

in all countries.

A suitable electricity contract is required

in order to use "Plug&Charge". To arrange

this, contact the charging station operator.

If the vehicle is connected to a charging

station with communication capabilities,

information and technical parameters are

exchanged so that the charging process can

be started without additional activation.

This function is called "Plug&Charge".

Due to the data transfer, it may take up to

30 seconds after the charging cable is con-

nected before charging begins.

International Standard ISO 15118 is

used for the communication between the

vehicle and the intelligent charging sta-

tion.

Connecting a charging cable

DANGER

Connecting the charging cable to the

wallbox via an incorrectly installed wall-

box or by means of adapters, extension

cables or similar could cause a fire or an

electric shock. There is a risk of fatal

injury.

Charging the high-voltage battery

>> Driving.

To avoid such risks, observe the follow-

ing:

Only connect the charging cable to a

wallbox:

which has been properly installed

and

has been inspected by a qualified

electrician

For safety reasons, only use charging

cables which have been tested and

approved for charging the high-volt-

age battery of an electric vehicle.

Never use damaged charging cables.

Do not connect the charging cable to an

amplifier.

Do not extend the charging cable.

Never use an adapter.

Observe the safety notes in the operat-

ing instructions for the wallbox.

Charge socket flap

;

Socket cap

Locking mechanism

Indicator lamp

Vehicle socket

Wallbox without a pre-installed cable or

charging station: before using the charg-

ing cable for the first time, remove the

adhesive tape which holds the cable

together.

Fully unwind the charging cable before

charging.

Engage transmission position j.

Turn the key to position u in the igni-

tion lock and remove it.

Open socket flap : (Y page 80).

Release locking mechanism = on socket

cap ;.

Socket cap ; opens.

Wallbox without a preinstalled cable:

insert the charging cable connector into

the wallbox socket to the stop.

Insert the charging cable connector into

vehicle socket A to the stop.

The vehicle socket locks audibly.

The high-voltage battery is charged and

indicator lamp ? on the vehicle socket

slowly flashes green.

The high-voltage battery is fully

charged when indicator lamp ? on the

vehicle socket lights up green.

The vehicle must not be moved during

charging. The gear lever cannot be shif-

ted from position j.

Depending on the temperature, the

engine cooling system and battery cool-

ing system may audibly switch on during

the charging process.

Removing the charging cable

The charging cable may be removed when

the charging process has completed or has

been cancelled.

Always disconnect the charging cable

from the vehicle socket first. Disconnect-

ing the charging cable from the station-

ary socket first could damage the charg-

ing cable connector.

Press the % button on the key.

Indicator lamp ? above vehicle socket

A goes out.

Vehicle socket A unlocks audibly.

Disconnect the charging cable within

60 seconds from vehicle socket A. Other-

Charging the high-voltage battery

>> Driving.

wise, the vehicle will relock the vehicle

socket.

The connector locking mechanism on the

charging station is opened.

Close socket cap ;.

Close charge socket flap :.

Wallbox without a pre-mounted cable or

charging station: if necessary, disconnect

the charging cable from the wallbox and

stow it in the charging cable bag

(Y page 85).

Understanding the charging cable for

mains sockets

Useful information

Only use the charging cable to charge

the high-voltage battery. Do not use the

charging cable for other purposes. It may

otherwise be damaged.

If you use the mains socket to charge

the high-voltage battery, the charging

time is longer and the electricity con-

sumption is higher. If possible, charge

the high-voltage battery at a wallbox or

a charging station.

Only use a charging cable which is

approved by smart for this vehicle.

Do not leave the charging cable control

panel hanging loose from a mains socket.

Otherwise, this could lead to a bad contact

with the mains socket and to malfunctions

when charging the vehicle.

Never lift or carry the control panel by the

charging cable connector or the mains plug.

Before charging the high-voltage battery at

a mains socket, check the maximum per-

missible charge current for the relevant

mains socket or the building. The maximum

value of the charge current is set to the

country-specific setting for the supplied

charging cable. When charging abroad, the

maximum value may exceed that of the

country you are in. Observe the regulations

specific to the country you are in if charg-

ing abroad. Consult a qualified specialist

workshop if you have questions about

charge current settings or a malfunction.

Control panel on charging cable

Voltage indicator lamp

;

Charging process indicator lamp

Indicator lamp temperature monitor

Electrical fuse and control system indi-

cator lamp

The indicator lamps on the charging cable

indicate the following:

Indicator lamp :

Lights up

white

Voltage is switched on. The

high-voltage battery can

be charged.

Indicator lamp ;

Flashes

green

High-voltage battery is

charging.

Indicator lamp =

Lights up

red

With flashing green indi-

cator lamp ;: the charg-

ing capacity is reduced as

a result of overheating.

Without flashing green

indicator lamp ;: charg-

ing has stopped as a result

of the charging cable over-

heating.

Flashes red Charging has stopped as a

result of the mains plug

overheating.

Charging the high-voltage battery

>> Driving.

Indicator lamp ?

Flashes red

quickly

An internal malfunction

has occurred. The high-

voltage battery cannot be

charged.

The infrastructure has a

malfunction. The high-

voltage battery cannot be

charged.

If the control element detects a fault cur-

rent or a malfunction, the charging process

is interrupted. The charging process will be

resumed automatically when the malfunc-

tion has been rectified.

Charging the battery using a mains

socket

Connecting a charging cable

Charge socket flap

;

Socket cap

Locking mechanism

Indicator lamp

Vehicle socket

Fully unwind the charging cable before

charging.

Engage transmission position j.

Turn the key to position u in the igni-

tion lock and remove it.

Open socket flap : (Y page 80).

Release locking mechanism = on socket

cap ;.

Socket cap ; opens.

Insert the mains plug into the mains

socket to the stop.

Insert the charging cable connector into

vehicle socket A to the stop.

The vehicle socket locks audibly.

The high-voltage battery is charged and

indicator lamp ? on the vehicle socket

slowly flashes green.

The high-voltage battery is fully

charged when indicator lamp ? on the

vehicle socket lights up green perma-

nently.

The vehicle must not be moved during

charging. The gear lever cannot be shif-

ted from position j.

Depending on the temperature, the

engine cooling system and battery cool-

ing system may audibly switch on during

the charging process.

Removing the charging cable

Always disconnect the charging cable

from the vehicle socket first. Disconnect-

ing the charging cable from the station-

ary socket first could damage the charg-

ing cable connector.

The charging cable may be removed when

the charging process has completed or has

been cancelled.

Press the % button on the key.

Indicator lamp ? above vehicle socket

A goes out. Vehicle socket A unlocks

audibly.

Disconnect the charging cable within

60 seconds from vehicle socket A. Other-

wise, the vehicle will relock the vehicle

socket.

Close socket cap ;.

Close charge socket flap :.

Remove the charging cable from the

mains socket.

Stow the charging cable safely in the

charging cable bag (Y page 85).

Charging the high-voltage battery

>> Driving.

Storing the charging cable

The charging cable must be stowed in

the charging cable bag only to prevent it

from being thrown around inside the

vehicle.

Stow the charging cable in the charging

cable bag.

The charging cable bag is located in the

boot (Y page 153).

Charging the high-voltage battery

>> Driving.

Switching on the lighting

Useful information

The driver must ensure that the light set-

tings match the current weather, light and

traffic conditions.

For reasons of safety, smart recommends

that you drive with the daytime driving

lights or dipped-beam headlamps switched

on even during the daytime.

A warning tone sounds if the lights are still

on when you leave the vehicle.

In some countries, operation of the head-

lamps varies due to legal requirements and

non-compulsory stipulations.

Combination switch control

;

Marking

Activating automatic headlamp mode

WARNING

When the light switch is set to Ã, the

dipped-beam headlamps may not be

switched on automatically if there is fog,

snow or other causes of poor visibility

due to the weather conditions such as

spray. There is a risk of an accident.

In such situations, turn the light switch

to L.

While the engine is running, the light set-

ting is selected automatically according to

the brightness of the ambient light. Ã

controls the daytime driving lights, side

lamps and dipped-beam headlamps. The

automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.

The driver is responsible for the vehicle's

lighting at all times.

Turn combination switch control : to

the Ã position.

When one or more of the following occurs,

the lights are switched off automatically:

the engine is switched off

the driver's door is opened

the vehicle is locked

the main-beam headlamps are not

switched on when the vehicle is station-

ary

Switching on the dipped-beam head-

lamps

Turn combination switch control : to

the L position.

The L indicator lamp lights up in the

instrument cluster.

Switching the main-beam headlamps

on or off

The engine must be running.

Turn the combination switch control to

the Ã or K position.

To switch on: press the combination

switch in the direction of arrow 1.

To switch off: move the combination

switch back to its normal position.

The K indicator lamp in the instrument

cluster lights up when the main-beam

headlamps are switched on.

Switching on the lighting

>> Ensuring good visibility.

Using the headlamp flasher

Pull the combination switch in the direc-

tion of arrow 2.

Switching on the side lamps

Turn combination switch control : to

the T position.

Switching the foglamps and rear fog-

lamp on and off

Only vehicles with front foglamps have the

"Foglamps" function.

Combination switch middle ring

;

Marking

Switch on the ignition and either the side

lamps or the dipped-beam headlamps in

order to switch on the foglamps.

Start the engine and switch on either the

side lamps or dipped-beam headlamps in

order to switch on the rear foglamps.

To switch on or off manually: turn combi-

nation switch middle ring : to the

desired marking:

O Foglamps

R Rear foglamps

After releasing, the combination switch

middle ring returns automatically to the

neutral position.

The foglamps and rear foglamps also switch

off automatically in the following situa-

tions:

the lights are switched off

the engine is switched off and the control

is in the Ã position

Using the cornering light function

Only vehicles with the LED & Sensor pack-

age are equipped with the "Cornering light

function".

The cornering light function uses the front

foglamps to improve the illumination of the

road in the direction in which you are turn-

ing, enabling better visibility in tight

bends, for example.

The following conditions must be fulfilled

for the cornering light function to switch

on automatically:

the dipped-beam headlamps are

switched on

the vehicle is moving at less than

40 km/h

the turn signal indicator is switched on

or the steering wheel is turned

Adjusting the lighting

Adjusting the headlamp range

The vehicle load can affect the headlamp

range. This can impair visibility, and the

headlamps can dazzle oncoming traffic.

The ignition must be switched on in order

to set the headlamp range.

Turn headlamp range adjuster : to the

position which corresponds to the load in

your vehicle.

Positions for the vehicle load:

g: Driver's seat occupied or driver's seat

and front-passenger seat occupied

1: Other loading

Adjusting the lighting

>> Ensuring good visibility.

Adjusting the dipped-beam head-

lamps to left-hand or right-hand

traffic

The symmetrical dipped-beam headlamps

are required when travelling in countries

where vehicles are driven on the opposite

side of the road to that in which the vehicle

is registered. Unlike the asymmetrical

dipped-beam headlamps, these headlamps

do not dazzle oncoming traffic. Symmetrical

dipped-beam headlamps provide less illu-

mination to the edge of the carriageway.

Open the service cover.

For symmetrical dipped beam: turn the

screws of both headlamps as far as they

will go to position ±.

For asymmetrical dipped beam: turn the

screws of both headlamps as far as they

will go to position q.

Have the dipped-beam headlamp setting

checked at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

Using the interior lighting

Switching the interior lighting on and

off

The interior lighting goes on when you

unlock the doors.

The interior lighting switches off in the fol-

lowing situations:

A door is opened and 15 minutes have

passed.

All doors are closed, the vehicle has been

locked and 15 seconds have passed.

All doors are closed, the vehicle has not

been locked and 4 minutes have passed.

The engine has been started.

The interior lighting can be activated when

a door is open. After closing the doors, the

interior lighting goes out.

Press switch : to switch the left-hand

reading lamp on and off.

Move switch ; to the desired position.

The following settings can be selected:

Interior lighting is switched on.

Interior lighting controlled automati-

cally.

Interior lighting is switched off.

Press switch = to switch the right-hand

reading lamp on and off.

Adjusting the ambient lighting (colour

display)

On-board computer with colour display: the

ambient lighting is set in the on-board

computer (Y page 111).

Using the windscreen wipers

Switching on the windscreen wipers

Please note

Do not operate the windscreen wipers

when the windscreen is dry, as this could

damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust

that has collected on the windscreen can

scratch the glass if wiping takes place

when the windscreen is dry.

Using the windscreen wipers

>> Ensuring good visibility.

If it is necessary to switch on the wind-

screen wipers in dry weather conditions,

always operate them using washer fluid.

Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the wind-

screen becomes dirty in dry weather con-

ditions, the windscreen wipers may be

activated inadvertently. This could dam-

age the windscreen wiper blades or

scratch the windscreen.

For this reason, you should always

switch off the windscreen wipers in dry

weather.

Make sure that the windscreen wipers

are free of ice. Otherwise the wiper motor

may overheat.

Wiper blades are subject to wear and tear.

smart recommends replacing the wiper

blades twice a year. Worn or damaged

windscreen wiper blades cause smearing on

the windscreen. On vehicles with a rain

sensor, malfunctions may occur as a result

of this.

Switching continuous wipe on and off

Control for wipe frequency

Continuous wipe, off

Automatic wipe

Continuous wipe, slow

Continuous wipe, fast

Wiping with washer fluid

To operate the windscreen wipers, the igni-

tion must be switched on.

Press the combination switch down or up

to the desired position.

Automatic wiping (vehicles with rain

sensor)

The rain sensor is only an aid. The driver is

responsible for ensuring unimpaired vision.

Press the combination switch to the Ã

position. In automatic wiping mode, the

appropriate wipe frequency is set

according to the intensity of the rain.

Use control : to set the wipe frequency.

Switching on intermittent wiping

Press the combination switch to the Ã

position.

Use control : to set the wipe frequency.

Wiping with washer fluid

Pull the combination switch in the direc-

tion of arrow î.

Switching the rear window wiper

on/off (smart EQ fortwo)

To operate the rear window wiper, the igni-

tion must be switched on.

Turn the outer control on the combina-

tion switch to the desired position:

The following settings can be selected:

g Rear window wiper, off

è Rear window wiper, on

î Wipes with washer fluid

Using the windscreen wipers

>> Ensuring good visibility.

Switching the rear window wiper

on/off when in reverse gear (smart EQ

fortwo)

You can switch the "Automatic rear window

wiper when reversing" setting on or off in

the smart Media-System. The rear window

wiper is automatically activated for a short

while when the ignition is switched on, the

window wipers are switched on and reverse

gear is engaged.

In the smart Media-System, select Vehi‐

cle > Settings > Auto rear wipe with

reverse gear.

The selected setting is highlighted.

Confirm the setting with Done.

Folding the sun visor to the side

Mirror cover

;

Bracket

Retaining strap

Vanity mirror

Fold the sun visor down.

Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;.

Fold the sun visor to one side

Folding the sun visor to the side

>> Ensuring good visibility.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle

from the inside

Using the door handle to unlock the

door

Pull door handle :.

If the vehicle has previously been locked

with the key, opening a door from the

inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm

system. To disable the alarm, switch on the

ignition.

Centrally locking and unlocking the

vehicle from the inside

WARNING

If children are left unsupervised in the

vehicle, they can:

open doors and endanger other persons

or road users

climb out and be injured by the traffic

operate vehicle equipment and, for

example, trap themselves.

Children could also set the vehicle in

motion, for example by:

releasing the parking brake

shifting the automatic transmission

out of park position P

starting the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take

the key with you and lock the vehicle.

Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach

of children.

To lock: press button :.

When the doors are locked, indicator

lamp ; lights up.

To unlock: press button :.

Activating/deactivating the automatic

locking feature

The activated automatic locking feature

locks the vehicle automatically when the

ignition is switched on and the vehicle is

moving.

When the engine is running, press and

hold button : for 5 seconds until a tone

sounds.

Repeat the procedure to deactivate the

automatic locking feature.

When the automatic locking feature is

activated, the locking mechanism

engages audibly when you pull away.

When the automatic locking feature is

deactivated, no sound occurs.

Activating the double-lock function

For United Kingdom only: the double-lock

function prevents the doors from being

opened from the inside.

WARNING

When the double locks are activated, the

doors can no longer be opened from the

inside. People in the vehicle can no lon-

ger get out, e.g. in hazardous situations.

There is a risk of injury.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside

>> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

Therefore, do not leave any people unsu-

pervised in the vehicle, particularly chil-

dren, elderly people or people in need of

special assistance. Do not activate the

double lock when people are in the vehi-

cle.

WARNING

If persons (particularly children) are

exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged

period, there is a risk of serious or even

fatal injuries. Never leave persons (par-

ticularly children) unattended in the

vehicle.

Press button : twice.

The double-lock function is enabled.

Understanding the reversing function

Vehicles with automatic operation: the side

windows are equipped with an automatic

reversing function. If a solid object blocks

or restricts a side window from closing dur-

ing automatic operation, the side window

opens again automatically. During the

manual closing process, the side window

only opens again automatically after the

corresponding switch is released. The auto-

matic reversing function is only an aid. The

driver is responsible for operating the side

windows safely.

WARNING

The reversing feature does not react:

to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin-

gers

while adjusting

This means that the reversing feature

cannot prevent someone being trapped in

these situations. There is a risk of injury.

When closing, make sure that no body

parts are in the closing area. If someone

becomes trapped, press the W button

to open the side window again.

Opening and closing the windows

Please note

WARNING

While closing the side windows, body

parts in the closing area could become

trapped. There is a risk of injury.

When closing make sure that no parts of

the body are in the closing area. If some-

body becomes trapped, release the switch

or press the switch to open the side win-

dow again.

WARNING

Children could become trapped if they

operate the side windows, particularly

when unattended. There is a risk of

injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take

the key with you and lock the vehicle.

Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

WARNING

If you close a side window again immedi-

ately after it has been blocked or reset,

the side window closes with increased or

maximum force. The reversing function is

then not active. Parts of the body could

be trapped in the closing area in the

process. This poses an increased risk of

injury or even fatal injury.

Make sure that no parts of the body are in

the closing area. To stop the closing

process, release the switch or push the

switch again to reopen the side window.

Vehicles with automatic operation: the

switches for both side windows are located

on the driver's door. There is also a switch

for the front-passenger window on the

front-passenger door. The switch on the

driver’s door takes precedence.

Opening and closing the windows

>> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

Opening and closing the windows

Vehicles with automatic operation

Left side window

;

Right side window

Vehicles without automatic operation

To open: press the switch.

To close: pull the switch.

Opening and closing windows fully in

automatic mode

Vehicles with automatic operation:

To open the windows fully, press the

switch beyond the point of resistance

and release it.

To close the windows fully, pull the

switch beyond the point of resistance

and release it.

To stop automatic operation, press the

switch again.

Using the soft top (smart EQ fortwo

cabrio)

Please note

WARNING

During opening and closing of the folding

top or rear soft top, body parts may

become trapped for example, by the roof

mechanical system. There is a risk of

injury.

Ensure that no parts of the body are in

the immediate vicinity of moving parts

during the closing or opening process.

Release the switch immediately if some-

body becomes trapped.

If you are transporting long objects in

the vehicle interior, you must make sure

that the objects do not press against the

folding top when the folding top is

closed.

When transporting objects which pro-

trude at the rear, make sure that they do

not lie on the rear soft top fasteners

(brackets). When loading the vehicle,

make sure that no sharp-edged parts

come into contact with the soft top or the

rear window.

Do not place any flat loads weighing over

75 kg on the rear soft top when it has

been lowered.

Make sure that the additional brake light

is not covered.

Make sure that the lock openings of the

soft-top system are not blocked. Stow the

side spars only in the intended stowage

compartment in the tailgate.

Make sure that objects in the luggage

compartment are not stacked too high.

They could otherwise be damaged when

the rear soft top is opened or closed.

The procedure for removing, fitting and

stowing the side bars is described below.

The QR code is a link to a video clip that

demonstrates the procedure.

Using the soft top (smart EQ fortwo cabrio)

>> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

Opening and closing the soft top

To open or close the soft top, the ignition

must be switched on.

To open: press the switch to position ;

until the soft top is in the desired posi-

tion.

Press switch ; again to fully open the

soft top.

To close: press the switch to position :

until the soft top is in the desired posi-

tion.

It is possible to open or close the soft top

while driving up to the maximum design

speed. In poor weather and at high speeds,

it is possible that electric locking when

closing is not reliable. If this is the case

you must reduce the speed and, if neces-

sary, press the switch again to close the

soft top.

Opening the soft top (using the key)

Press and hold the é button on the

key.

Removing the side bars

Open the soft top.

Open the doors and tailgate.

To release: slide lever : back.

The side bar is unlocked.

Push lever : back again and remove side

bars ;.

Stowing the side bars

WARNING

If you transport the side bars without

securing them, they may be thrown

around in the event of an accident, brak-

ing or sudden changes in direction. There

is a risk of injury.

Always stow the side bars in the designa-

ted stowage well and close the stowage

well lid.

When the rear soft top is lowered, the

side support beams could be stolen.

Therefore, remove the side support beams

and stow them in the luggage compart-

ment or close the soft top.

If you load the stowage space it could

be damaged.

Never stow heavy objects on the stowage

space or sit on it.

Please note:

only use the stowage space to store the

side bars

always place both side bars in the stow-

age space

Using the soft top (smart EQ fortwo cabrio)

>> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

Observe the notice on the stowage space.

Release fastening straps : on the stow-

age space and guide the locking mecha-

nism with your hand until the fastening

straps are released.

Open cover ;.

Store the side bars as shown.

Observe markings l and k on the side

bars and the stowage compartment for

the left and right side bars.

Side bar, front left

;

Side bar, rear left

Side bar, front right

Side bar, rear right

Close the cover.

The cover must audibly engage.

Secure both fastening straps with ten-

sioner : on rear detent ;.

The red surfaces at the side must no lon-

ger be visible. An audible click can be

heard upon engaging.

Close the tailgate.

If the tailgate does not close properly,

check if the side bars have been stored as

specified.

Fitting the side bars

WARNING

If the side bars are incorrectly mounted

they may become loose during the jour-

ney and endanger other road users. There

is a risk of accident and injury.

Mount the side bars as described.

Open the doors and tailgate.

Release the fastening straps on the stow-

age space and guide the locking mecha-

nism with your hand until the fastening

straps are released.

Open the cover.

Remove the side bars.

Using the soft top (smart EQ fortwo cabrio)

>> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

Insert the side bar from the stowage com-

partment marked L on the left side at the

front end :.

Press down rear end of side bar ; until

it engages twice.

Fit the side bar from the stowage com-

partment marked R on the right-hand

side.

Closing the stowage space without the

side bars

Move folding mechanism : in the direc-

tion of the arrow.

Close cover ;.

Secure both fastening straps with ten-

sioner : on front detent ;.

The red surfaces at the side must no lon-

ger be visible. An audible click can be

heard upon engaging.

Close the tailgate.

Fitting and removing the draught stop

(smart EQ fortwo cabrio)

Fitting the draught stop

Open the soft top completely.

Attach recesses : of draught stop = on

to hooks ; on the roll bar.

Attach loops A on to hooks ? in the side

panelling.

Removing the draught stop

Unhook loops A from hooks ? in the

side panelling.

Unhook recesses : from hooks ; on the

roll bar.

Operating the climate control system

Useful information

The climate control system is only availa-

ble when the ignition is switched on.

Operating the climate control system

>> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

If the climate control system is deactivated,

the air supply and circulation are switched

off. The windows could mist up. You should

therefore switch off the climate control

system for brief periods only.

In air-recirculation mode, only the air

inside the vehicle is recirculated and no

fresh air is introduced. This is useful in a

tunnel or when there are unpleasant odours

outside the vehicle. In air-recirculation

mode, the windows may mist up more

quickly, particularly when the outside tem-

perature is low. Therefore, switch on air-

recirculation mode only briefly.

smart EQ fortwo cabrio: when the soft top is

open, the climate control system is always

deactivated. When the temperature is set to

maximum cooling, the climate control sys-

tem remains activated.

The integrated filter in the climate control

system keeps out most particles of dust as

well as pollen. The filter reduces the

amount of air supplied to the vehicle inte-

rior. For this reason, always observe the

interval for replacing the filter.

Operating the automatic climate con-

trol system

Switching the automatic climate control

system on/off

The ignition must be switched on in order

to operate the blower. The engine must be

running in order to operate all the func-

tions of the automatic climate control sys-

tem.

To switch on: press the Ã button.

The indicator lamps below Ã and

¿ light up.

To switch off: press the ^ button.

The indicator lamp below ^ lights up.

Setting the temperature

Move the slider in small increments to

the left or right.

In automatic mode, the set temperature is

maintained at a constant level. The air dis-

tribution and blower speed are regulated

automatically.

Setting and switching the air distribu-

tion off

Press one or more of the buttons.

The following options can be selected:

¯ Demister vents

P Centre and side air vents

O Footwell vents

Increasing the blower speed

Press the K button.

Decreasing the blower speed

Press the I button.

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off

Press the À button.

The indicator lamp above À lights up

when air-recirculation mode is activated.

Switching "Cooling with air dehumidifi-

cation" on or off

The "Cooling with air dehumidification"

function cools and dehumidifies the air

inside the vehicle during warm weather.

The engine must be running in order to use

"Cooling with air dehumidification".

To switch on: press the K and

¿ button.

The indicator lamp below ¿ lights up

when the function is activated.

Operating the climate control system

>> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

In damp weather, only switch off the "Cool-

ing with air dehumidification" function

briefly. Otherwise the windows can mist up

more quickly.

Demisting the windscreen

Press the ¬ button.

The indicator lamp above ¬ lights up

when the windscreen is being demisted.

Use this setting only until the windscreen

is clear again.

Demisting the rear window

When the rear window heating is activated,

the exterior mirrors are also heated.

Press the ¤ button.

The indicator lamp above ¤ lights up

when the rear window heating is activa-

ted.

Use this setting only until the rear window

is clear again.

Drying windows that are misted up on

the inside

Press the ¿ button.

Press the Ã button.

If the windows are still misted up, press

the ¬ button.

Use this setting only until the windows are

clear again.

Drying windows that are misted up on

the outside

Switch on the windscreen wipers.

Press the ¬ button.

Use this setting only until the windows are

clear again.

Setting the pre-entry climate control at

departure time using the on-board

computer

Only for instrument cluster with colour dis-

play:

The "Pre-entry climate control at departure

time" function heats or cools the vehicle

interior before the scheduled departure

time. The climate control runs until approx.

10 minutes after the set departure time.

The vehicle must be connected to the

charger in order to activate pre-entry cli-

mate control. The battery charge status and

the charge output of the high-voltage bat-

tery must be sufficient.

If pre-entry climate control cannot be

operated, a display message is shown in the

on-board computer.

Call up Pre-heat/cool and charge in

the on-board computer.

Press a.

Select the setting.

The following settings can be selected:

No pre-selection

The pre-entry climate control is deac-

tivated.

Two stored departure times

Select Departure time > Activate to acti-

vate the stored departure time. If Smart-

Charging was selected before, this set-

ting is also activated.

Select Departure time > Change to change

the settings of a stored departure time.

Set the value.

Select Smart-Charging or instant

charging.

A display message is shown with the

selected settings.

If Smart-Charging is selected, the high-

voltage battery charges at minimum cost

while also conserving battery life.

Depending on the set departure time,

charging of the high-voltage battery may

not start immediately or may be inter-

rupted during the charging process.

The charging station must support the

transmission of tariff information in

order for the optimised charging process

with Smart-Charging to be possible. If

the charging station does not provide

tariff information, set the preferred

charging times on the "smart control"

website.

If instant charging is selected, the

high-voltage battery is charged regard-

less of the cost information. A part of the

charging may not be conducted until one

to two hours before the departure time in

Operating the climate control system

>> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

order for temperature control of the

high-voltage battery to be carried out for

the intended departure time.

Activating immediate pre-entry climate

control using the smart control app

Pre-entry climate control can be activated

immediately using the smart control app.

The vehicle's charge status must be at least

30%.

Climate control is started immediately and

limited to five minutes.

The procedure cannot be cancelled, but may

be carried out several times.

Adjusting the air vents

Please note

WARNING

Very hot or very cold air can flow from

the air vents. This could result in burns

or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of

the air vents. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that all vehicle occupants

always maintain a sufficient distance to

the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the

airflow to another area of the vehicle

interior.

WARNING

If you pour cleaning fluid or disinfectant

into the vehicle's ventilation system, it

may ignite. There is a risk of fire.

Never spray these or other agents into

the ventilation system. Always have work

on the ventilation system carried out at a

qualified specialist workshop.

Keep the following rules in mind for optimal

climate control:

Keep the air slots between the service

cover and windscreen clear of blockages.

Do not cover the vents or ventilation

grilles in the vehicle interior.

Open the air vents fully.

Opening and closing the air vents

To open 1: turn the vent outwards.

To close 2: turn the vent inwards.

Directing the air vents

Turn the air vents upwards, downwards,

to the left or to the right as desired.

Activating/deactivating the seat

heating and steering wheel heating

WARNING

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating

can cause the seat cushion, the backrest

pad and parts of the steering wheel to

become very hot. The health of persons

with limited temperature sensitivity or a

limited ability to react to higher temper-

atures may be affected or they may even

suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk

of injury.

Therefore, do not switch the seat heating

on repeatedly.

When the seat heating is switched on,

the seat surface can be damaged as a

result of objects being placed on the

seats, for example, seat cushions, child

seats and protective covers not approved

by Mercedes-Benz.

Ensure that there are no objects on the

seat surface when the seat heating is

switched on.

Activating/deactivating the seat heating and steering wheel heating

>> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

The seat heating only works when the igni-

tion is switched on. Vehicles with the Win-

ter package are additionally equipped with

"Steering wheel heating" function :.

Press button =.

Indicator lamp ; lights up when seat

heating is activated.

Vehicles with the Winter package: steer-

ing wheel heating : is also switched on

when the driver's seat heating is activa-

ted.

Using the accessories

Using the cigarette lighter

WARNING

You can burn yourself if you touch the

hot heating element or the socket of the

cigarette lighter.

In addition, flammable materials can

ignite if:

the hot cigarette lighter falls

a child holds the hot cigarette lighter

to objects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.

Always hold the cigarette lighter by the

knob. Always make sure that the ciga-

rette lighter is out of reach of children.

Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

The cigarette lighter only works when the

ignition is switched on.

Press cigarette lighter :.

When cigarette lighter : is hot, it pops

up automatically.

Using the ashtray

The cup holder in the centre console is

not heat resistant. Before placing lit cig-

arettes in the ashtray, make sure that the

ashtray is fully inserted in the cup

holder. Make sure that lit cigarettes do

not fall into the cup holder.

Otherwise, the cup holder could be dam-

aged.

To open: lift up cover :.

To close: push down cover :.

To remove: pull the ashtray up and out.

To insert: insert the ashtray into the cup

holder.

100

Using the accessories

>> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

Using the 12 V socket

Turn the key to position 1 in the igni-

tion lock.

Lift up the cover of socket :.

Connect the device.

The socket can be used for accessories up to

a maximum draw of 120 W (15 A).

If you use the socket for very long periods

when the engine is switched off, the 12 V

battery may discharge.

Fitting and removing the floor mats

WARNING

Objects in the driver's footwell may

restrict the clearance around the pedals

or block a depressed pedal. This jeopard-

ises the operating and road safety of the

vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so

that they do not get into the driver's

footwell. Always fit the floormats

securely and as prescribed in order to

ensure that there is always sufficient

room for the pedals. Do not use loose

floormats and do not place several floor-

mats on top of one another.

Slide the driver's seat backwards.

To install: press securing knobs : onto

retainers ;.

To remove: release securing knobs :

from retainers ;.

Using the accessories

101

>> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

Parking

Please note

WARNING

When the engine is switched off, the

automatic transmission shifts into neu-

tral position N. The vehicle may roll

away. There is a risk of an accident.

Always shift to parking position P before

switching off the engine. Secure the

parked vehicle against rolling away by

applying the parking brake.

Always secure the vehicle correctly

against rolling away. Otherwise, the

vehicle or its drivetrain could be dam-

aged.

Parking the vehicle

Apply the parking brake.

Shift the transmission to position j.

Turn the key to position u in the igni-

tion lock and remove it.

On steep uphill or downhill gradients,

turn the front wheels towards the kerb.

Lock the vehicle.

Using the parking aid

Useful information

Pay attention to people and obstacles

when manoeuvring or parking the car.

The driver is responsible in these situa-

tions.

The electronic parking aid gives an acous-

tic indication of the distance between the

vehicle and an obstacle behind it.

The parking aid uses three sensors : in

the rear bumper to monitor the area around

the vehicle.

The parking aid measures the distance

between the vehicle and an obstacle. If the

proximity to the object behind the vehicle

is less than 1.20 m, a short signal is issued.

If the object is less than 30 cm away, a con-

tinuous warning tone is issued.

The parking aid might not function cor-

rectly under the following circumstances:

the vehicle is on uneven terrain

if there are obstacles below or above the

sensor detection range

the vehicle is on snow or near objects

that absorb ultrasonic waves

the vehicle is near strong ultrasonic

sources, such as pneumatic hammers

If you engage reverse gear while the engine

is running, the parking aid is activated.

Activating and deactivating the park-

ing aid

The parking aid is automatically activated

when you start the engine.

102

Using the parking aid

>> Parking and getting out.

Press the c switch.

When the parking aid is deactivated, the

LED on the c switch lights up.

Using the reversing camera

Please note

The reversing camera is only an aid. It is

not a substitute for your attention to the

immediate surroundings. The responsibil-

ity for safe manoeuvring and parking

remains with you. Make sure that there are

no persons, animals or objects etc., in the

manoeuvring area while manoeuvring or

parking.

If the rear of your vehicle is damaged,

consult a qualified specialist workshop

and have the reversing camera checked.

Objects that are not at ground level

appear further away than they actually

are, for example:

the bumper of the vehicle parked

behind

the drawbar of a trailer

the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch

the tail-end of a lorry

slanted posts

Only use the image from the reversing

camera as a guide. You may otherwise

damage your vehicle and/or the object.

Understanding the reversing camera

functions

Pay attention to people and obstacles

when manoeuvring or parking the car.

The driver is responsible in these situa-

tions.

If the rear of your vehicle is damaged,

consult a qualified specialist workshop

and have the reversing camera checked.

The reversing camera is a visual parking

and manoeuvring aid. It shows the area

behind your vehicle with guide lines in the

smart Media-System display.

Reversing camera : is located above the

licence plate in the tailgate.

The area behind the vehicle is displayed as

a mirror image in the smart Media-System

display.

The reversing camera may show a distorted

view of obstacles or show them incorrectly

or not at all if:

the obstacle is very close to the rear

bumper

the obstacle is underneath the rear

bumper

the obstacle is close to the tailgate han-

dle

the reversing camera is covered by addi-

tional accessories, e.g. a bicycle rack

the reversing camera function is

impaired due to pixel errors

The function of the reversing camera is

limited:

if the tailgate is open

if there is heavy rain, snowfall or fog

if the light conditions are too dark or too

bright

if there is fluorescent light shining, e.g.

under fluorescent lamps or LED lighting

if the outside temperature changes

quickly

if the camera lens is dirty, obstructed or

misted up(Y page 168)

if the camera or the rear of your vehicle

is damaged

The display contrast may be impaired

due to incident sunlight or other light

sources, e.g. if the vehicle is being driven

out of a garage. In this case, pay special

attention.

Using the reversing camera

103

>> Parking and getting out.

The use of the display can be consider-

ably restricted due to pixel errors, for

example. In this case have the display

repaired or replaced.

Guide lines in the display

Useful information

Objects that are not at ground level

appear further away than they actually

are, for example:

the bumper of the vehicle parked

behind

the drawbar of a trailer

the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch

the tail-end of a lorry

slanted posts

Only use the image from the reversing

camera as a guide. You may otherwise

damage your vehicle and/or the object.

Guide lines in different colours show the

distance of obstacles from the rear of the

vehicle. Static guide lines do not change

when the steering wheel is turned. Dynamic

guide lines change depending on the posi-

tion of the steering wheel.

Static: vehicle width including exterior

mirrors

;

Green, static: approx. 1.50 m

Yellow, static: approx. 0.7 m

Red, static: approx. 0.3 m

Blue, dynamic: vehicle width including

exterior mirrors

The distance specifications only apply to

objects that are at ground level.

Switching on the reversing camera

The ignition must be switched on to use the

reversing camera.

In the smart Media-System, select Vehi‐

cle > Settings > Rear view camera >

Rear camera view settings > Rear cam‐

era view.

Confirm with Done.

Engage reverse gear.

The area behind the vehicle is shown

with guide lines in the smart Media-Sys-

tem display.

Switching off the reversing camera

The reversing camera switches off after

driving forwards briefly.

Adjusting the reversing camera set-

tings

In the smart Media-System, select Vehi‐

cle > Settings > Rear view camera >

Rear camera view settings.

The following settings can be selected:

Switch Rear camera view on or off.

Switch Static guidelines on or off.

Switch Dynamic guidelines on or off.

Select desired settings.

Confirm with Done.

Adjusting reversing camera display

settings

In the smart Media-System, select Vehi‐

cle > Settings > Rear view camera >

Image settings.

Adjust the values for Brightness, Satu‐

ration and Contrast.

Confirm the display settings with Done.

104

Using the reversing camera

>> Parking and getting out.

Locking the vehicle

WARNING

If children are left unsupervised in the

vehicle, they could:

open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users

get out and be struck by oncoming

traffic

operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example

In addition, the children could also set

the vehicle in motion by, for example:

releasing the parking brake

shifting the transmission out of park

position P

starting the vehicle's drive system

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take

the key with you and lock the vehicle.

Never leave children and animals unat-

tended in the vehicle. Keep the keys out

of the reach of children.

Press the & button on the key.

The turn signals flash twice.

Priming and deactivating the anti-

theft alarm system

Useful information

The immobiliser prevents the vehicle from

being started without the correct key. It is

switched on and off automatically.

The anti-theft alarm system triggers a vis-

ual and audible alarm if a door, the tailgate

or the service cover is opened.

The alarm is not switched off, even if, for

example, you close the open door that has

triggered it.

Priming

Close the doors.

Close the tailgate.

Close the service cover.

Press the & button on the key. The

alarm system is primed after approx-

imately 30 seconds.

Deactivating and switching off the

alarm

Press the % button on the key.

Priming and deactivating the anti-theft alarm system

105

>> Parking and getting out.

Overview of the on-board computer

Please note

WARNING

If you operate information and communi-

cation equipment integrated in the vehi-

cle when driving, you could be distracted

from the traffic situation. This could also

cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

There is a risk of an accident.

Only operate this equipment when the

traffic situation permits. If you cannot be

sure of this, stop the vehicle paying

attention to road and traffic conditions

and operate the equipment with the vehi-

cle stationary.

WARNING

If the instrument cluster has failed or

malfunctioned, you may not recognise

function restrictions relevant to safety.

The operating safety of your vehicle may

be impaired. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle

checked at a qualified specialist work-

shop immediately.

If the operating safety of your vehicle is

impaired, you must park the vehicle safely

as soon as possible. Consult a qualified

specialist workshop.

Display messages and displays in the

instrument cluster are only shown for cer-

tain systems. Vehicle owners and drivers

are responsible for ensuring that the vehi-

cle is operating safely. A vehicle which is

not operating safely can cause an accident.

The display shows the outside temperature

on the far right in the header. Drivers must

pay special attention to road conditions

when temperatures are around freezing

point. Changes in the outside temperature

are displayed after a short delay.

After opening the door, the on-board com-

puter is activated for approximately

15 minutes. To permanently activate the

on-board computer, the ignition must be

switched on.

Monochrome display overview

Time

;

Transmission display

Lane Keeping Assist indicator lamp

Outside temperature display and black

ice warning Ò

Trip meter, remaining range, service

display

Tyre pressure monitor

eco score display

Brake light failure warning lamp

Total distance recorder

Cruise control, limiter

Colour display overview

Time

;

Lane Keeping Assist indicator lamp

Digital speedometer

Outside temperature display with black

ice warning Ò

Display field for display messages,

menus and lists

Remaining range

ECO mode, radar-based recuperation

106

Overview of the on-board computer

>> Operating the on-board computer.

Transmission display

Cruise control, limiter

Calling up displays

Calling up displays (monochrome dis-

play)

Monochrome display

;

Buttons on the multifunction lever

To scroll forward at menu level, briefly

press the ´ button on multifunction

lever.

To directly call up the trip meter, press

and hold the ´ button on multifunc-

tion lever.

Press and hold a on the multifunction

lever to reset the values.

The following displays can be called up one

after another:

trip meter

remaining range

service due date

setting the time

activating/deactivating Active Brake

Assist

restarting the tyre pressure monitor

Calling up displays (colour display)

Calling up displays

Colour display

;

Left control panel

Briefly press 9 or : on left control

panel ;, to scroll forwards or backwards.

Press and hold 9 or : on left con-

trol panel ;, to directly call up the Dis‐

tance display.

The following displays can be called up one

after another:

Distance

Trip computer from start

Trip computer from reset

eco score from start

Energy consumption bar chart

Energy flow

Pre-heat/cool and charge

Messages and service

Settings

Digital speedometer

Calling up displays

107

>> Operating the on-board computer.

Distance display

Trip meter

;

Total distance recorder

Trip computer display

Elapsed time

;

Distance

Average speed

Average energy consumption

The data in the from start menu refers to

the start of the journey, whilst the data in

the from reset menu refers to the last time

the submenu was reset.

If the ignition remains switched off for lon-

ger than four hours, the from start values

in the instrument cluster are reset. The eco

score display is also reset automatically.

eco score display

The eco score display provides feedback on

how economical the driver's driving behav-

iour is (Y page 72).

If the ignition remains switched off for lon-

ger than four hours, the eco score display

will be automatically reset.

When the eco score display is reset, the

from start trip computer in the smart

Media-System and the eco score display are

also reset in the smart Media-System.

Energy consumption bar chart display

Energy consumption

;

Recuperation

The display shows the average energy con-

sumption and recuperation over the previ-

ous 15 minutes.

Energy flow display

Total output

;

Output for electrical consumers

The total output shows the driver the sum

of the energy currently flowing from the

battery. The colour of the battery shows

whether energy is being consumed or recu-

perated:

Battery symbol is orange: energy is being

consumed.

Battery symbol is green: energy is being

recuperated.

Battery symbol is grey: energy consump-

tion and recuperation are equal or both

at 0 kW.

The output for electrical consumers shows

the driver what output is needed to operate

electrical consumers, e.g. climate control

systems or the radio. If the value is kept as

low as possible, a greater range is achieved.

108

Calling up displays

>> Operating the on-board computer.

Pre-entry climate control and charging

display

Time of the full charge

;

Charge status of the battery

Departure time

Smart-Charging

Charge current and charge output

An arrow underneath the battery indicates

the charge status of the battery at the

departure time. The charge status and the

time of complete charge are only predicted

approximately. The time of complete charge

cannot be displayed when Smart-Charging

has been activated.

Information on the "Pre-entry climate con-

trol at departure time" function (Y page 98).

Messages and service display

Message memory

;

Next service due date

The display shows the number of display

messages in the message memory and the

next service due date.

¯ indicates a minor service. ° indi-

cates a major service.

To show the display messages, the ignition

must be switched on.

Press a to scroll through the display

messages.

Current information on the type of service

can be obtained at a smart centre or a

qualified specialist workshop.

Digital speedometer display

The display shows the digital speedometer.

The digital speedometer in the header is

hidden.

United Kingdom only: the digital speedom-

eter in the header continues to be dis-

played.

Setting values

Setting values (monochrome display)

Setting the time

Press ´ repeatedly until ° is

shown next to the time.

Press a until the hour display flashes.

Set the values.

Activating/deactivating Active Brake

Assist

Press ´ several times until Ä and

° are displayed.

Press a until ON or OFF appears below

Ä.

The ^ indicator lamp lights up when

Active Brake Assist is deactivated.

Resetting values

The trip meter display and eco score dis-

play can be reset.

Scroll to the desired display.

Press a for three seconds.

Setting values (colour display)

Setting values

109

>> Operating the on-board computer.

Press 9 or : to scroll to Settings.

Press 9 or : to scroll to the

desired menu.

Press 9 or : to set the desired

value.

Press a to confirm.

Resetting values

To reset the values in the respective dis-

plays, select the following:

Press a.

Select yes and press a to confirm.

Setting the time

Select Settings > Time > Set the time.

Set the values.

Vehicles with smart Media-System: if

available, the time and time format are

set in the smart Media-System.

Setting the time format

Select Settings > Time > Time format

(12/24 h).

Set the value.

Adjusting the instrument lighting

Select Settings > Display > Display/

switch brightness.

Set the value.

Displaying the digital speedometer in

the header

Select Settings > Display > Digital

speedometer.

Select the Disp. addit. dig. speedo.

function.

The digital speedometer is displayed in

the header.

UK only: the digital speedometer in the

header cannot be hidden.

Setting the unit for speed in the digital

speedometer

Select Settings > Display > Digital

speedometer > Unit.

Set the value.

The following values are set:

Digital speedometer display

Digital speedometer in the header

UK only: only the display unit of the digital

speedometer is set.

Setting the unit of measurement for

distance

Select Settings > Display > Units of

distance.

Set the value.

Setting the temperature unit of meas-

urement

Select Settings > Display > Units of

temperature.

Set the value.

Switching radar-based recuperation off

and on

To switch on radar-based recuperation, the

conditions for activation must be fulfilled

and the ignition must be switched on.

Select Settings > Radar assist. recu‐

peration > on or off.

Information on radar-based recuperation

(Y page 69).

Activating/deactivating Active Brake

Assist

The ignition must be switched on in order

to set Active Brake Assist.

Select Settings > Active Brake Assist >

on or off.

Information on Active Brake Assist

(Y page 58).

110

Setting values

>> Operating the on-board computer.

Starting the tyre pressure monitor

Select Settings > Tyre pressure moni‐

tor.

Information on the tyre pressure monitor

(Y page 163).

Switching ambient lighting on/off

Select Settings > Ambient lighting > On.

Setting the brightness of the ambient

lighting

Select Settings > Ambient lighting >

Brightness.

Set the value.

Setting the language

Select Settings > Language (Language).

Set the value.

Setting values

111

>> Operating the on-board computer.

Operating and setting the smart

Audio-System

smart Audio-System overview

WARNING

If you operate information and communi-

cation equipment integrated in the vehi-

cle when driving, you could be distracted

from the traffic situation. This could also

cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

There is a risk of an accident.

Only operate this equipment when the

traffic situation permits. If you cannot be

sure of this, stop the vehicle paying

attention to road and traffic conditions

and operate the equipment with the vehi-

cle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements

for the country in which you are currently

driving when operating the smart Audio-

System.

Number keys 1 - 6

;

C Previous station or track

USB1 connection

D Next station or track

% Goes back one menu level higher

Control for menu selection and station

list, 9 button

USB2 port

Ã Telephone menu to accept or reject

calls

ª System settings

8 Mute

Õ Plays back media from external

data storage media

$ Switches on the radio and selects

the waveband

External audio equipment (AUX connec-

tion)

Volume control, Ü button

F Sets the radio text

Operating and setting the smart

Audio-System

To switch on or off: press Ü.

To scroll through menus: turn control B.

To select menu options: turn control B

and press the 9 button.

To navigate to the next-highest folder:

press the % button.

To set values: turn control B and press

the 9 button.

To increase or decrease the volume: turn

control J.

Using external devices

Useful information

You can connect the following external

devices:

USB devices, iPods

and MP3 players (USB

port)

External audio equipment (AUX connec-

tion)

Bluetooth

devices, such as mobile

phones

External devices can be charged at USB

ports = and C when the ignition is

switched on. It is better to use USB port =

for charging as it supplies a higher charge

current. To charge an external device

remove the cover on USB port =.

112

Operating and setting the smart Audio-System

>> Using the smart Audio-System.

Removing and fastening the cover of

the USB1 port

To remove: turn the cover anti-clockwise

using handle :.

Move the cover into position ;.

Remove the cover.

To secure: place the cover in position ;.

Turn the cover clockwise using han-

dle :.

Adjusting the system settings

Setting the system language

Press the ª button.

Select Language.

The list of languages appears.

Select the language.

Switching the time on/off

Press the ª button.

Select Clock.

Select ON or OFF.

Setting the time

Press the ª button.

Select Clock.

Select Set Time.

Set the time.

Setting the time format

Press the ª button.

Select Clock.

Select Format.

Select one of the following time formats:

Am/Pm

24hr

Adjusting the audio settings

Adjusting the sound

Press the ª button.

Select Audio.

Select Sound.

Select the desired sound setting:

Bass: adjusts the bass.

Treble: adjusts the treble.

Bal.: adjusts the surround sound (bal-

ance) to left or right.

Switching the bass boost on/off (vehi-

cles without JBL sound system)

Press the ª button.

Select Audio.

Select Bass Boost.

Select ON or OFF.

Resetting audio settings

Press the ª button.

Select Audio.

Select Audio Default.

Select Yes.

Adjusting the volume to the vehicle

speed (vehicles without JBL sound sys-

tem)

Press the ª button.

Select Audio.

Select Speed Vol..

Select the desired level.

The higher the level, the higher the vol-

ume will be at increasing road speeds.

Operating and setting the smart Audio-System

113

>> Using the smart Audio-System.

Listening to the radio

Switching on the radio

Press the Ü button.

Press the $ button.

The smart Audio-System receives data

transmitted via the Radio Data System

(RDS).

Setting the waveband

Press the $ button repeatedly until

the desired waveband appears.

If available, you can switch between the

following wavebands:

FM1

FM2

DR1 (digital radio)

DR2 (digital radio)

Selecting stations manually

FM and AM waveband

Press the D or C button to set the

desired frequency.

Digital radio frequency range

To select the desired station, press the

D or C button.

Setting a station from the station list

Press a in radio mode.

The station list appears.

Select a station.

Press a to confirm.

Updating the station list

Press the $ button until you hear a

tone.

Storing a station

Select the waveband.

Set the station.

Press a number key 1 to 6 until you

hear a tone.

The station set for this waveband will be

stored on the button you have pressed.

Selecting a stored station

Select a waveband.

Press a number key for the stored station.

Switching traffic announcements

on/off

Press the ª button.

Select Radio.

Select TA.

Select ON or OFF.

Interrupting a traffic announcement

During a traffic announcement, briefly

press %.

Displaying radio text in FM radio

Press the F button.

If radio text is available, it will be dis-

played.

Digital radio (if available)

Information on DAB

Any electronic devices taken into the

vehicle may seriously impair radio and

DAB radio reception.

Digital radio or DAB (Digital Audio Broad-

casting) is a digital transmission standard

optimally designed for the mobile reception

of radio transmissions. Several programmes

are combined into so-called ensembles and

transmitted on a single frequency. Some

stations only transmit programmes at cer-

114

Listening to the radio

>> Using the smart Audio-System.

tain times. If you have selected a pro-

gramme that has subsequently been

removed from the ensemble, it will no lon-

ger be received. You will continue to

receive the other programmes in the

ensemble. Select either a different pro-

gramme or a different ensemble.

DAB cannot be received everywhere in

Europe.

Displaying radio text

This function provides additional data

transmitted in the DAB waveband (DR1 and

DR2). Besides displaying the artist and

track names, information on the current

programme may also be available.

Press the F button.

Select Radio text.

The î dot shows that radio text is acti-

vated.

Setting alerts

If this function is activated, certain pro-

gramme categories allow another broadcast

to interrupt the current audio playback.

Numerous categories can be selected, such

as news, business news, sports news etc.

A prerequisite for the reception is that

broadcasters process the relevant informa-

tion. This function is only available in cer-

tain countries.

Call up the setup menu (Y page 113).

Select Radio > DR Interrupt… > Desired

category.

The î dot shows the active settings.

Several categories can be selected.

Repeat the procedure if necessary.

Displaying the EPG

EPG (Electronic Program Guide) is available

in the DAB waveband (DR1 and DR2).

If the station supports EPG, you can use the

EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) to dis-

play the current and the following two

radio programmes. At the very least, the

programme overview contains the name,

time and length of each programme.

Press the F button.

Select EPG.

Select the desired station.

Switching on Intellitext™

If the station supports Intellitext™, you can

have additional information displayed,

such as news, headlines, business news,

sports news etc. A prerequisite for the

reception is that broadcasters process the

relevant information. Intellitext™ is only

available in certain countries.

Press the F button.

Select Intellitext.

Using a mobile phone

Connecting a mobile phone

Useful information

The Bluetooth

-capable mobile phone must

be compatible with the smart Audio-Sys-

tem. Overview of compatible mobile phones:

http://www.smart.com/connect.

To make a call, Bluetooth

must be activa-

ted on the mobile phone and the smart

Audio-System.

Once outside the Bluetooth

reception

range, the connection is terminated auto-

matically.

To clearly identify a mobile phone, change

the device name (see the manufacturer's

operating instructions).

Activating Bluetooth

on a mobile

phone

Activate Bluetooth

on the mobile phone

(see the manufacturer's operating

instructions).

Search for devices.

Using a mobile phone

115

>> Using the smart Audio-System.

Switching on the Bluetooth

function of

the smart Audio-System

Press the Ã button.

Turn control B to Bluetooth and confirm

with 9.

Turn control B to ON and confirm with

The î dot shows the active setting.

Authorising a mobile phone on the

smart Audio-System

Press the Ã button.

Select Scan devices.

The system searches for available mobile

phones and displays them in a list.

Select a mobile phone confirm with 9.

Authorise the mobile phone with the

smart Audio-System.

The following options are available:

if a code appears in the smart Audio-Sys-

tem display and on the mobile phone,

confirm it on the mobile phone

if the code 0000 appears in the smart

Audio-System display, enter it and con-

firm it on the mobile phone

A maximum of five mobile phones can be

authorised. However, only one authorised

mobile phone can be connected with Blue-

tooth

at a time.

Loading and updating the phone book

Press the Ã button.

Select Settings > PB download.

If necessary, accept the access confirma-

tion on the mobile phone.

If the mobile phone supports the Bluetooth

PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) profile,

the phone book and call lists will be trans-

ferred after you connect.

Removing a mobile phone from the list

(de-authorising)

Press the Ã button.

Select Del. device.

Authorised mobile phones are displayed.

Select the mobile phone to be deleted.

Select Yes.

After de-authorisation, the Bluetooth

con-

nection to the mobile phone is no longer

established automatically.

Connecting another authorised mobile

phone

Activating Bluetooth

on a mobile phone

Press the Ã button.

Select Sel. device.

All authorised mobile phones are dis-

played. The currently connected mobile

phone is indicated by a dot.

Select the desired mobile phone from the

list.

Setting the sound

Adjusting the call volume

Press the Ã button.

Select Settings > Volume > Call.

Select the value.

Switching the smart Audio-System

ringtone on and off

Press the Ã button.

Select Settings > Ringtone.

To switch on: select Car.

To switch off: select Phone.

Adjusting the ringtone volume

Press the Ã button.

Select Settings > Volume > Ring.

Select the value.

Telephone operation

Calling a contact from the phone book

To call a contact in the phone book, the

mobile phone telephone book first has to be

imported into the smart Audio-System.

116

Using a mobile phone

>> Using the smart Audio-System.

Press the Ã button.

Select Phonebook.

Select the contact.

The details for the contact are displayed.

Select the desired phone number.

Press the 9 button.

Dialling a phone number

Press the Ã button.

Select Dial a number.

An input screen appears.

Enter the number.

Press the 9 button.

Select ;.

Using call lists to call contacts

To call a contact in a call list, the mobile

phone telephone book first has to be impor-

ted into the smart Audio-System.

Press the Ã button.

Select Call List.

Select Dialled, Received or Missed.

Select an entry from the list.

Calling the last number dialled

Press and hold the Ã button until the

call is established.

Accepting a call

Press the Ã button.

Briefly press the button on the

steering wheel.

Rejecting a call

Press and hold the Ã button.

Press and hold the button on the

steering wheel until the call is rejected.

Holding and continuing a call

To hold: select Â.

To continue the call: press the 9 button.

Transferring a call to the mobile phone

Select z.

To transfer the call back to the smart

Audio-System: press the 9 button.

Entering numbers or characters during

a call

Select #123.

Enter numbers or characters.

Ending a call

Press the 9 button.

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

Using voice control for the mobile

phone

Useful information

The voice control of the connected mobile

phone can be used (see manufacturer's

operating instructions). Not all voice con-

trol services are supported by the smart

Audio-System.

Voice control must be activated in the set-

tings menu of the mobile phone.

Starting voice control of the mobile

phone

Connect the mobile phone with the smart

Audio-System via Bluetooth

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

A message appears in the display of the

smart Audio-System and a tone sounds.

Voice control for the mobile phone is

active.

Say a command.

Using a mobile phone

117

>> Using the smart Audio-System.

Ending voice control of the mobile

phone

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

Press the 9 button.

Voice control of the mobile phone is

ended.

Operating external data storage media

Useful information

You can switch between the following

media sources, depending on the type of

external data storage media connected:

USB 1 or iPod

USB 2 or iPod

AUX (external audio equipment)

BT Audio (with Bluetooth

connected

device, such as a mobile phone)

Selecting external data storage media

Press the Õ button repeatedly until

the desired media source appears in the

display.

Operating a USB device or iPod

Connecting a device

Connect the device to the USB port.

The device is activated automatically and

the first track is played.

Selecting a track

In USB mode, press the 9 button.

Available tracks or folders are displayed.

Turn control B.

Press 9 to confirm.

Rapid search

Press the 9 button.

An entry field appears.

To enter characters, turn control B and

press the 9 button.

Skipping to the next or previous track

Press the D or C button briefly to

skip to the next track or press longer for

rapid scrolling.

Switching random track sequence on/off

Press the C button.

Switching the repeat function on/off

Press the number key.

Selecting a track from a category with

an iPod

connected

Press the 9 button.

Select a category from the list.

Different categories, such as playlists,

artists or albums, can be selected,

depending on the connected device.

Displaying metadata

Press the F button repeatedly until

the desired metadata is displayed.

Operating external audio equipment

(AUX)

Connecting a device

Connect the device to the AUX jack.

Use the Õ button to access the media

on a connected AUX device.

Adjusting the volume of external audio

equipment

Press the ª button.

Select Audio.

Select AUX In.

118

Operating external data storage media

>> Using the smart Audio-System.

Select one of the following options for the

volume:

Low

Medium

High

Bluetooth

device operation

Connecting a device

Connect a Bluetooth

audio device the

same way you connect a mobile phone

with Bluetooth

Skipping to the next or previous track

Press the D or C button briefly to

skip to the next track or press longer for

rapid scrolling.

Displaying metadata

Press the F button repeatedly until

the desired metadata is displayed.

Operating external data storage media

119

>> Using the smart Audio-System.

Operating and setting up the smart

Media-System

Operating the smart Media-System

Please note

Some functions are restricted while driving.

Controls

Switches voice control system on/

off, accepts and ends a phone call

;

W Increases the volume

X Reduces the volume

smart Media-System display

Voice control system

The following functions are possible using

the voice control system of the smart

Media-System:

enter a destination for navigation

make a call

start an application

Controls on the smart Media-System

Previous station or track and fast

rewind

;

Mute

Next station or track and fast forward

Switches to the home screen

Ü On/off button and volume control

Touchscreen

Ports on the centre console

Port for external audio equipment (AUX)

;

USB port

SD card slot

Some devices, for example mobile phones or

USB drives, connect with the smart Media-

System via USB port ;. External devices

with 5 V (1 A) can be charged on USB port ;

when the ignition is switched on.

120

Operating and setting up the smart Media-System

>> Using the smart Media-System.

Overview of home screen

To call up a function, tap on an area on

the home page or on a symbol.

The following functions can be selected:

:: to switch to radio or media applica-

tion

;: to call up message memory

=: to switch to telephone application

?: to call up the weather forecast for the

current location

A: to display time and temperature in

full screen or to call up time settings

B: to switch to full screen navigation

view

C: next navigation manoeuvre is dis-

played

D: to change language, change home

page, remove an SD card or switch off the

display

E: distance to the destination and esti-

mated time of arrival are displayed

F: to view, call up or change favourites

G: to call up the main menu

H: to switch to telephone application

The home screen can be set to display

the energy flow.

If the home page is set so as to display the

eco score, you can switch to the eco score

application by tapping on the area.

When Android Auto™ or MirrorLink

active, another symbol is displayed on the

home page. You can switch to the relevant

smartphone screen application by tapping

on the symbol.

Switching the smart Media-System

on/off

Switching on automatically

Start the engine.

Switching off automatically

Switch off the ignition and open the door.

Switching on/off manually

Press the Ü button.

Restarting

Press the Ü button five times.

The smart Media-System shuts down and

restarts.

The restart can take several minutes.

During the restart, the audio volume can-

not be adjusted.

Scrolling through a menu or list on the

touchscreen

Touch the touchscreen with your finger.

Swipe up, down, left or right.

The selection on the display will then

move in the respective direction.

Selecting items on the touchscreen

Tap on a menu, an option or an applica-

tion with one finger.

The menu, the option or the application is

launched.

Controlling media playback on the

touchscreen

Swipe to the left.

The next media item is played or dis-

played, e.g. the next track or station.

Swipe to the right.

Playback is restarted or the previous

media item is played or displayed, e.g.

the previous track.

Media playback can be controlled in the

following playback modes:

Radio mode

Music and audio playback

Operating and setting up the smart Media-System

121

>> Using the smart Media-System.

Image playback

Video playback

Calling up menus

Select Menu on the home screen.

Select one of the following submenus.

Submenus:

Multimedia

Radio and media playback

Navigation

Navigation system

Telephone

Mobile phone functions

Vehicle

Reversing camera, eco score, energy flow

and consumption details

Services

TomTom Services

System

General system settings

Confirming settings

Select Done.

Settings are accepted.

Switching off the display

Select home page > W > Switch off

screen.

Adjusting the system settings

Adjusting the display

Setting the daytime brightness

Select System > Display.

Move the Daytime brightness control to

the left or right.

Setting the night-time brightness

Select System > Display.

Move the Nighttime brightness control

to the left or right.

Activating automatic switching between

day and night mode

Select System > Display > Automatic

day/night mode.

Displaying day mode constantly

Select System > Display.

Remove the tick for Automatic day/

night mode and Force night mode.

Displaying night mode constantly

Select System > Display > Force night

mode.

Setting the system language

Select System > Language.

A list of available languages is displayed.

Select the desired language.

The language of the spoken navigation

announcement can be selected independ-

ently of the system language.

Changing the on-screen keyboard

Select System > Keyboards.

Select the keyboard layout.

The following keyboard layouts can be

selected:

Latin

Greek

Cyrillic

For the Latin keyboard layout, it is possi-

ble to choose between the ABCD, QWERTY,

AZERTY and QWERTZ layouts.

Selecting the home screen display

Different displays are available for the

home page which display up-to-date infor-

mation about the applications in the smart

Media-System.

Select System > Home page.

A selection of home screen displays

appears.

Select the desired display.

122

Operating and setting up the smart Media-System

>> Using the smart Media-System.

Resetting to factory settings

Select System > Restore factory set‐

tings.

Confirm with Yes.

All settings changed in the system return

to the default values. All destinations,

routes and favourites will be deleted.

Setting the time manually

Select System > Clock > Set time.

Change the minutes and hours of the time

shown.

Activating automatic time adjustment

Select System > Clock > Set time > Auto‐

matic time adjustment.

Setting the time format

Select System > Clock > Time format.

Select the time format.

The following time formats can be selec-

ted:

18:00

6:00 PM

6:00

Displaying status and information

Select System > Status & Information.

Select the information.

The following information can be selec-

ted:

Version information

Software and hardware of the Media-

System

GPS status

Current GPS signal strength

Network status

Signal strength of the data connection

Licences

For free and open-source software used

For text in the TomTom software used.

Adjusting the audio settings

Setting the volume

Select System > Sound > Sound levels.

Select the volume setting.

The following volume settings can be

selected:

Main volume

For the whole system

Hands-free

For the hands-free system

Ringtone

Ring tone volume

Navigation

Volume for the whole navigation sys-

tem

Computer voice

Volume of the computer-generated

voice

App events

Volume of events triggered by apps

Set the desired volume.

Adjusting the volume to the vehicle

speed (vehicles without JBL sound sys-

tem)

The speed-dependent volume adjustment

function adapts the volume to the current

vehicle speed.

Select System > Sound > Speed sensitiv‐

ity volume.

Move the Speed sensitivity volume

control to the left or right.

The higher the value, the more the vol-

ume increases with the speed of the vehi-

cle.

Volume adjustment is not set using the

control but automatically.

Adjusting surround sound (balance)

Select Multimedia > Settings > Sound >

Balance > Manual.

Move the control to the desired position.

Confirm with Done.

Operating and setting up the smart Media-System

123

>> Using the smart Media-System.

Adjusting the bass and treble

Select Multimedia > Settings > Sound >

Bass/Treble > Manual.

Use the control to adjust the bass and

treble separately.

Setting a neutral sound for the bass and

treble

Select Multimedia > Settings > Sound >

Bass/Treble > Neutral.

Audio is played without increasing the

bass or treble.

Activating/deactivating arkamys

bass

boost (vehicles without JBL sound sys-

tem)

The arkamys

bass boost setting emphasi-

ses the bass during playback.

Select Multimedia > Settings > Bass

boost Arkamys.

Manual activation of arkamys

bass boost

on models with a JBL sound system is not

possible. Activation functions automati-

cally.

Setting the volume for warning tones

Select System > Sound > Alerts.

Move the control to the left or right.

Enabling warning tones when the dis-

play is switched off

Select System > Sound > Alerts > Keep

audio alerts when screen turned off.

Creating and deleting favourites

Creating favourites

Preset

;

Navigation

Radio

Telephone

Services

Context menu

Frequently used settings such as phone

contacts and radio stations can be stored as

favourites. Six favourites can be stored for

each of the following categories:

Navigation

Radio

Telephone

Services

Select Favourites on the home screen.

Select a category.

Select the next empty memory position.

A list of possible favourites appears.

Select favourites.

Deleting favourites

Select Favourites on the home screen.

Select W > Remove a Favourite.

Delete a favourite.

The following options can be selected:

Select the favourite you wish to delete

and confirm with Delete.

To delete all favourites, select Remove

all Favourites.

124

Operating and setting up the smart Media-System

>> Using the smart Media-System.

Listening to the radio

Switching on the radio

Select Multimedia > Radio.

Display modes

Useful information

In radio mode there are three different dis-

play modes, in which various settings can

be made:

"List" display mode (FM and digital radio)

"Frequency" display mode (AM and FM

radio)

"Presets" display mode

"List" display mode (FM and digital

radio)

Selects the waveband (AM/FM/DAB

radio) and preset group (FM/DAB)

;

Selects the previous station

Selects the next station

Context menu

"Frequency" display mode

"List" display mode

"Presets" display mode

Station currently playing

"Frequency" display mode (AM and FM

radio)

Selects the waveband (AM/FM radio) and

preset group (FM)

;

Increases or decreases the frequency in

small increments

Station search, forwards or backwards

Context menu

Adjusts the frequency manually

Station currently playing

"Presets" display mode

Selects the waveband (AM/FM/DAB

radio) and preset group (FM/DAB)

;

Stored station

Context menu

Station currently playing

Selecting a station

"List" display mode

Swipe up or down in the station list.

Tap on the desired station.

Listening to the radio

125

>> Using the smart Media-System.

"Frequency" display mode (AM and FM

radio)

Slide control on the waveband left or

right.

Starting a station search

Select C or D in the "Frequency"

display mode.

Storing a station

Set the station.

Select W > Save as preset.

Up to six stations can be stored for each

waveband.

Displaying radio text

Radio text contains information such as

current track or latest news.

Select W > Show radio text.

Displaying digital radio services

Select W > DR services.

Select one of the following digital radio

services:

Digital radio services:

EPG

Programme schedule for the station

currently playing

Intellitext

Programme information and pro-

gramme schedule for the station cur-

rently playing

Slide show

Displays images to accompany the cur-

rent broadcast

Other radio settings

Searching for alternative frequencies

with the best possible reception quality

Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio >

AF (Alternative frequency).

Receiving traffic reports (i-Traffic)

Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > i-

Traffic (Traffic program).

Displaying the programme type (e.g.

classical)

Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio >

PTY (Program type).

Switching to the corresponding FM sta-

tion when digital radio reception is poor

Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio >

Simulcast.

Displaying information on certain cate-

gories (i-Announcement, digital radio

only)

Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > i-

Announcement.

Select an i-Announcements category.

Updating the station list

Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio >

Update radio list.

Displaying energy consumption

Calling up the energy flow display

Select Menu > Vehicle > Energy consump‐

tion > Energy flow.

The Energy flow display shows the flow of

energy in the vehicle.

126

Displaying energy consumption

>> Using the smart Media-System.

The colour of the energy flow indicates the

following:

Green colouring: energy is being recu-

perated

Orange colouring: the drive is consuming

energy

Yellow colouring and an illustration of

the consumers: electrical consumers are

consuming energy

Grey colouring: no energy is being recu-

perated or consumed

Calling up the detailed consumption

display

Select Menu > Vehicle > Energy consump‐

tion > Consumption details.

The Consumption details display shows

the energy consumption of the drive and

electrical consumers as well as the energy

recuperated over the previous 15 minutes.

The display also shows the total consump-

tion of the drive and electrical consumers

as well as the total amount of energy recu-

perated during the current journey.

The Consumption details display is reset

each time the engine is switched on.

Using a mobile phone

Connecting a mobile phone

Please note

WARNING

The electromagnetic radiation from two-

way radios can interfere with the vehicle

electronics if they are manipulated or

retrofitted incorrectly. This could jeop-

ardise the operating safety of the vehicle.

There is a risk of an accident.

You should have all work on electrical

and electronic components carried out at

a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING

If you operate two-way radios incorrectly

in the vehicle, their electromagnetic

radiation can interfere with the vehicle

electronics, for example if:

the two-way radio is not connected to

an exterior aerial

the exterior aerial is not correctly

mounted or is not low-reflection

This could jeopardise the operating

safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an

accident.

Have the low-reflection exterior aerial

fitted at a qualified specialist workshop.

When operating two-way radios in the

vehicle, always connect them to the low-

reflection exterior aerial.

Bluetooth

must be enabled both on the

mobile phone and on the smart Media-Sys-

tem.

Enabling and disabling Bluetooth

The mobile phone must be compatible with

the smart Media-System.

Overview of compatible mobile phones:

http://www.smart.com/connect.

Select Settings > Turn Bluetooth on.

The setting is marked. Bluetooth

is ena-

bled or disabled on the smart Media-Sys-

tem.

Authorising a mobile phone

Authorising a mobile phone for the first

time

Bluetooth

must be enabled on the smart

Media-System.

Select Phone menu.

Confirm the display message with Yes.

Enter the security code on the mobile

phone or accept access confirmation (see

manufacturer's operating instructions).

The Enabling Bluetooth message

appears.

Using a mobile phone

127

>> Using the smart Media-System.

Authorising another mobile phone

Bluetooth

must be enabled on the smart

Media-System.

Select Settings > Manage devices.

The list of visible mobile phones appears.

Select the mobile phone from the list.

Enter the security code on the mobile

phone or accept access confirmation (see

manufacturer's operating instructions).

The Bluetooth

connection is established.

The Bluetooth

connection will be estab-

lished automatically in future.

Downloading telephone data automati-

cally

Select Settings > Automatically down‐

load phone data.

If necessary, accept the access confirma-

tion on the mobile phone.

During connection, up to 1,000 contacts

are automatically transferred to the

smart Media-System.

Connecting another authorised mobile

phone

Select Settings > Manage devices.

Select the mobile phone.

The current Bluetooth

connection is ter-

minated. The desired mobile phone is

connected to the smart Media-System

instead.

Removing a mobile phone from the list

Select Settings > Manage devices.

Select W > Delete device(s).

Select the mobile phone.

Select Delete.

Terminating a Bluetooth

connection

Select Settings > Manage devices.

Select W > Disconnect all devices.

Select the mobile phone.

If the mobile phone leaves the Bluetooth

receiver range, the connection is automati-

cally terminated.

Telephone operation

Useful information

The following conditions must be fulfilled

in order to make a 999 or 112 emergency

call:

a valid and operational SIM card is inser-

ted in the mobile phone

a mobile phone network is available

Calling a contact from the phone book

Select Phonebook.

Select the contact.

Select the contact's telephone number.

If the phone book contains multiple con-

tacts, they can be called up using Find.

Dialling a phone number

Select Dial a number.

Enter a number on the keypad.

Select Call.

Calling a contact from the call log

Select Call logs.

Select an entry from the list.

The call log can be sorted according to calls

made, calls received and missed calls using

the corresponding receiver icon.

Accepting and rejecting an incoming

call

If a call is incoming, the following informa-

tion will appear on the display:

name of caller, if already in the phone

book

number of caller, if name of caller is not

already in the phone book

Private number, if the caller has the

"Hide caller ID" function switched on

To accept the call, select Pick up.

To reject the call, select Refuse.

The call will be forwarded to voicemail.

128

Using a mobile phone

>> Using the smart Media-System.

Holding and continuing a call

Select W > Put on hold.

To continue the call, select Resume.

Transferring a call to the mobile phone

Select W > Handset.

Ending a call

Select End call.

Using the smartphone screen applica-

tion

Selecting settings for the smartphone

screen

Selecting the preferred smartphone

screen application

If mobile phones support Android Auto™ as

well as MirrorLink

, the preferred applica-

tion can be selected when a mobile phone is

connected.

Select System > Smartphone Screen >

Smartphone Screen application pref‐

erence.

Select Android Auto™ or MirrorLink

Selecting settings to start Android Auto™

and MirrorLink

Select System > Smartphone Screen >

Android Auto™ Settings.

Select System > Smartphone Screen >

MirrorLink™ Settings.

Start smartphone screen application

Select one of the following settings:

Ask me at each launch

If the smartphone has been connected

with the smart Media-System, you will

be asked whether the preferred smart-

phone screen application should be

started.

Yes

If the smartphone has been connected

with the smart Media-System, the pre-

ferred smartphone screen application

will be started automatically.

If the smartphone has been connected

with the smart Media-System, a smart-

phone screen application will not be

started.

Using MirrorLink

Useful information

MirrorLink

is a standard for the connec-

tion between the smart Media-System and a

mobile phone. With MirrorLink

, the con-

tent of the display on your mobile phone

can be displayed in the smart Media-Sys-

tem.

MirrorLink

is available for mobile phones

with the Android™ operating system.

Further information: http://

www.smart.com/connect.

To use MirrorLink

, observe the following

requirements:

the mobile phone must support Mirror-

Link

version 1.1 and above

the mobile phone is switched on

a MirrorLink

certified app must be

installed on the mobile phone

the GPS connection must be activated on

the mobile phone

the time is set on the smart Media-Sys-

tem

Setting up a connection

Activate MirrorLink

on your mobile

phone (see the manufacturer's operating

instructions).

Connect a mobile phone with a connect-

ing cable to the USB socket in the centre

console.

Select Yes.

Apps which have been certified for Mir-

rorLink

will be shown in the smart

Media-System display.

Using a mobile phone

129

>> Using the smart Media-System.

Calling up MirrorLink

apps

Tap 0 on the home page of the smart

Media-System.

MirrorLink

starts in the smart Media-

System display.

Select the desired app.

The display switches to full screen mode.

To leave full screen display: press and

hold the ò button on the smart Media-

System until the lower bar is shown.

To leave the display: select 2.

MirrorLink

audio playback

If your mobile phone supports this func-

tion, you can control audio playback via the

buttons on the smart Media-System.

To select the previous track: press the

9 button.

To rewind: press and hold the 9 but-

ton.

To select the next track: press the :

button.

To fast forward: press and hold the :

button.

To mute: press the 8 button.

Terminating a MirrorLink

connection

Select W > Disconnect.

Using Android Auto™

Useful information

Android Auto™ is an application for the

connection between the smart Media-Sys-

tem and a mobile phone. Certain mobile

phone functions and apps can be controlled

via the smart Media-System with Android

Auto™.

Functions such as telephony, navigation

and the audio playback of Android Auto™

are displayed on the home page of the

smart Media-System.

Android Auto™ is available for mobile

phones with the Android™ operating sys-

tem.

Further information: http://

www.smart.com/connect.

In order to use Android Auto™, the follow-

ing conditions must be met:

the mobile phone supports Android

Auto™ starting from Android™ 5.0

the mobile phone is switched on

the mobile phone has an Internet con-

nection

the Android Auto™ app is installed on the

mobile phone

data sharing must be approved

Transmitted vehicle data when using

Android Auto™

When using Android Auto™, specific vehicle

data is transmitted to the mobile phone.

This makes it possible to use selected

mobile phone services efficiently. The

mobile phone does not have active access to

vehicle data. The following system infor-

mation is transmitted:

smart Media-System software status

system ID (anonymous)

This data is transmitted in order to opti-

mise communication between the vehicle

and mobile phone.

A random vehicle code is generated for this

purpose and in order to assign multiple

vehicles to the mobile phone. This code is

not related to the vehicle identification

number (VIN) and is deleted if the smart

Media-System is reset. The following driv-

ing status data is transmitted:

gear position engaged

instrument cluster day/night mode

This data is transmitted in order to adapt

the content displayed to the driving situa-

tion.

GPS data such as coordinates, speed and

compass direction is transmitted. This data

is transmitted only when navigation is

active in order to improve navigation (e.g.

when driving through a tunnel).

130

Using a mobile phone

>> Using the smart Media-System.

Setting up a connection

Activate Android Auto™ on the mobile

phone (see manufacturer's operating

instructions).

Connect a mobile phone with a connect-

ing cable to the USB socket in the centre

console.

Select Yes.

Android Auto™ starts in the smart Media-

System display.

Calling up Android Auto™

Tap / on the home page of the smart

Media-System.

Android Auto™ starts in the smart Media-

System display.

Activating Android Auto™ voice-operated

control

When Android Auto™ is activated, the sys-

tem can be operated with voice control.

Press and hold the button on the

multifunction steering wheel for approx-

imately three seconds.

A tone sounds.

Disconnecting Android Auto™

Disconnect the USB connection between

the mobile phone and the smart Media-

System.

Using voice control for the mobile

phone

Useful information

The voice control of the connected mobile

phone can be used (see manufacturer's

operating instructions). Not all voice con-

trol services are supported by the smart

Media-System.

The requirement for voice control of the

mobile phone is that Android Auto™ or Mir-

rorLink

are not active.

Activating voice control for the mobile

phone

Connect the mobile phone with the smart

Media-System via Bluetooth

Press and hold the button on the

steering wheel.

The o symbol appears in the display.

Voice control for the mobile phone is

active.

Say a command.

Further settings

Setting the volume

Select Settings > Sound levels.

Set the volume of the hands-free system

and the ringtone.

Activating voicemail

Select Voice mail.

Enter the voicemail phone number on the

keypad.

Select Done.

Voicemail is activated and the voicemail

number is dialled.

Configuring voicemail

Select Settings > Voice mail configu‐

ration.

Updating the phone book

A Bluetooth

connection must be present.

Select Phone book > W > Update

phone data.

Updating the call log

Select Call logs > W > Update phone

data.

Adding a contact to favourites

Select Phone > Phonebook.

Select the contact from the list.

Using a mobile phone

131

>> Using the smart Media-System.

Select W > Add to Favourites.

Dial a phone number.

Connecting and operating external

data storage media

Useful information

The following external data storage media

can be connected:

USB memory stick (USB 2.0 or 3.0 with

max. 64 GB) or iPod

SD or SDHC card (max. 64 GB)

External audio equipment (AUX connec-

tion)

Bluetooth

devices such as mobile phones

The following formats are supported:

MP3 files

WMA files

ACC formats

(.AAC, .M4A, .M4B, .M4P, .M4V, .M4R

and .MP4)

OGG Vorbis (.OGG, .OGA)

PCM 16 bit (.WAV, .PCM)

A data storage medium may contain no

more than eight directory levels.

The smart Media-System only recognises

the first partition of a data storage medium.

The partition must be formatted as FAT or

FAT32.

Connecting external data storage

media

Connecting a USB memory stick

Insert a USB memory stick in the port on

the centre console.

Playback starts automatically.

Connecting an SD card

Insert an SD card into the SD card slot in

the centre console.

Playback starts automatically.

Connecting a Bluetooth

device

Authorise and connect a Bluetooth

device, such as a Bluetooth

-capable

mobile phone.

Operating external data storage media

Selecting connected external data stor-

age media

Select Menu > Multimedia > Media .

Select connected medium.

Controlling playback from a USB mem-

ory stick or SD card

Selects the previous track

;

Selects the next track

Stops and continues playback

Switches track repeat on

Switches random playback on

Calls up the context menu

Displays the playlist

Selects a new track based on categories,

e.g. album, genre, folder

Resumes playback at any point in the

track

132

Connecting and operating external data storage media

>> Using the smart Media-System.

Controlling playback from a Bluetooth

device

Selects a new track

;

Selects the previous track

Stops playback

Selects the next track

Displays the playlist

Calls up the context menu

Selecting a different device

Select W > Change source.

Connecting another authorised Blue-

tooth

device

Select W > Find new device.

Enabling and disabling random play-

back

To enable: select W > Enable shuffle.

To disable: select W > Disable shuf‐

fle.

Displaying details of tracks on a USB

memory stick or SD card

Select W > Song details.

Selecting a track from current playlist

Select New selection > Folders.

The current playlist is displayed.

Select Find.

A keyboard is shown.

Enter the name or part of the name of the

track you are looking for.

Selecting a track from categories

Select New selection.

Select a category for playback.

Switching album cover display on/off

The album cover must be saved in the audio

file.

Select Multimedia > Settings > Media >

Display album cover.

Viewing images

Useful information

Images that have been saved to an SD card

or USB memory stick can be viewed in the

smart Media-System.

The following file formats can be displayed:

.JPG

.GIF

.PNG

.BMP

Image playback

Starting image playback

Insert an SD card or USB memory stick

into the corresponding port.

Select Multimedia > Pictures.

Select USB or SD as the media source.

Select a folder.

Select an image.

Switching between images

Swipe left or right.

Specifying a new selection of images

Select New selection.

Viewing images

133

>> Using the smart Media-System.

Setting image playback

Switching from normal to thumbnail

view

Select Thumbnails.

Switching from thumbnail to normal

view

Select an image.

Displaying in full screen mode

Select W > Full screen.

Activating the controls in full screen

mode

Tap the touchscreen.

Switching from full screen mode to nor-

mal view

Select W > Normal view.

Enlarging the image

Select W > Zoom in.

Showing images as a slide show

Select W > Slide show.

Setting the display duration

Select W > Picture settings > Slide

show delay.

Set the desired time using the controls.

Setting default view for image playback

Select W > Image settings > Default

view.

Select Normal view or Full screen.

Video playback

Starting video playback

Insert an SD card or connect a USB stick.

Select Multimedia > Video.

Select USB or SD.

Select a folder or video.

All videos in a folder are played one after

the other.

The size of the video file may have an

impact on the performance of the system.

Therefore, only playback videos with a

length of up to five minutes.

Selecting the next or previous video

Select D or C.

Stopping and continuing playback

Select Ë.

Playing a new video

Select New selection.

Select a new video.

Setting the video view

Playing videos in full screen mode

Select Full screen.

Setting the default view for video play-

back

Select W > Video settings.

Select Normal view or Full screen.

134

Video playback

>> Using the smart Media-System.

Using TomTom Services

Please note

The smart Media-System uses a mobile

phone connection for data connection.

Please take note of the following informa-

tion when using data services:

The mobile connectivity and built-in SIM

card for this vehicle can only be used for

certain data services. These are offered

by certain third parties as well as

Daimler AG. Usage occurs via the smart

Media-System in the vehicle. The use of

data services requires the conclusion of

separate agreements between the vehicle

user and the respective provider. Voice

service usage is not permitted. As such,

the SIM card must be permanently

installed in the condition in which it was

delivered.

The mobile communications connectivity

and the SIM card may only be used

responsibly in accordance with the

applicable laws and other legal require-

ments of the corresponding countries.

Provided that this is within the power of

the vehicle user.

Upgrading, reproduction, reverse assem-

bly and disassembly of the SIM card are

not permitted. Statutory authority

remains unaffected.

Failure to follow the above instructions can,

in some cases, lead to temporary or perma-

nent deactivation of the mobile connection

and the SIM card. This depends on the

severity of non-observance. The measure

described here contributes in particular to

the protection of Daimler AG and its con-

tractual partners from negative legal con-

sequences due to non-observance. The

availability of mobile connectivity in indi-

vidual countries depends on the existence

of corresponding mobile service agree-

ments with local mobile network providers.

Availability can therefore change from time

to time. The maximum period of validity for

the mobile connectivity is 15 years from the

time of installation in the vehicle.

Useful information

In the TomTom Services menu, traffic infor-

mation and other TomTom Services can be

called up and managed.

TomTom Live Services are available for a

subscription fee. The following TomTom

Services come pre-installed and, following

activation, can be used free of charge for a

period of three years:

HD Traffic

Radar cameras (not available in all coun-

tries)

Weather

TomTom Places

More information on services http://

www.tomtom.com/services.

More information on availability in specific

countries: http://www.smart.com/connect

TomTom Services can also be called up and

managed in the Services menu. In the main

menu, select Services > TomTom Services.

If you have subscribed to the "TomTom

Traffic" service and this is available, the

"Traffic info" menu will be called "Tom-

Tom Traffic".

Activating TomTom Services

TomTom Services must be activated in the

smart Media-System before using them for

the first time. If TomTom Services are not

yet activated, a corresponding button will

be displayed in the main menu and in the

Services menu.

To activate TomTom Services for the first

time, observe the following requirements:

an SD card with map data is inserted into

the SD card slot

a valid vehicle position is available on

the map

a mobile phone network is available

Select Services > Activate My Services.

Confirm the display messages with Yes.

After a short while, TomTom Services are

available.

Using TomTom Services

135

>> Using the smart Media-System.

Select Services > TomTom Services.

The TomTom Services installed on the

device are displayed.

Select the desired TomTom service.

A display message appears. TomTom

Services are activated.

Starting TomTom Services

Select Navigation > TomTom Services.

Checking subscription status for Tom-

Tom Services

The services available on the device and

their subscription status may be checked at

any time.

Select Services > TomTom Services > My

services.

The services available on the device and

their subscription status will be shown.

Subscription to a service can be extended

via http://www.tomtom.com, subject to a

fee. This requires registration at http://

www.tomtom.com/forsmart.

Remove the SD card from the vehicle and

insert it into a computer.

Further information: http://

www.tomtom.com/forsmart.

Downloading updates and POIs

If available, map and software updates as

well as points of interest may be downloa-

ded via http://www.tomtom.com. This

requires registration at http://

www.tomtom.com/forsmart.

Remove the SD card from the vehicle and

insert it into a computer.

Further information: http://

www.tomtom.com/forsmart.

Calling up the applications manager

Information on smartphone screen applica-

tions and smartphone voice-operated con-

trol can be called up with the applications

manager.

Select Services > Settings > Applica‐

tions manager.

Calling up the connectivity manager

The connectivity manager allows you to

manage the devices connected to the smart

Media-System.

Select Services > Settings > Connectiv‐

ity manager.

Managing data sharing

Please note

If data sharing is approved, smartphone

screen applications, for example Android

Auto™, smartphone voice-operated control

and the online charging station search are

activated alongside TomTom Services.

Enabling or disabling data sharing

If data sharing has not been enabled

beforehand, a corresponding message is

shown when the smart Media-System is

started up. Data sharing can be enabled or

disabled at any time.

Select Services > Settings > Data shar‐

ing.

Select the setting.

The following settings can be selected:

Yes

Enable data sharing

Disable data sharing.

Displaying additional information

Select Services > Settings > Data shar‐

ing > About.

Displaying text in another language

Select Services > Settings > Data shar‐

ing > Language.

136

Using TomTom Services

>> Using the smart Media-System.

Using the navigation system

Starting the navigation system

Please note

WARNING

If you operate information and communi-

cation equipment integrated in the vehi-

cle when driving, you could be distracted

from the traffic situation. This could also

cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

There is a risk of an accident.

Only operate this equipment when the

traffic situation permits. If you cannot be

sure of this, stop the vehicle paying

attention to road and traffic conditions

and operate the equipment with the vehi-

cle stationary.

The navigation system does not provide

information on stop signs, right of way

signs, traffic regulations or road safety

regulations.

The traffic regulations always take prece-

dence over navigation announcements.

Observe the legal stipulations and traffic

regulations of the country you are driving

in when in navigation mode.

Selecting the navigation system

Select Menu > Navigation.

The following navigation settings can be

selected:

searching for a destination

planning a route

displaying a map

calling up TomTom Services

changing navigation settings

Installing map data

WARNING

SD cards are small parts. They can be

swallowed and cause choking. This poses

an increased risk of injury or even fatal

injury.

Keep the SD card out of the reach of chil-

dren. If a SD card is swallowed, seek med-

ical attention immediately.

To prevent damaging data, only use the

supplied SD card for Media-System data

or to update map and system files.

Insert an SD card into the SD card slot in

the centre console.

Switch on the device.

The map data is read by the navigation

system.

Removing an SD card

Select Menu > System > Remove SD card.

Confirm the display message with Yes.

Press the SD card.

Remove the SD card from the slot.

Updating map data

Regular updates will be offered for the map

data. The first update can be downloaded

for free in the web portal within 90 days of

vehicle activation. This requires registra-

tion at http://tomtom.com/forsmart. Further

information is available from any smart

Centre.

Remove the SD card from the vehicle and

insert it into a computer.

Install update software on the computer.

Run the map update assistant.

As well as updates, the latest software

for the Media-System can be downloaded

and Premium Voices by TomTom can be

purchased.

Entering and managing destinations

Entering a destination by address

When using the navigation system for

the first time, enter the country.

Select Navigation > Drive to... >

Address.

If desired, change the country using the

flag symbol.

Enter the town or postcode.

Using the navigation system

137

>> Using the smart Media-System.

Select the destination from the list.

Select the street.

Select the house number.

Confirm with Done.

Searching for a car park near the desti-

nation address

This function can be called up when enter-

ing the destination.

Select W > Nearby car park.

A list of car parks near the current desti-

nation appears.

Displaying information about the desti-

nation address

This function can be called up when enter-

ing the destination.

Select W > Show info.

Entering a destination using the map

A location on the map can be selected as the

destination.

Select Navigation > Drive to... >

Point on map.

Align the map view with the destination.

Tap the destination point on the display.

The symbol selected is highlighted in

blue.

Tap on the symbol to confirm.

Entering a destination using the voice

control system

Press the button on the multifunc-

tion steering wheel.

A tone sounds.

Say the command "Enter address".

When prompted by the voice control sys-

tem, say the destination address, includ-

ing street name, house number and city.

Say the voice command "Yes" or, if sev-

eral possible destinations are displayed,

say the number.

Selecting a destination from the list of

previous destinations

Select Navigation > Drive to... >

Recent destinations.

Select the destination.

Entering a destination using geo-coor-

dinates

Select Navigation > Drive to... > Lati‐

tude Longitude.

Enter the longitude and latitude.

Setting a home location

Select Navigation > Settings > Set

home location.

Enter a home address.

Setting home as a destination

Select Navigation > Drive to... > Home.

Selecting a saved location as a destina-

tion

At least one destination must be stored for

this function.

Select Navigation > Drive to... >

Saved locations.

Select the destination.

Managing saved locations

Select Navigation > Settings > Manage

saved locations.

Entering a charging station as a desti-

nation

Select Navigation > Drive to... >

Charging stations.

The following search settings for charging

stations can be selected:

Near my location

Along route

Near destination

Near Home

In city

138

Using the navigation system

>> Using the smart Media-System.

Select the location for the charging sta-

tion search.

A list of the corresponding charging sta-

tions appears. An automatic check is per-

formed to determine whether a charging

station is free. The check may take sev-

eral minutes. When the check is finished,

a message appears. If a charging station

is free, it will be marked green. If no

charging station is free, or no informa-

tion is available, the charging station is

marked grey. Charging stations from the

map data which cannot be checked are

not marked. A maximum of 24 charging

stations can be checked.

Five minutes after the check, the mark-

ing automatically changes from green to

grey.

Select a charging station.

Entering a point of interest

POIs such as museums, restaurants or car

parks near a location are displayed on the

map.

Select Navigation > Drive to... >

Point of interest.

The following POI settings can be selected

to select surrounding areas:

Near my location

Along route

Near destination

Near Home

In city

Select the surrounding area in which to

search for a POI.

The following category settings for POIs

can be selected:

list of categories for POIs: e.g. charging

station or restaurant

POI name search

POI search within a category

Select the category for the search.

Select a POI.

If the charging station category is

selected, only charging stations from the

map data are searched.

Managing POIs

Adding a POI category

Select Navigation > Settings > Manage

POIs > Add POI category.

Enter the name and symbol for the new

POI category.

Deleting a POI category

Delete Navigation > Settings > Manage

POIs > Delete POI category.

Select the category to be deleted.

Adding POIs

Select Navigation > Settings > Manage

POIs > Add POI.

If no POI categories have been defined

yet, a prompt appears to enter a POI cate-

gory.

Select the category for the POI.

Enter your POI.

Having POIs displayed on map

This function enables the display of per-

sonalised POIs on the map.

Select Navigation > Settings > Show

POI on map.

Deleting POIs

Select Navigation > Settings > Manage

POIs > Delete POI.

Select a POI category.

Select the POI to be deleted.

Editing POIs

Select Navigation > Settings > Manage

POIs > Edit POI.

Select a POI category.

Customise the POI properties.

Setting alerts for a nearby POI

Select Navigation > Settings > Manage

POIs > Warning when near POI.

Select a POI category.

Set the distance at which the message

should appear.

Set the type of alert issued.

Using the navigation system

139

>> Using the smart Media-System.

Entering a destination via the TomTom

LIVE service "TomTom Places"

POIs from the "TomTom Places" online data-

base are available using the "TomTom Pla-

ces" function.

Select Navigation > Drive to... > Tom‐

Tom Places.

A list of search criteria appears which

can be used to search for a POI.

Select the search criterion.

Enter a search term.

If a large number of search results are

available, 20 additional search results

can be downloaded.

Changing the route

Useful information

Once the destination has been selected, the

navigation system calculates the route to

the destination. The following options are

available for adjusting route guidance:

calculate alternative routes

adjust routes calculated by the naviga-

tion system

plan routes in advance and travel via

specific way points

adjust settings for calculating routes

Once the route is calculated, a route sum-

mary is shown. By default, the quickest

route will be calculated for route planning,

taking into account IQ Routes™. Traffic

information is taken into account when cal-

culating the route.

Depending on the remaining range, sec-

tions of the route receive the following col-

ours:

green: remaining range is expected to be

sufficient for the route.

orange: this route may or may not be able

to be completed depending on the driving

style and the influence of external fac-

tors.

red: remaining range is not expected to

be sufficient for the route.

The "route overview" function allows you to

set whether the summary of a calculated

route is automatically faded out from the

display after ten seconds.

If the route is not confirmed with Done, the

view switches after approximately ten sec-

onds automatically to the map view.

Displaying a planned route

Calculating the route

Enter a destination.

Select Done.

The route is displayed. If the remaining

range is not expected to be sufficient to

reach the destination, a prompt will

appear asking whether a charging sta-

tion should be added to the route.

Displaying the route details

Select W > Route details.

The following settings can be selected:

Show instructions

An overview of the route with directions

appears.

Show map of route

The route appears on a map.

Show destination

The destination for the route appears.

By pressing W, it is possible to search

for a car park near the destination or add

the location to the saved locations.

Show traffic on route

Traffic disruptions along the route are

shown.

Summary

A summary of the route details appears.

Saving a planned route

Select W > Save Itinerary .

Changing the route

Cancelling the route

Select Navigation > Change route > Can‐

cel route.

When a new destination is entered, route

guidance can be resumed again.

140

Using the navigation system

>> Using the smart Media-System.

Calculating an alternative route

Select Navigation > Change route > Cal‐

culate alternative.

A new route is calculated and displayed

that takes you on different roads.

Select the alternative route or a previous

one.

Route guidance via way point

The route can be adjusted by entering up to

four way points.

Select Navigation > Change route >

Travel via.

If a way point has already been entered,

a list of the saved way points will be dis-

played.

Select Add.

Select a new way point from Address,

Recent destinations, Saved locations,

TomTom Places or Point of interest.

The new way point is added.

Avoiding road blocks

The route can be changed if a section of

road along the route is blocked or there is a

traffic jam.

Select Navigation > Change route >

Avoid roadblock.

Select the length of the route that needs

to be avoided.

Avoiding specific roads

The route is calculated to avoid specific

roads.

Select Navigation > Change route >

Avoid part of route.

A list of the roads on the route is dis-

played.

Select the road that you wish to avoid.

Taking traffic disruptions into account

The route is recalculated based on current

traffic information.

Traffic information is not available in all

countries and regions.

Select Navigation > Change route > Min‐

imise delays.

An overview of the traffic disruptions

along the route will be shown.

Select the traffic disruption you wish to

avoid.

Planning a route in advance

Adding a route

Select Navigation > Itineraries.

Select Add.

Select the starting point of the route.

Enter the route destination.

Enter at least one way point for the route.

Enter the route name.

Confirm with Done.

Starting navigation using a saved route

Select Navigation > Itineraries.

Select the desired route.

Select W > Start.

Setting route planning

Selecting route types

Select Navigation > Settings > Route

planning > Route types.

Select one of the following settings:

Ask for every route

Always plan the fastest route

Always plan eco routes

Always avoid motorways

Always plan the shortest route

Selecting the setting for toll roads

Select Navigation > Settings > Route

planning > Toll roads.

Select one of the following settings:

Ask for toll roads on route

Always avoid toll roads

Do not avoid toll roads

Using the navigation system

141

>> Using the smart Media-System.

Selecting the setting for ferry connections

Select Navigation > Settings > Route

planning > Ferry connections.

Select one of the following settings:

Ask for ferries on my route

Always avoid ferries

Do not avoid ferries

Route planning treats the Eurotunnel as

a ferry connection.

Selecting the setting for unpaved roads

Select Navigation > Settings > Route

planning > Unpaved roads.

Select one of the following settings:

Ask for unpaved roads on my route

Always avoid unpaved roads

Selecting the setting for carpool lanes

Carpool lanes are lanes which can only be

used by vehicles with at least two occu-

pants.

Select Navigation > Settings > Route

planning > Carpool lane settings.

Select one of the following settings:

Ask for carpool lanes on my route

Always avoid carpool lanes

Never avoid carpool lanes

Using information during route guid-

ance

Useful information

Navigation announcements provide guid-

ance during the journey without distract-

ing you from traffic conditions. In addition,

the display shows information about the

route.

Switching navigation announcements

on/off

Tap on the area of the next navigation

manoeuvre during route guidance.

Select Turn on voice guidance or Turn

off voice guidance.

Information such as traffic reports and

warnings will be played even if the naviga-

tion announcements have been deactivated.

During route guidance, traffic information

can be shown for the route ahead. The fol-

lowing traffic information can be received:

Traffic announcements (RDS/TMC)

HD Traffic (a TomTom Live service)

HD Traffic Information takes prece-

dence.

Live services are not available in all coun-

tries and regions. Further information:

http://tomtom.com/services

Tracking navigation on the display

To call up a function, tap on an area on

the map display or on a symbol.

Tap directly on the map to switch to the

overview map.

The following functions can be selected:

:: to zoom in and out of the map view

;: maximum permissible speed is dis-

played

=: name of the next main road or infor-

mation about the next street sign is dis-

played

?: to have traffic reports on the route

displayed

A: to have the route details displayed

Warning for remaining range to destina-

tion appears.

B: compass display and to switch

between two or three-dimensional map

display

C: to open the context menu

D: next navigation manoeuvre with dis-

tance is displayed and to repeat the nav-

igation announcement, change the vol-

142

Using the navigation system

>> Using the smart Media-System.

ume of the navigation announcement or

switch off

E: information about current radio or

audio equipment playback is displayed

Switch to the corresponding radio, multi-

media or telephone menu.

The navigation system zooms in on the map

view as the vehicle approaches a junction.

This makes it possible to follow turning

manoeuvres more accurately.

Shortly before navigating a motorway junc-

tion or exit, the display will show a three-

dimensional representation of the lanes

and the exit.

Lane Keeping Assist is not available for

all junctions in all countries.

Traffic information details

Overall delay on route

;

Traffic disruption (packed snow)

Traffic disruption (rain)

Traffic disruption (traffic jam)

Current location and distance to next

traffic disruption

During route guidance, traffic information

is shown for the route ahead. When there

are a number of traffic disruptions in quick

succession, only the very next disruption

on the route will be displayed.

Traffic information is not available in all

countries and regions.

Colour Meaning

Grey Unknown or unexplained situa-

tion

Orange Slow-moving traffic

Red Traffic jam

Dark

red

Standstill or road blocked

Calling up more detailed information

about the traffic problems

Tap on the display for traffic information

during route guidance.

Scrolling through the traffic reports

Tap on the message on the touchscreen

and swipe left or right.

Displaying the overview map

Useful information

With the "View map" function, the display

shows a slidable, two-dimensional over-

view map. The map shows your current

position, as well as a number of other ele-

ments, such as favourites.

Displaying a map

Select Navigation > View map.

A map of the surrounding area will be

shown.

To search: select W > Find.

Controlling the map view

Moving the map

Tap on the centre of the touchscreen.

Swipe in the desired direction. The map

will then move in the respective direc-

tion.

Zooming in on the map

Place two fingers slightly apart in the

middle of the touchscreen.

Move your fingers away from each other.

Reducing the scale of the map

Place two fingers at a greater distance

apart on the screen. Do not place your

fingers at the very top area or very bot-

tom area of the display.

Swipe your fingers towards each other.

Using the navigation system

143

>> Using the smart Media-System.

Displaying the reachability map

If no route is planned, a reachability map

can be displayed in order to roughly gauge

the range with the current charge status.

Select Navigation > View map.

Select W > View reachability map.

Showing and hiding additional informa-

tion on the map

Select Navigation > View map.

Select W > Change map information.

Select one of the following pieces of infor-

mation:

Traffic information

Names

Points of interest (POIs)

Satellite images

Coordinates

Using TomTom Services with the nav-

igation system

Displaying traffic information along the

route

Tap on the area of traffic information

during route guidance.

Swipe left or right to switch between

traffic information.

Adjusting the route according to traffic

disruptions

Select Navigation > TomTom Services >

Traffic > Minimise delays.

A faster route that had been previously

rejected or route which may not have

been taken into account due to the

Never change my route setting for the

traffic information is selected.

Displaying traffic disruptions on the

overview map

Select W > View map during route

guidance.

Traffic disruptions are displayed as sym-

bols on the overview map.

To view detailed information, tap on a

traffic disruption symbol.

The following symbols are used:

Traffic jam

Road blocked

Traffic disruption

Construction site

One or more lanes blocked

Accident

Traffic disruption avoided using the

traffic information

Fog

Wind

Snow

Black ice

Rain

Large area traffic disruptions such as

rain, fog or snow are displayed on the

overview map with several symbols.

Viewing traffic information for the route

to work

Select Navigation > TomTom Services >

Traffic > Traffic info. for route to

work.

Select one of the following settings:

Home to work

Work to home

Change the home to work route

Selecting the settings for traffic infor-

mation

Select Navigation > TomTom Services >

Traffic > Traffic info. settings.

Select one of the following settings:

Always change to this route

If a faster route has been calculated due

to a traffic report, the navigation system

automatically changes the route.

Request confirmation for route

144

Using the navigation system

>> Using the smart Media-System.

If a faster route has been calculated due

to a traffic report, the navigation system

will ask which route should be used.

Never change my route

The navigation system will not change

the route, even if a traffic announcement

has been made.

Setting the navigation system

Setting the voice

The voice used for navigation messages can

be changed. It is possible to choose

between computer-generated voices or voi-

ces recorded by professionals. For voices

that have been recorded by professionals,

only basic navigation messages will be

spoken.

Select System > Sound > Voice.

Select the voice for playback.

To listen to the voice, select Test.

Setting the voice output

The read-aloud function is only available

in a computer-generated voice.

Select System > Sound > Voice output

settings.

Select one of the following settings:

Read early warning instructions

Read aloud motorway lane instruc‐

tions

Read aloud traffic info when navi‐

gating

Read aloud foreign street names

Read aloud road numbers

Read aloud street names

Read aloud weather information

Read aloud POI warnings

Read aloud warnings

Read aloud signposts

Changing the map

Select Navigation > Settings > Switch

map.

Select the desired map.

Changing the map colours

Select Navigation > Settings > Change

map colours.

Press , or . to select the desired

display.

Changing the E-vehicle settings

Select Navigation > Settings > E-vehi‐

cle settings.

The following functions can be called up:

deactivating or activating the battery

warning

When the charge status of the high-volt-

age battery has reached 20% and the bat-

tery warning is activated, a display mes-

sage appears.

showing or hiding charging stations on

the map

managing charging stations

selecting the charging cable

The settings for both the type of charging

and charging cable are used by the naviga-

tion system to refine the selection of avail-

able charging stations. During navigation,

different options can be selected via the

W context menu:

Select one of the following options:

search for type of charging

search for electricity provider

display all charging stations

A display message appears if there is some

incompatibility between the defined set-

tings and a selected charging station.

Setting safety warnings

Select System > Safety warnings.

Select the desired settings:

Suggest driving breaks

Warn when driving near schools

Warn when driving faster than

allowed

Warn when driving faster than a

set speed

Select Resume.

Select a warning tone for the respective

safety warning.

Using the navigation system

145

>> Using the smart Media-System.

For the "Warn when driving faster than a

set speed" function, the speed above which

the warning tone should sound must be

entered.

Setting the units of measurement for

distance

All units of measurement for distance in the

navigation system can be changed. The

units of measurement for distance of other

displays are not changed, such as distance

displays for the eco score or the on-board

computer.

Select System > Set units > Distance

units.

Select one of the following settings:

Kilometres

Miles

Setting the units for GPS coordinates

Select System > Set units > GPS coordi‐

nate display.

Select one of the following settings:

Degrees (d°)

Degrees, Minutes (d° m.m')

Degrees, Minutes, Seconds (d° m'

s'')

146

Using the navigation system

>> Using the smart Media-System.

Online access to the vehicle

WARNING

If you operate information and communi-

cation equipment integrated in the vehi-

cle when driving, you could be distracted

from the traffic situation. This could also

cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

There is a risk of an accident.

Only operate this equipment when the

traffic situation permits. If you cannot be

sure of this, stop the vehicle paying

attention to road and traffic conditions

and operate the equipment with the vehi-

cle stationary.

WARNING

If you use mobile information systems

and communications devices while driv-

ing, you will be distracted from traffic

conditions. You could then lose control of

the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Only operate these devices when the

vehicle is stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the

country in which you are currently driving.

You can use "smart control" services to

access remote query and to configure your

vehicle remotely. It can be accessed from

computers and smartphones. The Internet

address is available from any smart Centre.

It is also possible to call up "smart control"

services via the smart website.

Access to "smart control" services is free of

charge for the first three years commencing

from handover of the new vehicle, subject

to the availability of the service. Thereafter

you can continue to subscribe to use "smart

control" services.

The availability and functions of "smart

control" services may vary from country to

country.

Requirements for the use of "smart control"

services:

Registration on the "smart portal" Inter-

net page via http://www.smart.com/

portal.

A valid e-mail address or mobile phone

number is necessary for registration and

the terms of use must be accepted.

The vehicle must be linked with a per-

sonal "smart portal" account at a smart

Centre.

Verification and presentation of the

vehicle registration document are

required to link the vehicle. The vehicle

identification number (VIN) is also

required.

The desired functions must be activated

after linking the vehicle.

For activation, "smart control" services'

remote configuration must be accepted

via the "smart portal". The portal address

is supplied by the smart Centre.

The vehicle must be connected to the

Internet.

Connection is made possible via the

mobile communications module integra-

ted in the vehicle.

Once these requirements are fulfilled, the

following functions, for example, may be

used:

Activating the pre-entry climate control

for the vehicle interior.

Calling up information on the distance

before the next recommended service or if

a service is already due.

Convenient charging with automatic

authentication and cashless payment.

During the charging process, additional

displays can be called up such as the pre-

dicted time until charging is completed or

the charging capacity.

If there is a delay in the synchronisation of

data via the mobile phone network, the dis-

plays in the vehicle and for "smart control"

services may temporarily differ from each

other.

Further information on "smart control"

services is available at any smart Centre

and via http://www.smart.com/portal.

Online access to the vehicle

147

>> Using online offerings.

Using smart "ready to" services

Useful information

smart "ready to" services are only available

in certain countries.

The functions are enabled via a communi-

cation module and the smart "ready to" app.

Information and the Internet addresses for

the smart "ready to" services are available

at any smart Centre.

If you are already using a smart "ready

to" service, additional services can be

activated with your user details in the

usual web portal or via the app.

The communication module and activation

are required in order to use the smart

"ready to" services:

A valid e-mail address and the vehicle

identification number (VIN) are neces-

sary for registration, and the terms of use

must be accepted.

Install the "ready to" app on your smart-

phone and create a user account.

Using the Key Card Holder

Key Card Holder : is located in the glove

compartment and is intended for the stor-

age and inventory of the vehicle key and up

to two cards (e.g. fuel card, parking card or

car wash card).

The inventory is available within certain

smart "ready to" services.

For an inventory, the key and/or the cards

must be equipped with an RFID tag.

Further information about RFID tags is

available from any smart Centre.

148

Using smart "ready to" services

>> Using online offerings.

Stowing small objects

Please note

WARNING

If you stow objects in the vehicle interior

in an unsuitable way, they could slip or

be thrown around and thus hit vehicle

occupants. Additionally, the cup holders,

open stowage spaces and mobile phone

brackets cannot restrain the objects

placed in them in the event of an acci-

dent. There is a risk of injury, especially

in the event of braking or sudden

changes in direction.

Always stow objects so they cannot be

thrown around in these or similar sit-

uations.

Always ensure that objects do not pro-

trude over the top of stowage compart-

ments or stowage nets.

All closable stowage compartments

should be closed before beginning your

journey.

Always stow and secure heavy, hard,

pointed, sharp-edged, fragile objects or

objects which are too large behind the

last bench seat or under the passenger

seats.

WARNING

The cup holder cannot secure a drinks

container in place during a journey. If

you use a cup holder during a journey,

the drinks container could be flung

around and liquid could be spilt. Vehicle

occupants could come into contact with

the liquid and, in particular, be scalded

by hot liquid. You could be distracted

from the traffic situation and lose control

of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-

dent and injury.

Only use the cup holder when the vehicle

is stationary. Only place containers of a

suitable size in the cup holder. Seal the

container, in particular when it contains

hot liquid.

Only use the cup holders for containers

of the right size and which have lids. The

drinks could otherwise spill.

Using the compartments

To stow objects, use suitable stowage

spaces.

The following stowage spaces are availa-

ble:

: Stowage compartments in the doors

; Cup holder in the front centre con-

sole

= Glove compartment

? Stowage net in the front passenger

footwell

A Sliding drawer in the centre console

B smart EQ fortwo: spectacles com-

partment above the driver's seat and

above the front passenger seat

Velcro strip on the front passenger seat

for stowing a handbag

Cup holder in the rear centre console

with a recess for storing a mobile

phone

smart EQ fortwo: stowage compartment

in the lower tailgate

Stowage net with two separate com-

partments on the back of the boot sep-

arator

Stowing small objects

149

>> Loading and stowing.

Locking/unlocking the glove compart-

ment

Insert the key into the lock.

To lock: turn the key to position 2.

To unlock: turn the key to position 1.

Opening the stowage compartment in

the tailgate (smart EQ fortwo)

Do not exceed the lower tailgate maxi-

mum load of 100 kg. It may otherwise

become damaged.

Open the tailgate.

Pull handle : on the inside of the lower

tailgate upwards.

Lift up the cover in the direction of the

arrow.

Stowing luggage and large objects

Please note

WARNING

If you stow objects in the vehicle interior

in an unsuitable way, they could slip or

be thrown around and thus hit vehicle

occupants. Additionally, the cup holders,

open stowage spaces and mobile phone

brackets cannot restrain the objects

placed in them in the event of an acci-

dent. There is a risk of injury, especially

in the event of braking or sudden

changes in direction.

Always stow objects so they cannot be

thrown around in these or similar sit-

uations.

Always ensure that objects do not pro-

trude over the top of stowage compart-

ments or ruffled pockets.

All closable stowage compartments

should be closed before beginning your

journey.

Always stow and secure heavy, hard,

pointed, sharp-edged, fragile objects or

objects which are too large behind the

last bench seat or under the passenger

seats.

The handling characteristics of a laden

vehicle are dependent on the distribution of

the load within the vehicle.

Observe the following loading guidelines

when loading and transporting luggage and

loads:

do not exceed the maximum permissible

gross vehicle weight or the permissible

axle loads for the vehicle (including

occupants)

the load must not protrude above the

upper edge of the head restraints

ensure that no items of luggage can enter

the vehicle interior above or between the

seats

ensure that loaded objects are stowed

safely and are secured

load heavy objects at the bottom and

light objects at the top

150

Stowing luggage and large objects

>> Loading and stowing.

the load compartment is the preferred

place to stow objects

stow heavy loads as far forwards and as

low down in the load compartment as

possible

Opening the load compartment (smart

EQ fortwo)

The tailgates swing to the rear, both

upwards and downwards, when opened.

Therefore, make sure that there is suffi-

cient clearance above, behind and below

the tailgates.

Press the é button on the key.

Fold the upper tailgate upwards.

Pull lever : upwards.

Fold the lower tailgate down.

Closing the boot (smart EQ fortwo)

Fold the lower tailgate upwards and

engage on both sides.

Pull the upper tailgate down and press it

closed.

Press the & button on the key.

The vehicle is locked.

Opening the boot (smart EQ fortwo

cabrio)

Opening the tailgate

Press the % button on the key.

Press button : in the handle recess.

Fold down the tailgate.

Opening the rear soft top

Open the tailgate.

Press both latch levers :.

Swing the rear soft top up.

Closing the boot (smart EQ fortwo

cabrio)

Closing the rear soft top

When closing the tailgate, you must

first lock the tail cover. Otherwise, you

could break the catch lever.

Pull the rear soft top down until it

engages.

Lock the rear soft top with both latch lev-

ers.

Stowing luggage and large objects

151

>> Loading and stowing.

Closing the tailgate

Pull the tailgate up until it engages.

Press the & button on the key.

The vehicle is locked.

Enlarging the boot: folding the seat

backrest forwards

Folding the seat backrest forwards

(using the lever)

Seat with a lever

Lift lever ; and slide the front

passenger seat to its rearmost position.

Pull lever : forwards.

Fold the seat backrest forwards at the

same time.

Folding the seat backrest forwards

(using the handwheel)

Seat with a handwheel

Turn handwheel : forward.

Folding back the seat backrest

Please note

WARNING

If the seat backrest is not engaged, it may

fold forwards, e.g. during braking or in

the event of an accident.

As a result, a backrest which is not

engaged would press you into the seat

belt. The seat belt cannot perform its

intended protective function and could

additionally cause injury.

The backrest cannot restrain objects or

loads in the boot.

This poses an increased risk of injury.

Before every journey, make sure that the

backrest is engaged as described.

Folding back the seat backrest (using

the lever)

Pull lever :.

Push the seat backrest back at the same

time until it engages.

Folding back the seat backrest (using

the handwheel)

Turn handwheel : backwards.

Using the boot separator

Fitting the boot separator

WARNING

On its own, the boot cover cannot secure

or restrain heavy objects, items of lug-

gage and heavy loads. You could be hit by

an unsecured load during sudden

changes in direction, braking or in the

event of an accident. There is an

increased risk of injury or even fatal

injury.

Always store objects so that they cannot

be flung around. Secure objects, luggage

or loads against slipping or tipping over,

152

Using the boot separator

>> Loading and stowing.

e.g. by using lashing material, even if

you are using the boot cover.

For easier fitting, fold the front passenger

seat backrest forwards.

smart EQ fortwo: open the upper and

lower tailgate.

smart EQ fortwo cabrio: open the lower

tailgate.

smart EQ fortwo cabrio: fold the rear soft

top up.

Hold boot separator : with the luggage

net bag in the direction of the vehicle

interior in the boot.

Insert boot separator : into bracket ;

on the right side.

Slide handle ? to the right and hold.

Insert boot separator : into bracket ;

on the left side.

Release handle ?.

Boot separator : snaps into place.

Secure the luggage net bag with the Vel-

cro fasteners.

If boot separator : is not required and no

subwoofer is installed, it can be attached to

brackets =.

Hooking and unhooking the boot sep-

arator

Grip boot separator : in the middle and

pull it back.

Hook the boot separator into left and

right rear brackets A.

Removing/fitting the charging cable

bag

Removing the charging cable bag

Turn both buttons : to the left.

The buttons are released from the

anchorage.

Fold the charging cable bag to the left.

The Velcro fasteners under the charging

cable bag are detached.

Remove snap hook ;.

Removing/fitting the charging cable bag

153

>> Loading and stowing.

Installing the charging cable bag

Place the charging cable bag with its side

resting on the engine compartment cover

and then position it on the side trim.

Position the charging cable bag in a ver-

tical position.

Take hold of the Velcro fasteners beneath

the charging cable bag.

Push both buttons : into the anchorage

and turn them to the right.

Secure snap hook ;.

154

Removing/fitting the charging cable bag

>> Loading and stowing.

Useful information

The engine compartment in the smart is

located at the rear, below the boot. Service

fluid reservoirs are located under the ser-

vice cover at the front.

When working on the vehicle, always com-

ply with all safety regulations. Always

have work in the engine compartment car-

ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Removing/fitting the subwoofer

Removing the subwoofer

Release quick-release fastener : in the

direction of the arrow.

Reach into the recess on the quick-

release fastener.

Detach, tilt and pull the subwoofer to the

right.

Pull out the connector.

Fitting the subwoofer

Insert the connector.

Place the subwoofer at the base of the

side trim.

Turn quick-release fastener : upwards.

Press the bracket into the recess in side

trim ;.

Turn quick-release fastener : clock-

wise.

Opening and closing the service cover

Please note

WARNING

If the service cover is not locked, it may

come loose during driving and block your

view or endanger other road users. There

is a risk of an accident and injury.

Therefore, make sure that the service

cover is locked before driving off.

WARNING

If the windscreen wipers start to move

when the service cover is open, you could

become caught up in the wiper rods.

There is a risk of injury.

Always switch off the windscreen wipers

and the ignition before you open the ser-

vice cover.

To ensure unhindered air intake, com-

pletely remove any dirt or snow from the

ventilation slots above the service cover.

The vehicle must be secured against rolling

away.

On vehicles with a lockable service cover,

the service cover must be unlocked before it

is opened.

Opening and closing the service cover

155

>> Maintenance and care.

Unlocking the service cover

Insert the tip of the key into the opening

of lock cover :.

Press the key to the right ; to lever up

the lock cover.

Remove the lock cover.

Insert the key into the lock and turn it

90° clockwise.

Opening the service cover

Pull both levers ; in the direction of the

arrow.

Lift service cover = at the front.

Pull service cover = slightly forwards

and lift upwards.

Carefully rest service cover =, still

attached to the straps, against the front

of the vehicle.

Closing the service cover

Lift service cover =.

Slide bars A on the left and right of the

service cover under the bars on wing ?.

Press service cover = downwards.

Press both levers ; backwards in the

direction of the arrow.

Locking the service cover

Insert the key into the lock and turn it to

position 1.

Insert lock cover : on the driver's side

and snap it into place.

156

Opening and closing the service cover

>> Maintenance and care.

Checking service products and top-

ping up

Please note

WARNING

Service product can be poisonous and

hazardous to health. There is a risk of

injury.

Observe the instructions on the respec-

tive original container when using, stor-

ing and disposing off service products.

Always store service products in the

sealed original container. Always keep

service products out of the reach of chil-

dren.

Environmental note

Dispose of service products in an envi-

ronmentally-responsible manner.

Also observe the information in the "Service

products" section (Y page 212).

Service products include the following:

coolant

brake fluid

windscreen washer fluid

climate control system refrigerant

Service products approved for smart:

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com

Checking the coolant and topping up

Checking the coolant level

Stop the vehicle on a level surface.

Let the coolant cool down for at least

30 minutes.

Open the service cover. (Y page 155)

Check reservoir ; visually.

The fluid level must be between the MIN

mark and the MAX mark.

Topping up the coolant

WARNING

The cooling system is pressurised when

the drive system is at normal operating

temperature. When you open the cap, you

could be scalded by hot coolant spraying

out. There is a risk of injury.

Let the drive system cool down before you

open the cap. Wear protective gloves and

eye protection when opening. Open the

cap slowly to relieve pressure.

Add only coolant that has been pre-

mixed with the desired antifreeze protec-

tion. You could otherwise damage the

engine.

You can find additional notes on the

coolant in the following places:

in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications

for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1

on the internet at

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com

on the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app

at a qualified specialist workshop

If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present

in the correct concentration, the boiling

point of the coolant during operation is

approximately 130 †.

The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concen-

tration in the engine cooling system should

be 50% (antifreeze protection down to

-37 †). This will protect the engine cooling

system against freezing down to approx-

imately -25 †.

Cover cap : of coolant expansion

tank ; with a cloth.

Turn the cap slowly one half turn. If nec-

essary, allow excess pressure to escape.

Turn the cap further and remove it.

Top up the coolant to the MAX level.

Checking service products and topping up

157

>> Maintenance and care.

Replace the cap and tighten it as far as it

will go.

Close the service cover. (Y page 155)

See "Technical data" for information on

recommended coolants.

Topping up the washer fluid

WARNING

Windscreen washer concentrate is highly

flammable. If it comes into contact with

hot components in the front compart-

ment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire

and injury.

Make sure that windscreen washer con-

centrate is not spilled next to the filler

neck.

Open the service cover. (Y page 155)

Pull cap : upwards at the tab.

If available, pull the removable nozzle up

as far as the stop.

Top up with washer fluid.

If available, push the removable nozzle

down and push it inside.

Replace and tightly screw on cap :.

Close the service cover. (Y page 155)

See "Technical data" for information on

windscreen washer fluid and antifreeze.

Checking wheels and tyres

Warning

A flat tyre severely impairs the driving,

steering and braking characteristics of

the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not drive with a flat tyre. Immediately

replace the flat tyre with your spare

wheel, or consult a qualified specialist

workshop.

WARNING

Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation

pressure loss. As a result, you could lose

control of your vehicle. There is a risk of

accident.

Check the tyres regularly for signs of

damage and replace any damaged tyres

immediately.

WARNING

If there is insufficient tyre tread, the tyre

traction will decrease. The tyre tread can

no longer dissipate water. This increases

the risk of aquaplaning on a wet road

surface, especially when the vehicle's

speed is not adapted to the road condi-

tions. There is a risk of an accident.

If the tyre pressure is too high or too low,

tyres may wear differently at different

points of the tyre tread. Regularly check

the tyre tread depth and the condition of

the tread across the whole width of all

tyres, therefore.

Minimum tyre tread depth on:

Summer tyres: 3 mm

M+S tyres: 4 mm

For safety reasons, have the tyres

replaced before the legally specified

minimum tread depth is reached.

If you cannot avoid driving over obsta-

cles, e.g. kerbs, do so slowly and at an

obtuse angle only. You could otherwise

damage the wheel rims and tyres.

158

Checking wheels and tyres

>> Maintenance and care.

Modification work on the brake system and

wheels is not permitted. The use of spacers

or brake dust shields is not permitted. This

invalidates the general operating permit

for the vehicle.

Check the wheels and tyres for damage at

least once a month, as well as after driving

off-road or on poorly surfaced roads.

Run-in new tyres at moderate speeds for

the first 100 km. The tyres only attain their

maximum performance after this distance.

Vibrations, audible noises and unusual

handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one

side, can indicate damage to wheels or

tyres.

If you suspect a tyre defect:

Reduce vehicle speed.

Stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Check the wheels and tyres for damage.

If you find no signs of damage, have the

wheels and tyres checked at a specialist

workshop.

Changing a wheel

Please note

WARNING

Interchanging the front and rear wheels

if the wheels or tyres have different

dimensions may severely impair the

driving characteristics. The service brake

or wheel suspension components may

also be damaged. There is a risk of an

accident.

Rotate front and rear wheels only if the

wheels and tyres are of the same dimen-

sions.

WARNING

Exceeding the stated tyre load-bearing

capacity and the approved maximum

speed could lead to tyre damage or the

tyre bursting. There is a risk of accident.

Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes

approved for your vehicle model. Observe

the tyre load rating and speed rating

required for your vehicle.

WARNING

If you fit wheels and tyres with incorrect

dimensions, the service brake or wheel

suspension components may be damaged.

There is a risk of an accident.

Always replace wheels and tyres with

ones that comply with the specifications

of the original part.

When replacing wheels, pay attention to

the:

designation

type

When replacing tyres, pay attention to

the:

designation

manufacturer

type

To prevent damage, smart recommends

having the wheel changed at a qualified

specialist workshop.

On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure

monitor, electronic components are loca-

ted in the wheel.

Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied

in the area of the valve, since this could

damage the electronic components.

Only have tyres changed at a qualified

specialist workshop.

Only position a suitable jack on the

jacking point intended for the purpose.

Only raise the vehicle briefly to change

the wheel. Make sure that there are no

persons in the vehicle and that it is on a

suitable surface. Secure the vehicle with

wheel chocks and apply the parking

brake.

Interchanging front and rear wheels or

tyres of differing dimensions can render

the general operating permit invalid.

Rules for selecting new tyres

For safety reasons, smart recommends

that you only use wheels and tyres which

smart has specifically approved for your

Changing a wheel

159

>> Maintenance and care.

vehicle. These are specially adapted to

the systems, such as ABS or ESP

Only use tyres and wheels tested and

recommended by smart. Certain charac-

teristics, such as handling, vehicle noise

emissions, fuel consumption, etc. may

otherwise be adversely affected. Dimen-

sional variations and altered tyre defor-

mation when driving under load may also

cause the tyres to come into contact with

the vehicle body and axle components.

This may result in damage to the tyre or

the vehicle.

smart is not responsible for any damage

caused by using tyres and wheels other

than those which have been tested and

recommended.

You can obtain information about tyres

and wheels from any qualified specialist

workshop, e.g. a smart Centre.

The service life of tyres depends on various

factors, including the following:

driving style

tyre pressure

mileage

Observe the following rules for selecting

new tyres:

observe country-specific regulations

which stipulate or recommend a certain

tyre type for the vehicle.

only fit tyres and wheels of the same

type and make.

only tyres of the same size may be used

on a single axle (left/right).

only use tyres of the same type (summer

tyres, all-season tyres, winter tyres).

only use wheel-tyre combinations

approved by smart.

do not wear tyres out too much. This oth-

erwise significantly reduces the traction

on wet roads (aquaplaning).

replace tyres after six years at the latest.

the use of a specific tyre type in certain

regions and areas of operation can be

highly beneficial.

Recommended tyre pressures for vari-

ous operating states can be found on the

tyre pressure table on the driver's side

door pillar (B-pillar).

You can find further information regarding

tyres and wheels at specialist tyre retail-

ers, at qualified specialist workshops and

at any smart Centre.

Preparing to change a wheel

The vehicle tool tray is located under the

glove compartment.

Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery

and level ground.

Apply the parking brake.

Position the front wheels to point

straight ahead.

Shift the transmission to position j.

Switch off the engine.

Remove the key from the ignition lock.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Removing a wheel

WARNING

If you do not position the jack correctly

at the appropriate jacking point of the

vehicle, the jack could tip over with the

vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury.

Only position the jack at the appropriate

jacking point of the vehicle. The base of

the jack must be positioned vertically,

directly under the jacking point of the

vehicle.

Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.

The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel

hubs could otherwise be damaged when

the bolts are tightened.

Position a suitable jack only on the

jacking points intended for this purpose.

Never position the jack on the high-volt-

age battery. Do not jack up the vehicle on

the high-voltage battery. There is other-

wise a risk of damaging the high-voltage

battery.

Also observe the notes in the "Changing a

wheel" section.

160

Changing a wheel

>> Maintenance and care.

Warning stickers

Always pay attention to the instructions

and safety notes on "Changing a wheel"

(Y page 159).

Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps:

Using both hands, grasp two hub cap

openings and remove the hub cap.

Vehicles with steel wheels and hub cap

cover:

Remove the hub cap cover.

Wheel wrench

Using wheel wrench : loosen the wheel

bolts by about one turn. Do not unscrew

the wheel bolts completely.

;

Jack

Reinforced area for the jacking points

Jack ; may only be positioned on the

reinforced area intended for this purpose

for jacking points =.

The vehicle may be damaged if jack ; is

positioned at another point on the sill.

Reinforced area for the jacking points

Triangular indentation

Outer covering of the sill

Changing a wheel

161

>> Maintenance and care.

To prevent damage, smart recommends

having the wheel changed at a qualified

specialist workshop.

The reinforced areas for jacking points =

are located behind the front wheels and in

front of the rear wheels. They can be recog-

nised by triangular indentations ? on the

vehicle.

Jack ; may only be positioned on the

reinforced areas for jacking points = on

the sill and not on the outer covering of sill

Search for the reinforced area for jacking

points = which is found approx. 7 cm

behind the sill at triangular indenta-

tions ?.

Position jack ; under the corresponding

reinforced area for jacking points =.

Set the foot of the jack up vertically with

respect to the reinforced area for the

jacking points on the vehicle.

Make sure that the jack is correctly posi-

tioned so that the vehicle cannot slip.

Raise the vehicle using the jack until the

tyre is a maximum of 3 cm off the ground.

Unscrew and remove the wheel bolts.

Remove the wheel.

Fitting a wheel

WARNING

The wheels could come loose if the wheel

bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to

the prescribed tightening torque. There

is a risk of an accident.

Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts

are tightened to the prescribed tighten-

ing torque.

If you are not sure, do not move the vehi-

cle. Contact a qualified specialist work-

shop and have the tightening torque

checked immediately.

The tightening torque must be 105 Nm.

After travelling approx. 500 km, check the

tightening torque and retighten if neces-

sary.

WARNING

If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel

nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack

could tip over. There is a risk of injury.

Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel

nuts when the vehicle is on the ground.

When changing a wheel, only use wheel

bolts which have been approved for

wheel rims and the vehicle.

Always pay attention to the instructions

and safety notes on "Changing a wheel"

(Y page 159).

Fit tyres with a specified direction of rota-

tion only according to their direction of

rotation. An arrow on the sidewall of the

tyre indicates its correct direction of rota-

tion.

Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact

surfaces.

Push the wheel onto the wheel hub and

press it on.

Screw in the wheel bolts up to the cone.

Make sure that they sit securely on the

cone.

162

Changing a wheel

>> Maintenance and care.

Lower the vehicle all the way.

Remove the jack.

Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a

crosswise pattern in sequence indica-

ted : to ?. The tightening torque must

be 105 Nm.

Check the recommended tyre pressure

and adjust if necessary.

After travelling approx. 500 km, check the

tightening torque and retighten if neces-

sary.

Vehicles with tyre pressure control sys-

tem: all fitted wheels must be equipped

with functioning sensors.

Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps:

Fit hub cap A such that valve B does

not become trapped.

Press the hub cap evenly onto the wheel

with both hands until you hear the hub

cap engage.

Check to make sure the hub cap is seated

securely on the wheel.

Vehicle with steel wheels and wheel hub

covers:

Fit the hub cap cover.

Storing wheels

Store wheels in a cool, dry and dark place

when not in use.

Protect against oil and grease.

Using the tyre pressure monitor

Useful information

It is the driver's responsibility to set the

tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre

pressure suitable for the operating situa-

tion.

The tyre pressure monitor issues a warning

when the pressure drops in one or more of

the tyres.

The tyre pressure monitor works properly

only if sensors are present in all four tyres,

and after the monitor has learned the cor-

rect tyre pressure for the current operating

situation. This occurs automatically in

most situations, but may also be specified

after restarting the tyre pressure monitor.

Before restarting, check the tyres for the

recommended tyre pressure.

The tyre pressure monitor does not provide

a warning in the following cases:

even loss of pressure on multiple tyres

sudden loss of tyre pressure, e.g. due to

penetration by a foreign body

incorrectly set tyre pressure

The tyre pressure monitor has a yellow

warning lamp in the instrument cluster for

indicating a pressure loss or malfunction.

Restarting the tyre pressure monitor

(on-board computer with a mono-

chrome display)

Set the tyre pressure of all tyres to the

recommended value.

On the multifunction lever, press the

´ button repeatedly until the °

and h symbols are displayed in the

instrument cluster display.

Press and hold the a button on the

multifunction lever.

The ° and h symbols flash in the

instrument cluster display for approx-

Using the tyre pressure monitor

163

>> Maintenance and care.

imately five seconds. The two symbols

then light up.

The tyre pressure monitor is restarted.

Restarting the tyre pressure monitor

(on-board computer with colour dis-

play)

Set the tyre pressure of all tyres to the

recommended value.

Select Settings > Tyre pressure moni‐

tor in the on-board computer.

The Tyre pressure monitor Adopt cur‐

rent pressures as new reference

values? message appears in the display.

Select Yes and press a to confirm.

The display shows the Tyre pressure

monitor restarted message.

If the Tyre pressure monitor restarted

message does not appear after five seconds,

restart the tyre pressure monitor again.

Checking the tyre pressures

Please note

WARNING

Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose

the following risks:

the tyres may burst, especially as the

load and vehicle speed increase.

the tyres may wear excessively and/or

unevenly, which may greatly impair

tyre traction.

the driving characteristics, as well as

steering and braking, may be greatly

impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.

Observe the recommended tyre pressure

and check the tyre pressure of all the

tyres:

at least every two weeks

when the load changes

before embarking on a longer journey

for changed operating conditions, e.g.

off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.

WARNING

If you mount unsuitable accessories onto

tyre valves, the tyre valves may be over-

loaded and malfunction, which can cause

tyre pressure loss. Aftermarket tyre pres-

sure monitoring systems will cause the

tyre valve to remain open. This can also

result in tyre pressure loss. There is a

risk of an accident.

Only screw standard valve caps or valve

caps specifically approved by smart for

your vehicle onto the tyre valve.

WARNING

If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the

wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged.

Tyre pressure that is too low may result

in a tyre blow-out. There is a risk of acci-

dent.

Check the tyre for foreign objects.

Check whether the wheel is losing air

or the valve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage,

contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Environmental note

Check the tyre pressure regularly, at

least every 14 days.

164

Checking the tyre pressures

>> Maintenance and care.

The table with the recommended tyre pres-

sure for various operating conditions can

be found on the driver's side door pillar

(B-pillar).

The tyre pressure table may also state air

pressures for different load conditions.

These are defined in the table as different

numbers of passengers and amounts of lug-

gage. The actual number of seats may differ

from this.

If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the

tyre pressure information following is only

valid for that tyre size. If tyre sizes are not

specified, the tyre pressures stated on the

tyre pressure table apply for all approved

tyres.

Checking and correcting the tyre

pressure manually

Only check the tyre pressure once the tyres

have cooled down.

Drive the vehicle less than 2 km.

Park the vehicle away from direct sun-

light for at least three hours.

Check the tyre pressure with a suitable

tyre pressure gauge.

If necessary, adjust the tyre pressure.

Restart the tyre pressure monitor.

Using winter tyres

WARNING

M+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less

than 4 mm are not suitable for use in

winter as they do not provide sufficient

traction. There is a risk of accident.

M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than

4 mm must be replaced.

At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres

lose elasticity and therefore traction and

braking power. Change the tyres on your

vehicle therefore to winter tyres or all-sea-

son tyres marked with M+S. Using summer

tyres at very cold temperatures could cause

tears to form, thereby damaging the tyres

permanently. smart cannot accept respon-

sibility for this type of damage.

Have the vehicle winterproofed at a quali-

fied specialist workshop at the onset of

winter.

At low temperatures, use only winter

tyres marked with M+S.

When road conditions are wintry, use

M+S tyres with the additional i snow-

flake symbol.

These tyres allow driving safety systems,

e.g. ABS, to function optimally in the

winter.

Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread

on all wheels.

When driving with M+S tyres, observe the

specified maximum permissible speed.

Use only tyre types and sizes approved

for smart.

When using tyres with a specified direc-

tion of rotation, observe the arrow on the

sidewall indicating the tyre's direction of

rotation.

After fitting M+S tyres:

Check the tyre pressure.

Restart the tyre pressure monitor.

If M+S tyres with a lower maximum per-

missible speed than that of the vehicle

are fitted, affix an appropriate warning

label in the driver's field of vision. Using

the limiter, restrict the speed to the max-

imum permissible speed for M+S tyres.

Using snow chains

WARNING

If you have fitted snow chains to the

front wheels, they may scrape against the

vehicle body or chassis components. This

could cause damage to the vehicle or the

tyres. There is a risk of an accident.

To avoid hazardous situations:

never fit snow chains on the front

wheels

fit snow chains to the rear wheels in

pairs.

Vehicles with steel wheels: if you fit

snow chains on steel wheels, you may

damage the hub caps. Remove the hub

Using snow chains

165

>> Maintenance and care.

caps from the relevant wheels before fit-

ting the snow chains.

For safety reasons, smart recommends that

you only use snow chains that have been

specially approved for your vehicle by

smart. Further information can be obtained

at a smart Centre or a qualified specialist

workshop.

Observe country-specific regulations.

Use only snow chains approved for smart.

Fit snow chains on both rear wheels.

Use snow chains only on snow-covered

roads.

When driving with snow chains fitted, do

not exceed the maximum permissible

speed of 50 km/h.

Changing the window wiper blades

Please note

WARNING

If the windscreen wipers begin to move

while you are changing the wiper blades,

you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

There is a risk of injury.

Always switch off the windscreen wipers

and ignition before changing the wiper

blades.

Never open the service cover or tailgate

if a wiper arm has been folded away from

the windscreen or rear window. Never

fold a wiper arm without a wiper blade

back onto the windscreen or rear window.

Hold the wiper arm firmly when you

change the wiper blade. If you release the

wiper arm without a wiper blade and it

falls onto the window, the window may be

damaged by the force of the impact.

Changing the window wiper blades on

the windscreen

Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-

screen.

Release tab ; of bracket ? must be

pressed towards windscreen 3. The

catch tab is released from the bracket

and the wiper blade can be pulled away

from the wiper arm.

Slide window wiper blade : in the direc-

tion of arrow 5 until the securing hook

for the window wiper blade is revealed.

Remove the window wiper blade.

Slide new window wiper blade : in the

direction of arrow 4 onto mounting =

of wiper arm ;.

The window wiper blade snaps into place.

Check that the window wiper blade is

positioned correctly.

Carefully fold wiper arm ; onto the

windscreen.

166

Changing the window wiper blades

>> Maintenance and care.

Changing the rear window wiper blade

(smart EQ fortwo)

Remove the key from the ignition lock.

Fold wiper arm : away from the rear

window until you hear it engage.

Unscrew window wiper blade ; in the

direction of the arrow until it is released

from the retainer on the wiper arm.

Pull out window wiper blade ;.

Press new window wiper blade ; onto

wiper arm : until it engages.

Check that window wiper blade ; is

positioned correctly.

Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear

window.

Cleaning the vehicle

Useful information

Regular care maintains the appearance and

quality of the vehicle over time.

Observe the following when cleaning and

caring for the vehicle:

Do not clean the engine.

Do not clean the vehicle whilst charging.

Use soft, moist cloths.

Use care products and cleaning agents

recommended and approved for smart.

Do not use acidic cleaning agents.

In winter, carefully remove road salt as

soon as possible.

Cleaning the vehicle exterior

Washing in an automatic car wash or

washing by hand

Preparing the vehicle for cleaning

WARNING

Braking efficiency is reduced after the

vehicle has been washed. There is a risk

of an accident.

After washing the vehicle, brake carefully

while paying attention to the traffic con-

ditions in order to restore full braking

efficiency.

Close the side windows completely.

Switch off the climate control blower.

Turn the windscreen wipers to position

Notes on care of matt paintwork

The following can give the paint a

glossy appearance and thus reduce the

matt effect:

Rubbing hard with unsuitable agents

Washing the vehicle in direct sunlight

Only use automatic car washes which

correspond to the latest technological

standards. Never use wash programs

which finish by treating the vehicle with

hot wax.

Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol-

ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.

wax, for the purpose of paintwork care.

These products are only suitable for

high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehi-

cles with matt paintwork leads to consid-

erable surface damage or, more specifi-

cally, to shiny, spotted areas.

Always have paintwork repairs carried

out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Never polish the vehicle or the light

alloy wheels. Polishing makes the paint-

work shiny.

If your vehicle has a clear matt finish,

observe these notes. By doing so, you can

avoid paintwork damage due to incorrect

handling.

Cleaning the vehicle

167

>> Maintenance and care.

Washing in an automatic car wash

Prepare the vehicle for cleaning.

Remove excess dirt.

Drive through the automatic car wash.

Remove wax from the front windscreen

and the wiper blades.

If the windscreen wipers leave smears

after the vehicle has passed through the

car wash, this may be caused by wax or

other residue. This residue can be

removed with washer fluid.

Washing by hand

Locate a washing bay equipped for hand-

washing.

Prepare the vehicle for cleaning.

Apply mild cleaning agent with a soft

vehicle sponge.

Thoroughly hose the vehicle with a gen-

tle jet of water; do not point the water jet

directly towards the air inlet grille.

Dry the vehicle off with a chamois.

Cleaning with a high-pressure cleaner

WARNING

The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt

grinders) can cause damage not visible

from the outside to tyres or chassis com-

ponents. Components damaged in this

way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk

of an accident.

Do not use high-pressure cleaners with

circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle.

Have damaged tyres or chassis compo-

nents replaced immediately.

Always maintain a distance of at least

30 cm between the vehicle and the high-

pressure cleaner nozzle. Information

about the correct distance is available

from the equipment manufacturer.

Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle

around when cleaning your vehicle.

Do not aim directly at any of the follow-

ing:

tyres

door gaps, roof gaps, joints etc.

electrical components

battery

plug-type couplings

light bulbs

seals

trim elements

ventilation slots

Damaged seals or electrical components

can lead to leaks or failures.

Prepare the vehicle for cleaning.

Maintain a distance of at least 30 cm

between the high-pressure cleaner noz-

zle and the vehicle.

Keep moving the nozzle whilst cleaning.

Cleaning the reversing camera

Clean camera lens : with water and a

soft cloth.

168

Cleaning the vehicle

>> Maintenance and care.

Cleaning the sensors

Active Brake Assist sensor

;

Parking aid sensors

Clean sensors with water, car shampoo

and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the wheels

WARNING

The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt

grinders) can cause damage not visible

from the outside to tyres or chassis com-

ponents. Components damaged in this

way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk

of an accident.

Do not use high-pressure cleaners with

circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle.

Have damaged tyres or chassis compo-

nents replaced immediately.

Do not use acidic wheel cleaning prod-

ucts to remove brake dust. This could

damage wheel bolts and brake compo-

nents.

Do not park up your vehicle for a long

period of time immediately after clean-

ing, particularly after cleaning the wheel

rim with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner

may lead to increased corrosion of the

brake discs and pads. You should there-

fore drive for a few minutes after clean-

ing. By heating up the brakes, the brake

discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then

be parked up for a long period of time.

Clean the wheels with an acid-free clean-

ing agent.

Cleaning the windows and windscreen

wipers

Cleaning the windows

WARNING

If the windscreen wipers are set in

motion when cleaning the windscreen or

wiper blades, you could become trapped.

There is a danger of injury.

Always switch off the windscreen wipers

and the ignition before cleaning the

windscreen or wiper blades.

Place the wiper arms in the vertical posi-

tion and fold them away from the win-

dow.

Clean the inside and outside of the win-

dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning

agent recommended for smart.

Clear deposits regularly from the wind-

screen and rear window to ensure that

water can drain unhindered.

Cleaning the window wiper blades

Place the wiper arms in the vertical posi-

tion and fold them away from the win-

dow.

Clean the window wiper blades with a

soft cloth.

Fold the wiper arms back into place.

Cleaning the panoramic roof (smart EQ

fortwo)

Only use cleaning agents or cleaning

cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.

Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning

cloths could scratch or damage the plas-

tic panes of the panorama roof. Do not use

cleaning agents containing solvents

Apply mild cleaning agent for plastic

windows and wipe off with a moist

sponge.

Cleaning the vehicle

169

>> Maintenance and care.

Cleaning the roof

Dry cleaning

Brush from the front to the back using a

soft brush.

Wet cleaning

Dry clean first.

Wash down with a soft brush or sponge

and lukewarm water.

Rinse with clean water.

Cleaning the soft top (smart EQ fortwo

cabrio)

Useful information

Never clean the soft top using a high-

pressure cleaner as water could other-

wise enter the vehicle interior.

Only clean the folding roof and the rear

soft top when they are closed.

Dry cleaning

Brush from the front to the back using a

soft brush.

Wet cleaning

Dry clean first.

Wash down with a soft brush or sponge

and lukewarm water.

Rinse with clean water.

Cleaning the exterior lighting

Apply mild cleaning agent for plastic

lenses and wipe off with a wet sponge.

Cleaning and caring for paintwork

Do not affix stickers to the painted sur-

face. Adhesive residue could damage the

paintwork.

Remove impurities immediately by rub-

bing carefully.

Soak insect remains with insect remover

and rinse off.

Soak bird droppings with water and rinse

off.

Use tar remover to remove tar stains.

Use silicone remover to remove wax.

Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,

oils, fuels and greases by rubbing care-

fully with a cloth soaked in petroleum

ether or lighter fluid.

Cleaning the vehicle interior

Cleaning the displays

For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-

lowing:

alcohol-based thinner or petrol

abrasive cleaning agents

commercially-available household

cleaning agents

These may damage the display surface.

Do not put pressure on the display sur-

face when cleaning. This could lead to

irreparable damage to the display.

Switch off the display and let it cool

down.

Clean the display surface with a microfi-

bre cloth and cleaner for TFT or LCD dis-

plays.

Dry the display surface using a dry

microfibre cloth.

Cleaning the steering wheel and the

selector lever

Wipe off with a moist cloth, or use a

leather care agent recommended for

smart.

Cleaning the seat belts

WARNING

Seat belts may be severely weakened if

bleached or coloured. This may lead to

the seat belts, for example, tearing or

failing in an accident. There is an

increased risk of injury, possibly even

fatal.

Never bleach or colour seat belts.

Do not clean the seat belts using chemi-

cal cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat

170

Cleaning the vehicle

>> Maintenance and care.

belts at temperatures above 80 † or in

direct sunlight.

Clean the seat belts using only lukewarm

soapy water.

Cleaning and caring for seats

Please note

Do not use a microfibre cloth to clean

covers made of genuine leather or artifi-

cial leather. A microfibre cloth is too

aggressive and can damage the cover

when used frequently.

Regular care maintains the appearance and

feel of the seats over time.

Cleaning and caring for genuine leather

seat covers

Wet a cloth with water and clean the seat

covers. Do not allow the leather to become

soaked.

Wipe off with a dry cloth.

Apply a leather care agent recommended

for smart.

Cleaning synthetic leather seat covers

Wet a cloth with detergent water and

clean the seat covers.

Cleaning cloth seat covers

Wet a microfibre cloth with detergent

water.

Rub cloth covers with care, cleaning

entire sections of the cover.

Allow the seat to dry.

Cleaning DINAMICA seat covers

Wet a cloth with water.

Clean entire sections of the cover.

Cleaning the trim

Cleaning the plastic trim

WARNING

Care products and cleaning agents con-

taining solvents can cause surfaces in

the cockpit to become porous. This could

result in plastic parts breaking away

when the airbags are deployed. There is a

danger of injury.

Do not use care products and cleaning

agents containing solvents to clean the

cockpit.

Never attach the following to plastic

surfaces:

stickers

films

perfume oil container or similar

You could otherwise damage the plastic.

To maintain the appearance of high-quality

plastic surfaces, do not allow surfaces to

come into contact with cosmetics, insect

repellents or sun creams.

Clean the plastic trim with a damp cloth.

Use care products and cleaning agents

recommended for smart to remove heavy

soiling.

Cleaning the roof lining (smart EQ fortwo)

Remove heavy soiling using a soft brush

or a cleaning agent recommended for

smart.

Cleaning the carpets

Use carpet and textile cleaning agents

recommended for smart.

Cleaning the trim elements

Do not use solvent-based cleaning

agents such as tar remover, wheel clean-

ers, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise

a risk of damaging the surface.

Clean the trim elements with a moist

microfibre cloth.

Use care products and cleaning agents

recommended for smart to remove heavy

soiling.

Cleaning the vehicle

171

>> Maintenance and care.

Observing service due dates

The ¯ and ° indicator lamps in the

instrument cluster display are reminders of

upcoming service due dates:

¯: minor service.

°: major service.

Monochrome display: the indicator lamp

flashes for a few seconds after the engine is

started. Depending on the operating condi-

tions of the vehicle, the time or distance

remaining until the service is due, is also

displayed.

The service interval is based on normal

operation of the vehicle. Observe the fol-

lowing if the vehicle is operated under

arduous conditions or increased loads, e.g.

regular city driving with frequent inter-

mediate stops:

Carry out service work more often than

specified by the service interval.

Check the tyres more frequently.

Current information on the type of service

can be obtained at a smart centre or a

qualified specialist workshop.

Parking up the vehicle

Please note that if the vehicle is not

used for prolonged periods, vehicle dam-

age may occur and the battery may dis-

charge or become damaged.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop for a

consultation.

172

Parking up the vehicle

>> Maintenance and care.

Securing the vehicle in the event of

an accident or a breakdown

Securing the vehicle

When a tyre is damaged, the danger

area must be kept clear of all persons.

Stop the vehicle away from traffic on

solid, non-slippery ground.

Switch on the hazard warning lights.

Turn the front wheels to the straight-

ahead position.

Switch off the engine.

Passengers should leave the vehicle.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Set up the warning triangle.

In the event of a flat tyre, without TIREFIT

the vehicle cannot be made roadworthy

again using the on-board equipment. No

emergency call can be made via the smart

Audio-System. The vehicle owner and the

driver of the vehicle are responsible for

equipping the vehicle with an appropriate

breakdown kit and seeking assistance in

the event of a breakdown.

Switching the hazard warning lamps

on and off

When the hazard warning lamps are

switched on, all the turn signal lamps flash.

The hazard warning lamps automatically

switch on in the following cases:

an airbag is deployed.

the vehicle decelerates rapidly from a

speed of above 70 km/h and comes to a

standstill.

The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-

matically if the vehicle reaches a speed of

above 10 km/h again after a full brake

application.

To switch on the hazard warning lamps

manually: press button :.

Operating the emergency assistance

system

Useful information

For Russia only:

The emergency assistance system is there

to rescue you and others in an emergency.

Should the driver arrive at the scene of an

accident, or feel unwell, an emergency call

can be initiated. The emergency call must

not be deployed in the case of a breakdown

or a similar, non-dangerous situation.

The emergency assistance system can help

to radically reduce the time between an

accident and the arrival of the emergency

services. The requirement is a stable mobile

phone connection; network coverage can

depend on the region.

If there is no safety risk, in the event of an

accident the vehicle occupants should

remain in the vehicle after initiating an

emergency call.

The emergency assistance system has a

separate battery. The battery only func-

tions within a temperature range of -20 †

to 85 †. The battery must be replaced every

four years. Always have work on the bat-

tery carried out at a qualified specialist

workshop.

Method of operation

After an emergency call has been initiated,

the emergency call centre will ascertain if

assistance is required on location.

Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown

173

>> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

In the event of an emergency, accident data

is forwarded to a public emergency call

centre.

The data transferred includes:

GPS/GLONASS position data

Direction of travel

Time of initiation

This allows measures for rescue, recovery

or towing away to be initiated quickly.

The emergency assistance system consists

of a loudspeaker, the control panel and the

telecommunication system. The control

panel is located in the overhead control

panel.

Automatic emergency call indicator

lamp

;

Microphone

SOS button

Call and reception status indicator lamp

Using test mode

In test mode, the driver can check if the

emergency assistance system is working.

To do this, a voice message from the driver

is recorded and the test result is transmit-

ted to the emergency call centre.

Briefly press SOS button = several times

within five seconds.

Wait for 25 seconds.

Briefly press SOS button = three times

within ten seconds.

A tone sounds. Microphone ; records for

ten seconds.

Speak any message.

A signal sounds after 25 seconds. The

recorded message is played back via the

loudspeaker.

If the voice message is correctly played

back, press and hold SOS button = for

five seconds.

Indicator lamp ? flashes green slowly.

If the voice message is incorrectly played

back or not played back at all, press SOS

button = three times within three sec-

onds.

Indicator lamp ? flashes red slowly for

five seconds.

Automatic emergency call

Indicator lamp : shows if an automatic

emergency call can be initiated.

If airbags are deployed, the emergency

assistance system automatically notifies an

emergency centre.

The automatic emergency call is opera-

tional as standard.

Triggering an emergency call manually

Manually initiating an emergency call as a

person involved in an accident:

Press and hold SOS button = for three

seconds.

An emergency call is made.

Manually initiating an emergency call after

witnessing an accident:

Press SOS button = five times within ten

seconds.

The emergency call centre is informed of

the accident.

174

Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown

>> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

Securing the vehicle against rolling

away

Securing on level ground

When changing a wheel, place chocks or

other suitable items under the front and

rear of the wheel that is diagonally oppo-

site the wheel you wish to change.

Securing on a downhill gradient

Place wheel chocks or other suitable

items in front of the wheels of the front

and rear axle.

Using the warning triangle

Removing the warning triangle

Warning triangle : is secured behind the

driver's seat backrest with a Velcro fas-

tener.

Fold the driver's seat forwards.

Remove warning triangle :.

Setting up the warning triangle

Fold feet 3 out to the side.

Pull side reflectors 2 upwards to form a

triangle.

Connect the reflectors using upper stud

Place the warning triangle at a suitable

distance.

Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown

175

>> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

Using a reflective safety jacket

Notes on reflective safety jackets

Maximum number of washes

;

Maximum wash temperature

Do not bleach

Do not iron

Do not use a tumble dryer

Do not dry-clean

This is a class 2 jacket

The reflective safety jacket only meets the

requirements defined by the legal standard

if it is the right size and fully closed when

in use.

Replace the reflective safety jacket:

if it is damaged or there is irremovable

dirt on the reflective stripes

if you exceed the maximum number of

washes

if the fluorescence has faded

Removing the reflective safety jacket

The reflective safety jacket is located in

stowage compartment : of the front-

passenger door. Reflective safety jackets

can also be stored in the rear door stowage

compartments.

To remove: take out the safety jacket bag

containing the reflective safety jacket.

Open the safety jacket bag and take out

the reflective safety jacket.

To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket,

roll it up and stow it in the safety jacket

bag.

Replace the safety jacket bag in stowage

compartment :.

Removing the first-aid kit

Check the expiry date on the first-aid

kit at least once a year. Replace the con-

tents if necessary, and replace any miss-

ing parts.

First-aid kit : is secured behind the driv-

er's seat backrest with a Velcro fastener.

Return it to this location after use.

Fold the driver's seat forwards.

Remove first-aid kit :.

Removing the fire extinguisher

The fire extinguisher is located underneath

the front passenger seat.

176

Removing the fire extinguisher

>> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

Removing the vehicle tool tray

The towing eye and the TIREFIT kit are

located in the vehicle tool tray under the

glove compartment.

Remove bolts in the front-passenger

footwell.

Remove the vehicle tool tray.

Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit

Useful information

The tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre.

TIREFIT is a tyre sealant. TIREFIT is used to

seal punctures of up to 4 mm, particularly

those in the tyre tread, at outside tempera-

tures down to -20 †.

The tyre inflation compressor weighs

approximately 0.7 kg.

At a distance of approximately 60 cm from

the tyre inflation compressor, the following

sound pressure level applies:

X-axis: 82.9 dB (A)

Y-axis: 84.3 dB (A)

Z-axis: 84.1 dB (A)

The tyre inflation compressor is mainte-

nance-free. If there is a malfunction, con-

tact a qualified specialist workshop.

Please note

WARNING

In the following situations, the tyre seal-

ant is unable to provide sufficient break-

down assistance, as it is unable to seal

the tyre properly:

there are cuts or punctures in the tyre

larger than those mentioned above.

the wheel rim is damaged.

you have driven at very low tyre pres-

sures or on a flat tyre.

There is a risk of an accident.

Do not drive any further. Contact a quali-

fied specialist workshop.

WARNING

The tyre sealant is harmful and causes

irritation. It must not come into contact

with your skin, eyes or clothing or be

swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes.

Keep tyre sealant away from children.

There is a risk of injury.

If you come into contact with the tyre

sealant, observe the following:

Rinse off the tyre sealant from your

skin immediately with water.

If the tyre sealant comes into contact

with your eyes, immediately rinse them

thoroughly with clean water.

If tyre sealant is swallowed, immedi-

ately rinse your mouth out thoroughly

and drink plenty of water. Do not

induce vomiting, and seek medical

attention immediately.

Immediately change out of clothing

which has come into contact with tyre

sealant.

If an allergic reaction occurs, seek

medical attention immediately.

WARNING

A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre seal-

ant impairs the vehicle's driving charac-

teristics and is not suitable for driving at

Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit

177

>> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

higher speeds. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

Adapt your driving style accordingly and

drive carefully. Do not exceed the maxi-

mum permissible speed for a tyre sealed

with tyre sealant.

The maximum permissible speed for a tyre

sealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h.

After use, excess tyre sealant may run

out of the filler hose. This could cause

stains.

Therefore, place the filler hose in the

plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT

kit.

Environmental note

Have the used tyre sealant bottle dis-

posed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified

specialist workshop.

Comply with the manufacturer's safety

instructions on the sticker on the tyre

inflation compressor.

Using tyre sealant

Leave foreign bodies which have pene-

trated the tyre in the tyre.

Remove the vehicle tool tray.

Remove the TIREFIT kit, consisting of a

tyre sealant bottle and a tyre inflation

compressor, from the vehicle tool kit.

Affix the 80 km/h maximum speed sticker

to the instrument cluster within the driv-

er's field of vision.

Unwind plug : with the cable from tyre

inflation compressor ;.

Remove hose A from the bottom section

of tyre inflation compressor ;.

Unscrew the cap from tyre sealant bot-

tle ?.

Connect hose A.

Remove the valve flap from valve E on

the faulty tyre.

Unscrew the cap from filler hose =.

Screw filler hose = onto valve E.

Insert connector : into the cigarette

lighter socket or the 12 V socket.

Turn the key to position 1 in the igni-

tion lock.

Press on/off switch B on tyre inflation

compressor ; to position 1.

The tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre.

The pressure may briefly rise to approx-

imately 600 kPa (6.0 bar/87 psi) in pres-

sure gauge C.

Preventing damage to the tyre inflation

compressor

Do not switch off the tyre inflation com-

pressor during this phase.

Let the tyre inflation compressor run for

a maximum of 15 minutes, then allow it to

cool down.

The tyre pressure must be at least 180 kPa

(1.8 bar/26 psi) in pressure gauge C.

Allow any leaking tyre sealant to dry. It can

then be removed like a layer of film.

Have any clothing stained with tyre sealant

cleaned as soon as possible with perchloro-

ethylene.

178

Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit

>> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

Further procedure if the pressure of

the sealed tyre is below 180 kPa

WARNING

If the specified tyre pressure still cannot

be reached, the tyre is too badly dam-

aged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the

tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and

low tyre pressures can significantly

impair the vehicle's braking and driving

characteristics. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

Do not drive any further. Contact a quali-

fied specialist workshop.

Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.

Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of

the defective tyre.

Please note that tyre sealant may escape

when unscrewing.

Slowly move the vehicle approximately

10 m forwards or backwards.

Pump up the tyre again.

After a maximum of 15 minutes, the tyre

pressure must be at least 180 kPa

(1.8 bar/26 psi).

Further procedure if the pressure of

the sealed tyre is at least 180 kPa

Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.

Unscrew the hose from the valve of the

defective tyre.

Please note that tyre sealant may escape

when unscrewing.

Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyre

inflation compressor.

Perform a test drive.

The maximum permissible speed for a

tyre sealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h.

Stop after driving for approximately 3 km

and check the tyre pressure with the tyre

inflation compressor.

The tyre pressure must now be at least

130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). The precise val-

ues are located on the door pillar (B-pil-

lar) on the driver's side.

If necessary, adjust the tyre pressure.

Unscrew the filler hose from the valve on

the sealed tyre.

Please note that tyre sealant may escape

when unscrewing.

Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the

sealed tyre.

Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre

inflation compressor. The filler hose

stays on the tyre sealant bottle.

Drive to the nearest qualified specialist

workshop and have the tyre changed

there.

Have the tyre sealant bottle and filler

hose replaced as soon as possible at a

qualified specialist workshop.

Adjusting the tyre pressure

Increasing the tyre pressure

Switch on the tyre inflation compressor.

Observe the display.

Reducing the tyre pressure

Press button : next to pressure

gauge ;.

Even unused tyre sealant loses its

effectiveness over time.

Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced

every four years at a qualified specialist

workshop.

Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit

179

>> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

Towing the vehicle

Please note

WARNING

Safety relevant functions are restricted

or no longer available if:

the ignition is switched off

the brake system or power steering is

malfunctioning

there is a malfunction in the voltage

supply or the vehicle's electrical sys-

tem.

When your vehicle is towed, you may

require considerably more effort to steer

and brake. There is a risk of an accident.

In such cases use a rigid towing bar.

Before towing away, make sure the steer-

ing moves freely.

WARNING

If the steering wheel lock is engaged, the

vehicle can no longer be steered. There is

a risk of an accident.

Always switch on the ignition when tow-

ing with a tow rope or a towing bar.

WARNING

When towing or tow-starting another

vehicle and its weight is greater than the

permissible gross weight of your vehicle,

the:

towing eye may be torn off

car/trailer combination may swerve or

even overturn

There is a risk of an accident.

When towing or tow-starting another

vehicle, its weight should not be greater

than the permissible gross weight of your

vehicle.

Information on the vehicle's permissible

gross weight can be found on the vehicle

identification plate (Y page 210).

Observe the following points when tow-

ing with a tow rope:

secure the tow rope on the same side on

both vehicles.

make sure that the tow rope is not lon-

ger than legally permitted. Mark the

tow rope in the middle, e.g. with a

white cloth (30 x 30 cm). This makes

other road users aware that a vehicle is

being towed.

only secure the tow rope to the towing

eye.

observe the brake lamps of the towing

vehicle while driving. Always maintain

a distance so that the tow rope does not

sag.

do not use steel cables or chains to tow

your vehicle. You could otherwise dam-

age the vehicle.

Do not use the towing eyes for recovery

purposes as this could damage the vehi-

cle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a

crane.

When towing, pull away slowly and

smoothly. If the tractive power is too

high, the vehicles could be damaged.

You may tow the vehicle for a maximum

of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must

not be exceeded.

For towing distances over 50 km, the

entire vehicle must be lifted up and

transported.

Observe the legal requirements for the rel-

evant countries when towing.

Always have the vehicle transported in the

following cases:

The warning lamp lights up and Do

not tow vehicle with wheels on

ground appears in the display of the

instrument cluster.

The multifunction display is not working.

One or more of the following warning

lamps is lit up:

þ drive diagnostics (red)

# 12 V battery

The brake pedal begins to pulsate as soon

as the towing procedure commences.

The vehicle must be moved over a long

distance.

180

Towing the vehicle

>> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

The transmission must be in position i

when the vehicle is being towed.

Before the vehicle is towed, switch off

the automatic locking feature. The driver

could otherwise be locked out when

pushing or having the vehicle towed.

Vehicles with the basic carrier fitted:

Do not tow the vehicle with the basic car-

rier fitted.

Do not secure the tow rope or tow bar to

the basic carrier.

Observe the notes on the selector lever

when towing the vehicle.

Fitting the towing eye

The towing eye can be attached to the front

or rear of the vehicle.

Remove the towing eye from the vehicle

tool tray.

Carefully prise off cover : on the vehi-

cle.

Screw in the towing eye to the stop.

Towing the vehicle with both axles on

the ground

Turn the key to position 2 in the igni-

tion lock.

Depress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.

Shift the automatic transmission to posi-

tion i.

The selector lever lock can be manually

released in the event of an electrical

malfunction.

Release the brake pedal.

Release the parking brake.

Switch on the hazard warning lights.

Transporting the vehicle

Only secure the vehicle by the wheels

or rims, not by parts of the vehicle such

as the axle or steering components. Oth-

erwise the vehicle could be damaged.

Turn the key to position 2 in the igni-

tion lock. Shift the transmission to posi-

tion i.

As soon as the vehicle is loaded:

Apply the parking brake.

Shift the transmission to position j.

Remove the key.

Lash down the vehicle.

Removing the towing eye

Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it.

Attach the cover to the recess at the top

and engage it at the bottom.

Stow the towing eye in the vehicle tool

tray.

Manually releasing the selector lever

lock

In cases of an electrical fault the selector

lever lock can be manually deactivated, e.g.

if the parking lock has been deactivated for

towing and should subsequently be re-

applied.

Manually releasing the selector lever lock

181

>> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

Do not use any sharp-edged objects to

prise out the cover from the centre con-

sole. Otherwise, the cover or the centre

console could be damaged.

Apply the parking brake.

Open the drawer on the front-passenger

side.

Prise out cover : on the centre console

from bottom edge ; using with a flat,

blunt object.

Pull cover : in the direction of the

arrow.

Pull yellow release = behind the trim up

and simultaneously press release but-

ton ? on the selector lever.

Shift the gear selector lever to position

i or j.

Replacing the bulbs

Please note

WARNING

Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can

become very hot during use. When

replacing a bulb, you could burn yourself

on these components. There is a risk of

injury.

Allow these components to cool down

before replacing the bulb.

Observe the following rules when replacing

bulbs:

Only replace bulbs when the engine is

switched off.

Do not use bulbs that have been dropped

or show signs of visible damage, e.g.

scratches.

Do not touch the glass bulb with your

bare hands.

Only use bulbs in enclosed lamps

designed for that purpose.

Only fit spare bulbs of the same type and

with a specified voltage.

Do not allow bulbs to come into contact

with moisture.

Have LEDs changed at qualified specialist

workshops only.

Change only the bulbs described below

yourself in accordance with the specified

bulb types.

Replacing front bulbs

Changing dipped-beam and main-beam

headlamps

Switch off the lights.

Open the service cover.

Remove cover :.

Pull out the connector.

Press retainer ; inwards and to the left.

182

Replacing the bulbs

>> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

Pull the bulb out.

Insert the new bulb.

Lock retainer ;.

Insert the connector.

Replace and engage cap :.

Replacing the front turn signal lamps

Switch off the lights.

Turn the respective front wheel inwards.

Push clamp : downwards.

Remove cover ; upwards.

Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise and

remove it.

Remove the bulb from the bulb holder.

Insert the new bulb.

Insert the bulb holder and turn it clock-

wise until it engages.

Insert and engage cover ;.

Replacing the side turn signal lamps

Carefully insert a flat tool into recess :.

Prise out side turn signal ;.

Unscrew the bulb from the bulb holder.

Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.

Refit side turn signal ;.

Replacing rear bulbs

Replacing the tail lamp bulbs

Tail lamps without partial LEDs

Rear/brake lamp

;

Rear fog lamp

Reversing lamp

Turn signals

Tail lamps with partial LEDs

Turn signals

;

Reversing lamp

Replacing the bulbs

183

>> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

Removing the tail lamp cover

Switch off the lights.

smart EQ fortwo: open the upper and

lower tailgate.

smart EQ fortwo cabrio: open the lower

tailgate.

smart EQ fortwo cabrio: fold the rear soft

top up.

Loosen screws :.

Remove the tail lamp.

Carefully insert a flat tool under the

plastic hanger on the tail lamp.

Lift the connector and remove it.

Replacing a faulty tail lamp bulb

Rear lamp/brake lamp (vehicles without

partial LEDs)

;

Turn signals

Reversing lamp

Rear fog lamp (vehicles without partial

LEDs)

Release four tabs A on the bulb holder.

Remove the bulb holder.

Pull the faulty bulb out.

Insert the new bulb.

Refit the bulb holder.

Insert the connector.

Insert the tail lamp until you hear it

engage.

Tighten the screws on the tail lamp.

Replacing the licence plate lighting

Insert a flat tool into recess :.

Remove the cover from the licence plate

lamp.

Remove the bulb from the holder.

Insert the new bulb into the holder.

Insert the lamp lens into the licence plate

lamp.

Replacing the interior lighting

Insert a flat tool into the recess.

Prise out lamp lens :.

Remove the bulb from the holder.

Insert the new bulb into the holder.

Refit the lamp lens.

184

Replacing the bulbs

>> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

Replacing fuses

Please note

WARNING

If you manipulate, bridge or replace a

faulty fuse with a fuse of a higher amper-

age, the electric cables could be overloa-

ded. This may result in a fire. There is a

risk of an accident and injury.

Always replace faulty fuses with speci-

fied new fuses of the correct amperage.

Only use fuses that have been approved

for smart vehicles and which have the

correct fuse rating for the system con-

cerned. Components or systems could

otherwise be damaged.

Make sure that no moisture can enter

the fuse box when the cover is open.

The electrical fuses disconnect defective

circuits. If a fuse blows, all the connected

components and their functions will fail.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of

the same rating, which you can recognise

by the colour and fuse rating. The fuse rat-

ings are listed in the fuse allocation chart

(Y page 213).

If new fuses blow, the cause for this must

be diagnosed and rectified at a qualified

specialist workshop.

Preparing the vehicle to replace a

fuse

Apply the parking brake.

Switch off all electrical consumers.

Turn the key to position u in the igni-

tion lock and remove it.

Check whether all indicator lamps in the

instrument cluster are off.

Replacing a fuse (left-hand drive

vehicle)

Do not use a pointed object such as a

screwdriver to open the cover in the

dashboard. You could damage the dash-

board or the cover.

Open the front-passenger door.

Open the glove compartment.

To open: open cover : in the direction of

the arrow.

Replace the faulty fuse.

To close: insert and fold in cover : until

it engages.

Close the glove compartment.

Replacing a fuse (right-hand drive

vehicle)

Open the driver's door.

To open: turn quick-release fastener ;

by 90° using a suitable object.

Fold down cover :.

Replace the faulty fuse.

To close: close cover :.

Close quick-release fastener ;.

Replacing fuses

185

>> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

Replacing the key battery

WARNING

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive

substances. If batteries are swallowed, it

can result in severe health problems.

There is a risk of fatal injury.

Keep batteries out of the reach of chil-

dren. If a battery is swallowed, seek med-

ical attention immediately.

Environmental note

Batteries contain pollu-

tants. It is illegal to dis-

pose of them with the

household rubbish. They

must be collected sepa-

rately and disposed of in

an environmentally

responsible recycling

system.

Dispose of batteries in an

environmentally respon-

sible manner. Take dis-

charged batteries to a

qualified specialist work-

shop or to a collection

point for used batteries.

Fixed keys: unscrew screw :.

Insert a flat tool, e.g. a coin, into the

recess.

Turn the tool until the cover of the bat-

tery tray opens.

Replace battery ; with the positive ter-

minal facing upwards.

Replace the cover on the battery tray and

push it closed.

Fixed keys: screw in screw :.

Check the function of all key buttons.

Open a door with the emergency

release.

186

Open a door with the emergency release.

>> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

If the vehicle cannot be opened using the

remote control key, the vehicle can be

opened using the emergency release.

If the driver's door is unlocked and opened

with the key in the emergency release, the

anti-theft alarm system will issue an

alarm. To disable the alarm, switch on the

ignition.

Carefully remove the cover from the

emergency release.

Insert the key into the emergency release

on the driver's door.

Turn the key anti-clockwise.

Remove the key from the lock.

Push the cover into the emergency

release until it engages.

Open the door.

To disable the alarm from the anti-theft

alarm system: switch on the ignition.

On right-hand-drive vehicles, the emer-

gency release is located on the front-

passenger door.

Locking the doors in an emergency

Locking the doors with the locking

button

Open the driver's door.

Close the other doors and the tailgate.

Press and hold button :. An audible

locking and unlocking sound can be

heard. Wait until the third (locking)

sound, before releasing button :.

When the doors are locked, indicator

lamp ; lights up.

Leave the vehicle and close the driver's

door.

The doors, tailgate and socket cap are

locked. The anti-theft alarm system is

primed.

From the outside, check that the doors,

tailgate and socket cap are locked.

Locking the doors with the emergency

locking

Insert the key into slot : on the left

door.

Turn the key towards the bonnet as far as

it will go to position 2.

Close the left door.

Repeat the procedure described above on

the right door.

Check that the doors are locked.

If you lock the vehicle using emergency

locking, the tailgate and socket cap are

not locked. The anti-theft alarm system

is not primed.

Locking the doors in an emergency

187

>> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

Notes on display messages

The display shows warnings, malfunctions

or additional information. A warning tone

also sounds with some display messages.

Messages from all categories can contain

important information that must be

observed. Have error messages checked at a

Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as soon as

possible. If an error message is not followed

up with a repair, this can lead to damage

that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz

Limited Warranty including injuries or

material damage.

Display messages with graphic symbols are

simplified in the Owner's Manual and may

differ from the symbols in the display.

Colour display: low-priority display mes-

sages can be hidden by pressing a on

the steering wheel. High-priority messages

are shown in red. The display messages are

then stored in the message memory and can

be called up for as long as the ignition

remains switched on. Switching off the

ignition clears the message memory.

Locking and unlocking

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The key does not lock

or unlock the vehicle.

A strong source of radio waves is interfering with the signal.

Stand closer to the door lock and try to lock/unlock the vehi-

cle again.

Key battery is low or discharged.

Unlock the vehicle with the key in the emergency release or

lock the vehicle with emergency locking.

Replace the key battery.

Key is faulty.

To lock:

Press the locking button and close the door within

five seconds.

The vehicle still will not lock.

Lock driver's door using emergency locking.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

To unlock:

Unlock vehicle with the key in the emergency release.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Key is lost.

Have the key deactivated or replaced at a qualified specialist

workshop.

Report loss of the key to vehicle insurer.

188

Locking and unlocking

>> Practical advice.

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

A warning tone

sounds.

Driver's door is opened while the engine is running.

Switch off the engine before leaving the vehicle:

Apply the parking brake.

Select transmission position j.

Turn the key to position u in the ignition lock and remove

it.

Side window will not

close or will not open

or close fully.

Objects are obstructing the window guide.

Remove objects.

Side window is not reset.

WARNING

While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing

area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.

When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the

closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the

switch or press the switch to open the side window again.

Close all doors.

Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.

Pull the switch for closing the window until the window is

closed, and then push the switch for one second.

The side window opens again a little way.

Repeat previous step until the window remains closed after

releasing the switch.

C Red warning

lamp lights up.

If the speed exceeds

20 km/h, a warning

tone also sounds.

Colour display: the

display shows an open

door/tailgate.

A door or the tailgate is open.

Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and

traffic conditions.

Close all doors and the tailgate.

Locking and unlocking

189

>> Practical advice.

Vision, vehicle occupants, airbag

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The exterior mirror is

not engaged.

The exterior mirror has been moved forwards or backwards by

force.

Carefully move the exterior mirror to the correct position.

The windscreen wip-

ers do not function.

The windscreen wipers are obstructed, e.g. by snow.

Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and

traffic conditions.

Remove the key from ignition lock.

Remove the cause of the obstruction.

Switch the windscreen wipers on again after 30 seconds.

The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning.

Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The windscreen wip-

ers will not stop or

always wipe at the

same speed.

The combination switch or rain sensor is malfunctioning.

Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and

traffic conditions.

Remove the key from ignition lock.

Insert the key into the ignition lock, turn to position 1 and

start the engine.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The red 7 warning

lamp lights up for 6

seconds after starting

the engine (certain

countries only).

A warning tone

sounds.

The warning lamp prompts the driver and front passenger to

fasten their seat belts.

Fasten the seat belts.

The red 7 warning

lamp lights up after

starting the engine.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.

Fasten the seat belts.

The red 7 warning

lamp flashes.

A warning tone

sounds.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt

and the vehicle is travelling faster than 20 km/h.

Fasten the seat belts.

190

Vision, vehicle occupants, airbag

>> Practical advice.

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The red 6 warning

lamp lights up while

the engine is running.

Colour display: Mal‐

function Visit

workshop appears.

The restraint system is malfunctioning.

WARNING

If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system

components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be

triggered as intended in the event of an accident. This may

apply to belt tensioners or airbags, for example. There is a

risk of injury.

Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately

at a qualified specialist workshop.

The 4 indicator

lamp on the overhead

control panel lights

up.

The front-passenger front airbag has been disabled

(Y page 43).

Enable the front-passenger front airbag.

The front-passenger front airbag has not been disabled and is

malfunctioning.

Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the

front-passenger seat.

Do not allow passengers to travel on the front-passenger

seat.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The × indicator

lamp on the overhead

control panel lights

up.

The front-passenger front airbag is enabled (Y page 43). The

airbag system is operating correctly.

Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the

front-passenger seat.

The × indicator

lamp on the overhead

control panel does not

light up if the front-

passenger front airbag

has been enabled

manually.

There is a malfunction in the airbag system.

Do not allow passengers to travel on the front-passenger

seat.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Vision, vehicle occupants, airbag

191

>> Practical advice.

Engine, brakes, transmission

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The engine will not

start using the key.

The steering lock is manually locked.

Remove the key from the ignition lock and then reinsert it

into the ignition lock.

Turn the key.

Turn the steering wheel left and right.

The engine will not

start.

The ignition is not being actuated long enough.

Hold the key for longer in position 3 (Y page 66).

The red þ warning

lamp lights up.

A warning tone

sounds.

Without starting

motor again, visit

workshop appears.

There is a serious malfunction in the high-voltage electrical

system.

The engine can no longer be started.

Do not restart the engine.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The red þ warning

lamp lights up.

Stop Switch off

motor appears.

The high-voltage electrical system, engine or high-voltage

battery is malfunctioning.

Switch off the engine.

Do not drive on.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not tow away the vehicle on its own wheels.

The red þ warning

lamp lights up.

A warning tone

sounds.

Stop appears.

Communication with the engine's control unit is malfunction-

ing.

Switch off the engine.

Do not drive on.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not tow away the vehicle on its own wheels.

The yellow þ

warning lamp lights

up.

A warning tone

sounds.

Malfunction Visit

workshop appears.

There is a malfunction in the high-voltage electrical system.

The vehicle's high-voltage electrical system may become dam-

aged if you continue running the engine.

Switch off the engine.

Do not drive on.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not tow away the vehicle on its own wheels.

The red þ warning

lamp lights up.

A warning tone

sounds.

Reduce speed

appears.

The speed of the vehicle is above 135 km/h.

Reduce the speed to below 135 km/h.

192

Engine, brakes, transmission

>> Practical advice.

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

lights up.

Do not tow vehicle

with wheels on

ground appears.

The drive system or high-voltage electrical system is faulty.

Have the vehicle transported by a qualified specialist work-

shop.

Do not tow away the vehicle on its own wheels.

The red J warning

lamp lights up while

the engine is running.

A warning tone

sounds.

Colour display: Check

brake fluid level

appears.

Brake fluid level is too low.

WARNING

If the brake fluid level is too low the brake system may fail.

There is a risk of an accident.

Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.

Secure the vehicle by applying the parking brake. Do not

drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop

immediately and have the brake system repaired.

Do not top up the brake fluid, as this will not rectify the fault.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The red J warning

lamp lights up while

driving.

A warning tone

sounds.

Colour display:

Release parking

brake appears.

The parking brake is applied.

Release the parking brake.

The red J warning

lamp lights up while

the engine is running.

A warning tone

sounds.

Colour display: Brake

system malfunction

Stop appears.

There is a serious malfunction in the brake system.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow J

warning lamp lights

up.

Colour display: Mal‐

function Visit

workshop appears.

There is a malfunction in the vacuum supply of the brake sys-

tem.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Engine, brakes, transmission

193

>> Practical advice.

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Monochrome display:

i or j flash alter-

nately in the middle of

the display.

Colour display: To

start engine:

shift to P or N

appears.

An attempt was made to start the engine with the transmission

in position h or k.

Shift to j or i to start.

Monochrome display:

j or h/k, i flash

alternately.

A warning tone

sounds.

Colour display: Risk

of vehicle rolling

away Transmission

not in P appears.

A warning tone

sounds.

The driver's door is open and the selector lever is in position

k, i or h.

WARNING

The vehicle may roll away.

There is a risk of an accident.

Shift to position j.

Switch off the engine.

Close the driver's door completely.

¯ or ° warning

lamp flashes for a few

seconds after starting

the engine.

Colour display: Next

service due in … km

or Service due …

days ago appears.

A service due date is approaching or has already passed:

¯ indicates a minor service.

° indicates a full service.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Charging process

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The charge socket flap

cannot be opened.

The charge socket flap is not unlocked.

Press the # button on the key.

The key batteries are discharged.

Open a door with the emergency release.

The charging cable

cannot be plugged

into the vehicle

socket.

The vehicle socket is locked.

Make sure that the selector lever is in position j.

194

Charging process

>> Practical advice.

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The indicator lamp on

the vehicle socket

flashes red. The high-

voltage battery is not

being charged.

A fault occurred while initialising the charging process.

Make sure that the charging cable is plugged into the mains

socket.

Disconnect the charging cable connector from the vehicle

socket and plug it back into the vehicle socket after

30 seconds.

If the malfunction should persist, inform a qualified special-

ist workshop.

The indicator lamp on

the vehicle socket

remains off after the

charging cable con-

nector has been con-

nected to the vehicle

socket. When charging

using a mains socket,

the high-voltage bat-

tery is not charged.

There is a malfunction at the mains socket.

Have the mains socket checked to ensure that it is working

correctly.

Use a different mains socket.

è lights up.

A warning tone

sounds.

Charger cable con‐

nected appears.

The charging cable is plugged into the vehicle socket. The

engine cannot be started.

Before driving off, disconnect the charging cable from the

vehicle socket and stow it away in the vehicle.

è flashes.

Charging cable not

inserted correctly

appears.

The charging cable is connected to the vehicle socket. The bat-

tery is not being charged.

Make sure that the charging cable is correctly plugged into

the sockets on the vehicle and power connection. If neces-

sary, disconnect the charging cable from the sockets and

then reconnect it.

If the message continues to be displayed:

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The charging cable

connector cannot be

removed from the

vehicle socket.

The charging cable connector is not unlocked.

Press the # button on the key.

This unlocks the charging cable connector in the vehicle

socket.

Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket.

Charging process

195

>> Practical advice.

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Charging not possi‐

ble Power supply

interrupted appears.

The high-voltage battery cannot be charged. The charge cur-

rent was interrupted during the charging process.

Make sure that the charging cable is plugged into the mains

socket.

Disconnect the charging cable connector from the vehicle

socket and plug it back into the vehicle socket after

30 seconds.

If the message continues to be displayed:

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Charging not possi‐

ble s. Owner's Man‐

ual appears.

Communication with the charging point infrastructure is not

functioning correctly.

Make sure that the charging cable is correctly plugged into

the sockets on the vehicle and power connection. If neces-

sary, disconnect the charging cable from the sockets and

then reconnect it.

If the message continues to be displayed:

Use a different charging station.

If the message continues to be displayed:

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow þ

warning lamp lights

up.

Charging not possi‐

ble Visit workshop

appears.

The vehicle electronics are malfunctioning. The high-voltage

battery cannot be charged.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow þ

warning lamp lights

up.

Charging not possi‐

ble s. Owner's Man‐

ual appears.

The high-voltage battery cannot be charged. The charging

cable connector is overheated.

Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket.

Allow the charging cable connector to cool off for several

minutes.

Plug the charging cable back into the vehicle socket.

If the message continues to be displayed:

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The indicator lamp on

the vehicle socket

does not light up. The

high-voltage battery

is not being charged.

The vehicle is inactive.

Activate the vehicle by pressing the # button on the key and

lock it again.

The charging cable

cannot be removed.

The vehicle is in charging mode or has completed active charg-

ing.

Unlock the charging lock by pressing the # button on the

key.

196

Charging process

>> Practical advice.

Driving safety systems

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

! Yellow warning

lamp lights up.

Colour display: Sys‐

tem inoperative

appears.

ABS is malfunctioning. Other driving systems may be deactiva-

ted.

If ABS is faulty, there is also a possibility that other driving

systems may be unavailable.

Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp and display

messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster.

WARNING

If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The

steerability and braking characteristics may be severely

impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are

deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and

accidents.

Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a quali-

fied specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving

safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the

information on the ABS warning lamp and display messages

which may be shown in the instrument cluster.

Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and

traffic conditions.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

J Red warning

lamp lights up while

the engine is running.

A warning tone

sounds.

Colour display: Brake

force distribution

inoperative Stop

See Owner's Manual

appears.

EBD is malfunctioning. This means that ABS, ESP

, Crosswind

Assist and Hill Start Assist are also unavailable.

Other driving systems may be deactivated.

WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without

the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock

early if you brake hard, for example.

The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely

affected. The braking distance may increase in emergency

braking situations.

If ESP

is not operational, the vehicle will not be stabilised by

ESP

The danger of skidding and having an accident increases.

Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and

traffic conditions.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving safety systems

197

>> Practical advice.

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷ Monochrome dis-

play: yellow warning

lamp lights up while

the engine is running.

÷ Colour display:

yellow warning lamp

lights up.

System inoperative

appears.

ESP

is not available due to a malfunction. Other driving sys-

tems may be deactivated.

WARNING

If ESP

is malfunctioning, ESP

is unable to stabilise the

vehicle. In addition, other driving safety systems are

switched off. This increases the risk of skidding and an acci-

dent.

Drive on carefully. Have ESP

checked at a qualified special-

ist workshop.

Brake lamps may be inoperative and thus no longer working

when braking.

Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and

traffic conditions. Do not drive on.

Check that the brake lamps are working.

The brake lamps are not working.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The brake lamps are working.

Drive on carefully.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

÷ Colour display:

yellow warning lamp

lights up.

Brake Assist Sys‐

tem (BAS) inopera‐

tive appears.

The Brake Assist System (BAS) is inoperative.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

÷ Yellow warning

lamp flashes while

driving.

ESP

is intervening because there is a risk of skidding or at

least one of the wheels is spinning.

Pull away carefully.

Accelerate carefully whilst driving.

Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather condi-

tions.

÷ and C and

other warning lamps

are lit.

Colour display: Elec‐

tronics malfunc‐

tion Visit workshop

appears.

The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning.

After switching off the engine, it is no longer possible to lock or

unlock the doors using the remote control on the key or to start

the engine.

Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and

traffic conditions.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

198

Driving safety systems

>> Practical advice.

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Colour display: ÷

Hill start assist

inoperative appears.

Hill start assist is malfunctioning. Vehicle will not be held

automatically when pulling away uphill and may start rolling

immediately.

WARNING

If ESP

is malfunctioning, ESP

is unable to stabilise the

vehicle. In addition, other driving safety systems are

switched off. This increases the risk of skidding and an acci-

dent.

Drive on carefully. Have ESP

checked at a qualified special-

ist workshop.

Other driving systems may be deactivated.

The brake system functions normally, but without hill start

assist.

Drive on carefully.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

h Yellow warning

lamp lights up while

driving.

Colour display: Cor‐

rect tyre pressure

appears.

The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the

tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great.

Check tyre pressure.

Correct the tyre pressure.

Restart tyre pressure monitor.

Driving safety systems

199

>> Practical advice.

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h Yellow warning

lamp lights up while

driving.

Colour display: Tyre

pressure Caution

tyre malfunction

appears.

The tyre pressure monitor has detected a significant loss of

pressure in at least one of the tyres.

WARNING

Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the following risks:

the tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle

speed increase.

the tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which

may greatly impair tyre traction.

the driving characteristics, as well as steering and brak-

ing, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.

Observe the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre

pressure of all the tyres:

at least every two weeks

when the load changes

before embarking on a longer journey

for changed operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Check tyres visually and, if necessary, follow the instructions

for flat tyres.

Check the tyre pressure and correct it if necessary.

h Yellow warning

lamp flashes for

approximately one

minute and then stays

lit.

Colour display: Tyre

pressure monitor

inoperative appears.

The tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning or was not restar-

ted after a wheel change.

WARNING

If you correct the tyre pressure without recalibrating the Run

Flat Indicator, the system cannot issue a warning about a

defective tyre in time. In the event of tyre pressure loss, the

driving characteristics and the steering and braking may be

greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident.

If you correct the tyre pressure, you must recalibrate the Run

Flat Indicator.

Restart tyre pressure monitor.

The display message continues to be displayed.

Drive on carefully.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

200

Driving safety systems

>> Practical advice.

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h Yellow warning

lamp flashes for

approximately

60 seconds and then

remains lit.

Colour display: Tyre

pressure monitor

inoperative wheel

sensors missing

appears.

There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or more

wheels.

WARNING

Risk of accident due to undetected tyre pressure losses. The

system is possibly unable to recognise or register low tyre

pressure.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Wheels have unsuitable tyre pressure sensors.

Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.

J Red warning

lamp lights up.

÷, ! yellow

warning lamps light

up while the engine is

running.

A warning tone

sounds.

Colour display: Elec‐

tronics malfunc‐

tion Stop See Own‐

er's Manual appears.

The following systems are malfunctioning:

ABS (anti-lock braking system)

ESP

(Electronic Stability Program)

Crosswind Assist

Hill start assist

Further driving systems could be switched off automatically.

WARNING

The risk of skidding and having an accident increases due to

malfunctioning driving safety systems.

The brake system functions normally, but without the systems

listed. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard,

for example.

This will greatly impair the ability to steer and brake. The

braking distance may increase in emergency braking situa-

tions.

Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and

traffic conditions.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving safety systems

201

>> Practical advice.

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Monochrome display:

D yellow warning

lamp lights up while

the engine is running.

Power assistance may be malfunctioning, making steering dif-

ficult.

WARNING

You will need to use more force to steer.

There is a risk of an accident.

Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.

If you are able to steer safely:

Drive on carefully.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

If you are unable to steer safely:

Do not drive on.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

D Yellow warning

lamp lights up while

the engine is running.

Colour display: Steer‐

ing malfunction

See Owner's Manual

Electronics mal‐

function See Own‐

er's Manual appears.

Power assistance may be malfunctioning, making steering dif-

ficult.

WARNING

You will need to use more force to steer.

There is a risk of an accident.

Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.

If you are able to steer safely:

Drive on carefully.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

If you are unable to steer safely:

Do not drive on.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driver assistance systems

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The red · warning

lamp is lit.

A warning tone

sounds.

The collision warning detects obstacles on the road.

Pay careful attention to the road and traffic conditions and

be ready to brake.

The red · warning

lamp is lit.

The distance to the vehicle in front is too short for the current

speed.

Increase the distance.

The yellow ^

warning lamp lights

up while driving.

The sensors in the radiator trim are dirty.

Clean the sensors.

202

Driver assistance systems

>> Practical advice.

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Colour display:

Active Brake

Assist inoperative

or Electronics mal‐

function Visit

workshop appears.

Environmental influences or error sources outside the system

are temporarily interfering with Active Brake Assist and radar-

assisted recuperation. Possible causes:

heavy rain or snow

operating temperature is too high

on-board voltage is too low

Active Brake Assist is automatically operational again when the

causes listed no longer apply.

Warning lamp remains lit:

Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and

traffic conditions.

Clean the sensors.

Restart the engine.

Warning lamp still remains lit:

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

^ and C as well

as other warning

lamps are lit.

The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning.

After switching off the engine, it is no longer possible to lock or

unlock the doors using the remote control on the key or to start

the engine.

Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and

traffic conditions.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Ã flashes for

approximately three

seconds.

A warning tone

sounds.

Colour display: Lane

Keeping Assist

inoperative appears.

The windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.

Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and

traffic conditions.

Clean the windscreen.

Environmental influences are interfering with Lane Keeping

Assist. Possible causes:

heavy rain or snow or thick fog is impairing visibility

the sun is low in the sky and shining directly onto the sensor

lane markings cannot be detected

Lane Keeping Assist is automatically operational again when

the causes listed no longer apply.

If the windscreen is clean and the causes listed do not apply,

then the electronics are malfunctioning.

The system electronics are faulty.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driver assistance systems

203

>> Practical advice.

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

¤ flashes for a

maximum of five sec-

onds.

Colour display: the

green Ã warning

lamp flashes for a

maximum of five sec-

onds.

A warning tone

sounds.

A lane boundary marking was crossed without using the turn

signal.

Stay inside the lane boundary markings.

Use the turn signal before changing lanes.

¯ flashes for

approximately ten

seconds.

A warning tone

sounds.

Colour display: ¯

Cruise control

inoperative appears.

Cruise control is malfunctioning and deactivates automatically.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

¯ flashes for

approximately ten

seconds. C and

other warning lamps

are also lit.

A warning tone

sounds.

Colour display: Elec‐

tronics malfunc‐

tion Visit workshop

appears.

The central vehicle electronics system and cruise control are

malfunctioning. After switching off the engine, it is no longer

possible to lock or unlock the doors using the remote control on

the key or to start the engine.

Pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention

to road and traffic conditions.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

È lights up.

The speed display

flashes.

A warning tone

sounds.

The vehicle is exceeding the set limit speed.

Brake the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic condi-

tions.

204

Driver assistance systems

>> Practical advice.

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

È flashes for

approximately ten

seconds.

A warning tone

sounds.

Colour display: Lim‐

iter inoperative

appears.

The speed limiter is malfunctioning and deactivates automati-

cally.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The Ò warning

lamp flashes for a

minute or lights up

continuously.

Colour display: Black

ice warning appears.

The outside temperature has fallen to or below 3 °C. There is a

risk of black ice.

Adapt your driving style and speed to suit the weather con-

ditions.

Battery, lights, heating

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Rear window heating

or seat heating

switches off automati-

cally or cannot be

switched on.

Battery is not sufficiently charged.

Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.

Ý Yellow warning

lamp lights up.

Battery reserve

level appears.

The charge status of the high-voltage battery has dropped into

the reserve range.

Charge the high-voltage battery.

Monochrome display:

Ý Yellow warning

lamp flashes.

Colour display: Ý

Yellow warning lamp

lights up. Battery

reserve level

appears.

The charge status of the high-voltage battery is below 10%.

Charge the high-voltage battery.

õ Display flashes.

The vehicle has

switched itself off.

Battery charge too

low Charge HV bat‐

tery now appears.

The vehicle has switched itself off because the charge status of

the high-voltage battery is too low. After restarting the vehicle,

depending on the charge status of the high-voltage battery, the

vehicle can only drive on a maximum of 1 km.

Park the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic condi-

tions.

Charge the high-voltage battery.

Battery, lights, heating

205

>> Practical advice.

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Red warning

lamp lights up when

driving or when the

vehicle is ready to

start.

A warning tone

sounds.

Colour display: Stop

See Owner's Manual

appears.

12 V battery is not being charged or the high-voltage battery is

malfunctioning.

Do not drive on.

The engine may switch itself off after a short while.

Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and

traffic conditions.

Switch off the engine.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

It may not be possible to drive the vehicle further and it may

not be possible to restart the engine.

Colour display: #

Warning lamp lights

up.

Malfunction Visit

workshop appears.

Battery monitoring is malfunctioning.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Monochrome display:

b Warning lamp

lights up.

Dipped beam is on continuously. Main beam cannot be activa-

ted.

Switch off the engine.

Start the engine.

Warning lamp remains lit:

Brake lamps are inoperative. The bulb or LED is faulty.

WARNING

Risk of accident due to faulty brake lamps.

The brake lamps are faulty and no longer alert other road users

when braking.

Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and

traffic conditions.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning lamp still remains lit:

Rain/light sensor is malfunctioning.

Manually adjust exterior lighting.

Manually adjust windscreen wipers.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Colour display: b

Warning lamp lights

up.

Malfunction See

Owner's Manual

appears.

Dipped beam is on continuously. Main beam cannot be activa-

ted.

Switch off the engine.

Restart the engine.

206

Battery, lights, heating

>> Practical advice.

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Warning lamp remains lit:

Rain/light sensor is malfunctioning.

Manually adjust exterior lighting.

Manually adjust windscreen wipers.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Colour display: b

Warning lamp lights

up.

Brake lamps inoper‐

ative appears.

Brake lamps are inoperative. The bulb or LED is faulty.

WARNING

Risk of accident due to faulty brake lamps.

The brake lamps are faulty and no longer alert other road users

when braking.

Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and

traffic conditions.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Colour display:

Switch off lights

appears.

A warning tone

sounds.

Lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle.

Turn control knob for the lights to Ã or u.

smart Audio-System and smart Media-System

Bluetooth

connection

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

A Bluetooth

connec-

tion cannot be estab-

lished between the

smart Audio-System

or smart Media-Sys-

tem and mobile phone.

Ascertain whether the mobile phone is compatible with the

system. Information about compatible mobile phones: http://

www.smart.com/connect

Check the security settings on your mobile phone.

Check that the Bluetooth

function is enabled on the smart

Audio-System or smart Media-system and on your mobile

phone.

Start the device search on the smart Audio-System or smart

Media-System and on the mobile phone.

smart Audio-System and smart Media-System

207

>> Practical advice.

Navigation system in the smart Media-System

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

No map is displayed in

the navigation sys-

tem.

The SD card with the map data is missing or damaged.

Check to see that the SD card is inserted.

The position of the

vehicle in the naviga-

tion system does not

match the vehicle's

actual position.

The GPS symbol on the

display is grey or yel-

low.

GPS reception is poor.

Drive the vehicle to another position where GPS reception is

better.

The road's course in

the navigation system

no longer coincides

with the actual road.

The map data is out of date.

Update the map data.

The navigation system

does not display any

traffic information.

Route guidance has not been started.

Select a destination and start navigation.

HD Traffic is not available or the subscription for HD Traffic has

expired.

Check whether HD Traffic is available for the country you are

in or upgrade the subscription for HD Traffic.

There are no naviga-

tion messages during

route guidance.

The road's course is not detected. The map data may be out of

date.

Check if route guidance has started.

If not, select a destination and start navigation.

Navigation messages are switched off.

Switch on navigation messages.

Voice control system in the smart Media-System

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The voice control sys-

tem does not under-

stand voice com-

mands.

The interval for entering voice commands has been exceeded.

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

Voice commands have not been given from the driver's seat.

Issue voice commands from the driver's seat.

Noise from the blower or wind noise are interfering with voice

commands.

Avoid interfering noises.

208

smart Audio-System and smart Media-System

>> Practical advice.

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Voice commands have not been given clearly.

Speak clearly when giving voice commands.

A voice command is unknown.

Enter voice command "Help".

A list of possible voice commands appears.

smart Audio-System and smart Media-System

209

>> Practical advice.

Obtaining technical data

Information on technical data: http://

www.smart.de

The technical data was determined in

accordance with EU Directives. All data

applies to the vehicle's standard equip-

ment. Differences will be present in the

case of vehicles with optional equipment.

Further information is available from any

smart Centre.

Reading vehicle data

Useful information

Please observe the following notes for the

specified vehicle data:

Items of optional equipment reduce the

maximum payload

Vehicle-specific weight information can

be found on the vehicle identification

plate.

For certain countries only: you can find

vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC

(CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY) docu-

ments. These documents are delivered

with your vehicle.

Vehicle identification plate

Vehicle identification plate position

Vehicle identification plate

;

Vehicle manufacturer

EU type approval number

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

Maximum permissible gross weight

Maximum permissible front axle load

Maximum permissible rear axle load

Paint code

The data shown on the vehicle identifi-

cation plate is example data. This data is

different for every vehicle and can devi-

ate from the data shown here. The data

applicable to the vehicle is found on the

vehicle's identification plate.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

Slide the right-hand front seat to its

rearmost position.

Fold floor covering : upwards.

VIN ; is located there.

The VIN can also be found on the vehicle

identification plate.

210

Reading vehicle data

>> Technical data.

Dimensions and weights

The heights specified may vary as a result

of the following factors:

tyres

load

condition of the suspension

optional equipment

smart EQ fortwo Dimensions

and weights

Opening height :

1855 mm

Vehicle length 2695 mm

Vehicle width including

exterior mirrors

1893 mm

Vehicle width excluding

exterior mirrors

1663 mm

Vehicle width excluding

exterior mirrors for

vehicles equipped with

wheel trims

1671.8 mm

Vehicle height 1555 mm

Wheelbase 1873 mm

Maximum ground clear-

ance

113 mm

Maximum tailgate load 100 kg

Permissible roof load 0 kg

smart EQ fortwo cabrio Dimensions

and weights

Vehicle length 2695 mm

Vehicle width including

exterior mirrors

1893 mm

Vehicle width excluding

exterior mirrors

1663 mm

Vehicle width excluding

exterior mirrors for

vehicles equipped with

wheel trims

1671.8 mm

Vehicle height 1553 mm

Wheelbase 1873 mm

Maximum ground clear-

ance

112 mm

Maximum tailgate load

without side bars

100 kg

Maximum tailgate load

with sidebars stowed

0 kg

Permissible roof load 0 kg

Charging time

The options listed for charging a high-

voltage battery are not available in all

countries.

High-voltage battery

Type Lithium-ion

Vehicles with a 7 kW/

4.6 kW on-board charger

Charging time

(from 10% to 80%)

at 32 A/230 V

Approx. 2 h

Charging time

(from 10% to 80%)

at 20 A/230 V

Approx. 3 h

30 min

Charging time

(from 10% to 80%)

at 10 A/230 V

Approx. 6 h

Reading vehicle data

211

>> Technical data.

High-voltage battery

Charging time

(from 10% to 80%)

at 8 A/230 V

Approx. 9 h

30 min

Vehicles with a 22 kW

on-board charger

Charging time

(from 10% to 80%)

at 3x32 A/230 V

Approx. 40 min

Charging cable

Charging the battery at a charging station

or wall box

Nominal voltage max. 400 V AC,

max. 3-phase

Nominal frequency 50 Hz/60 Hz

Nominal current max. 32 A

Charge output from 4.6 kW to

22 kW

System of protection IP44 (inserted),

IP24 (not

inserted)

Outside temperature

Observe the notes on

maintaining the high-

voltage bat-

tery(Y page 80)

-40 † to +50 †

Standards IEC 61851-1,

IEC 62196-1,

IEC 62186-2

Interface Type 2 to Type

Also observe the identification plate on the

charging cable connector.

Service products

Please note

Also observe the information in the section

"Checking and refilling service products"

(Y page 157).

Vehicle components and their respective

service products must match. Therefore,

only use products tested and approved by

Mercedes-Benz.

Information on service products

The following table lists all technical data

for the service products of the vehicle. Fur-

ther information on service products:

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com and in any

smart Centre.

Service prod-

ucts

Specifications

Corrosion

inhibitor/

antifreeze

(Y page 157)

325.6, 326.6

MB-Freigabe or MB-

Approval is stated on the

corrosion inhibitor/anti-

freeze containers.

Windscreen

washer fluid

(Y page 158)

Temperatures above

freezing point: mixing

ratio of 1:100

MB SummerFit to water.

Temperatures below

freezing point: for the

correct mixing ratio of

MB WinterFit and water,

please observe the infor-

mation on the antifreeze

container.

Bulb types

The following table lists the correct bulb

types of the vehicle:

Bulb Type

Dipped-beam/main-beam

headlamps

H4 60/55

Front foglamps H 16

Turn signals PY 21 W

Side turn signal lamps WY 5 W

Licence plate lighting W 5 W

Interior lighting W 5 W

212

Bulb types

>> Technical data.

Tail lamps

Bulb Type

Tail lamp and brake lamp P21 5 W

Rear foglamp P21 W

Bulb Type

Reversing lamp W 16 W

Turn signals PY 21 W

Fuse allocation

No. Consumer Current Colour cod-

ing

1 Starter motor 5 A Brown

2 Power steering control unit 5 A Brown

3 Multifunction lever 5 A Brown

4 Airbag 5 A Brown

5 ‑ ‑ ‑

6 Instrument cluster 10 A Red

7 Horn, alarm system 15 A Blue

8 Power supply control unit 10 A Red

9 Power supply control unit 10 A Red

10 Central control unit 20 A Yellow

11 Central control unit 15 A Blue

12 Central control unit 10 A Red

13 Central control unit 15 A Blue

Fuse allocation

213

>> Technical data.

No. Consumer Current Colour cod-

ing

14 Power window switch (without reversing func-

tion)

30 A Green

ESP

, transmission control unit

5 A Brown

16 Interior lighting 10 A Red

17 Immobiliser 3 A Violet

18 Electrical exterior mirror 5 A Brown

19 Brake lamps 10 A Red

20 Cruise control, radio, belt warning 15 A Blue

21 Not for smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio,

smart EQ forfour: central control unit, fuel

pump, ignition system

15 A Blue

22 Rear window wiper 15 A Blue

23 Starter motor

smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio, smart

EQ forfour only: power supply control unit

40 A Orange

24 ‑ ‑ ‑

25 Power supply control unit 30 A Green

26 Radio 20 A Yellow

27 Daytime driving lamps 5 A Brown

28 12 V socket, cigarette lighter 15 A Blue

29 Power supply control unit 5 A Brown

30 Forward collision warning 15 A Blue

31 ‑ ‑ ‑

32 Radio, central control unit 15 A Blue

33 Tail lamps, front foglamps, hazard warning

lamp button, locking button, headlamp range

control, power windows, licence plate lighting,

radio, control unit for heating or climate control

system, cruise control, limiter, parking aid but-

ton, program selector button, tailgate release,

Lane Keeping Assist camera, automatic start/

stop system button

25 A Cyan

34 Power supply control unit 25 A Cyan

35 Headlamps, daytime driving lamps 25 A Cyan

36 - 40 ‑ ‑ ‑

41 smart EQ forfour only: seat heating in the rear 15 A Blue

214

Fuse allocation

>> Technical data.

No. Consumer Current Colour cod-

ing

42 smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio, smart

EQ forfour only: seat heating in the front

25 A Cyan

43 Mirror heating 5 A Brown

44 Power windows (automatic reversing feature) 25 A Cyan

45 Transmission control unit

smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio, smart

EQ forfour only: EV control unit

5 A Brown

46 Radio amplifier 20 A Yellow

47 ‑ ‑ ‑

48 smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio, smart

EQ forfour only: vacuum pump

10 A Red

49 smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio, smart

EQ forfour only: heating control unit, air-condi-

tioning

10 A Red

Radio type approvals for the tyre

pressure monitors

Country Radio type approval number

Argen-

tina

MW2433A

H-12337

GG4

H-12338

Brazil 2770-12-8001

Model: MW2433A

0381-13-8001

Model: GG4

Abu

Dhabi

Dubai

TRA, Registered-NO

ER0092100/12

TRA, Registered-NO

ER0099792/12

TRA, Registered-NO

ER0076990/11

Dealer-NO: DA0047074/10

Country Radio type approval number

Jordan Model: Gen Alpha Wal 2 TPMS

transmitter

Type Approval Number:

TRC/LPD/2012/114

Model: Gen Gamma Gen 4

433.92 MHz.

Type Approval Number:

TRC/LPD/2012/190

Model: Corax 3 MRXMC34MA4

Type Approval Number:

TRC/LPD/2011/158

Type Number: LPD

Morocco MR7319 ANRT 2012/ 11/07/2012

MR7672 ANRT 2012/ 23/11/2012

MR6706 ANRT 2011

Moldova 1024

Philip-

pines

No: ESD-1206394C

No: ESD-1306871C

Serbia И 011 12

Radio type approvals for the tyre pressure monitors

215

>> Technical data.

Country Radio type approval number

Singa-

pore

Compliance with IDA Standard

DA- 103365

South

Africa

TA-2012/719

TA-2012/1540

TA-2011/1370

Installing two-way radios and mobile

phones

WARNING

The electromagnetic radiation from two-

way radios can interfere with the vehicle

electronics if they are manipulated or

retrofitted incorrectly. This could jeop-

ardise the operating safety of the vehicle.

There is a risk of an accident.

You should have all work on electrical

and electronic components carried out at

a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING

If you operate two-way radios incorrectly

in the vehicle, their electromagnetic

radiation can interfere with the vehicle

electronics, for example if:

the two-way radio is not connected to

an exterior aerial

the exterior aerial is not correctly

mounted or is not low-reflection

This could jeopardise the operating

safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an

accident.

Have the low-reflection exterior aerial

fitted at a qualified specialist workshop.

When operating two-way radios in the

vehicle, always connect them to the low-

reflection exterior aerial.

Have the engine electronics and associ-

ated parts, such as control units, sensors,

actuating components or electric cables

serviced only at a qualified specialist

workshop. Vehicle components may oth-

erwise wear more quickly and the vehi-

cle's operating permit may be invalida-

ted.

The operating permit may be invalida-

ted if the instructions for installation

and use of two-way radios are not

observed.

In particular, the following requirements

must be complied with:

only approved wavebands may be used

observe the maximum permissible out-

put in these wavebands

only approved aerial positions may be

used

Excessive levels of electromagnetic radia-

tion can cause damage to health. The use of

an exterior aerial takes into consideration

the scientific discussion surrounding the

possible health risk posed by electromag-

netic fields.

The following aerial positions may be used

for the correct installation of two-way

radios:

Front roof area

;

Rear roof area

Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609

(Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for

installation of aftermarket radio frequency

transmitting equipment") when retrofitting

two-way radios. Comply with the legal

requirements for add-on parts.

If your vehicle has fittings for two-way

radio equipment, use the power supply and

aerial connections intended for use in the

basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manu-

facturer's additional instructions during

installation.

Deviations with respect to wavebands,

maximum transmission outputs or aerial

positions must be approved by smart.

216

Installing two-way radios and mobile phones

>> Technical data.

The maximum transmission output (PEAK)

at the base of the aerial must not exceed

the following values:

Waveband Maximum

transmission

output

Tetra

380 - 410 MHz

20 W

Mobile communications

generation 2G/3G/4G

6 W

The following can be used in the vehicle

without restrictions:

two-way radios with a maximum trans-

mission output of up to 100 mW

mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)

There are no restrictions when positioning

the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for

the following wavebands:

tetra

mobile communications (2G/3G/4G)

Installing two-way radios and mobile phones

217

>> Technical data.

218

219

220

Publication details

Internet

Further information about smart vehicles

and about Daimler AG can be found on the

following websites:

http://www.smart.com

http://www.daimler.com

Editorial office

You are welcome to forward any queries or

suggestions you may have regarding this

Owner's Manual to the technical documen-

tation team at the following address:

Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,

70546 Stuttgart, Germany

Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated

or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in

part, without written permission from

Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AG

Mercedesstraße 137

70327 Stuttgart

Germany

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

The following symbols are used in this

Owner's Manual:

WARNING

Warning notes draw your attention to

hazards that may endanger your health

or life, or the health or life of others.

Observe the warning notes.

Environmental note

Environmental notes provide you with

information on environmentally aware

actions or disposal.

Notes on material damage alert you to

dangers that could lead to damage to

your vehicle.

These symbols indicate useful instruc-

tions or further information that could be

helpful to you.

X Instructions that must be followed.

X Several consecutive symbols indicate an

instruction with several consecutive steps.

(Y page) Further information on a topic

YY A warning or an instruction that is

continued on the next page.

Display text: Display text in the instru-

ment cluster display, the smart Audio-Sys-

tem or the smart Media-System.

WARNING

If the front passenger airbag has been

activated, a child on the front passenger

seat may be hit by the front passenger

airbag in the event of an accident. There

is a risk of injury or fatal injury.

NEVER use a rearward-facing child

restraint system on a seat protected by

an ACTIVE FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERI-

OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Observe the "Children in the vehicle" sec-

tion .

As at 27.06.2018

>> Owner's Manual

smart EQ fortwo and smart EQ fortwo cabrio

É45358448160ËÍ

4535844816

Order no. 6522 0312 02

Part no. 4535844816

Edition ÄJ2018-1b

www.smart.com smart - A Daimler brand

smart EQ fortwo and smart EQ fortwo cabrio Owner's Manual